A R C ’s

----------------------------
JUNE 2022 TOPNOTCHERS
Top Model
 CRIMINOLOGY – 20%
Easy (30%) Moderate (50%) Difficult (20%)
A. INTRODUCTION TO
CRIMINOLOGY Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Percentage Number of Recall information Explain, Interpret, Using the Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
Weight Items summarize, information in critiquing,
Recognizing, examine another familiar Comparing, experimenting, Designing,
and and listing, describing, organizing, constructing,
The registered criminologist can Distribution retrieving, naming,
paraphrase,
classify
situation
deconstructing,
judging
planning,
Distribution
perform the competencies under the finding Implementing
carrying out, using,
interrogating,
finding
producing,
inventing
following sub-topics: executing

20% 100

3% 15

1. Describe, explain and use the basic theories of

classical and positivist in explaining the etiology of 1.0% 5 2 2 1 - - -
crime, criminal behavior, deviant behavior, and human
behavior.

2. Interpret and differentiate the fundamental

concepts of law, crime, criminology, criminal justice, .60% 3 1 1 1 - - -
deviance, and delinquency.
1. Describe, explain and use the basic
theories of classical and positivist in
explaining the etiology of crime, criminal
behavior, deviant behavior, and human
behavior.
1. What deals primarily with the study of crime causation?
A. Criminal Etiology
B. Criminal Epidemiology
C. Criminal Ecology
D. Criminal Physical Anthropology
2. It is a point of view held by a particular group or belief or system of
belief accepted as authoritative by some group of school.
a. Theory
b. School
c. Science
d. School of thought
 CRIMINOLOGY SCHOOL OF
THOUGHTS
SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT
A school of thought is a point of view held by a particular
group or belief or system of belief accepted as authoritative by
some group of school
Each school of criminology explains crime in its own
manner and suggests punishment and measures which suits its
ideology
Each school represents the social attitude of people
towards crime in a given time
3. This school of thought is based on the assumption that individuals
choose to commit crimes after weighing the consequences of their
action.
a. THE CLASSICAL SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
b. THE NEO-CLASSICAL SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
c. THE POSITIVIST/ITALIAN SCHOOL
d. THE CHICAGO SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
 THE CLASSICAL SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
FOUNDER:
CESSARE BECCARIA (Cesare Bonesara Marchese de Beccaria)
JEREMY BENTHAM
The basis of criminal liability is human free will and the purpose
of penalty is retribution.
That the man is essentially a moral creature with an absolute free
will to choose good and evil, thereby placing more stress upon the
effects or result of the felonious act that upon the criminal himself.
This school of thought is based on the assumption that
individuals choose to commit crimes after weighing the
consequences of their action.
Fear of punishment can deter them from committing a crime and
society can control behavior by making the pain or punishment greater
than the please of criminal gains.
On Crimes and Punishments (Dei delitti e delle pene)
He openly condemned the death penalty because the state
does not possess the right to take lives; and because capital
punishment is neither a useful nor a necessary form of
punishment
developed in his treatise a number of innovative and
influential principles: PUNISHMENT is
1. Deterrent, not a retributive, function.
2. Proportionate to the crime committed.
3. Probability not its severity, would achieve a preventive effect.
4. Procedures of criminal convictions should be public.
5. Prompt.
HIGHLIGHTS OF CESARE BECCARIA’S IDEAS REGARDING
CRIMES AND THE CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM
1. In forming a human society, men and women sacrifice a
portion of their liberty so as to enjoy peace and security.
2. Punishments that go beyond the need of preserving the public
safety are in their nature unjust.
3. Criminal laws must be clear and certain. Judges must make
uniform judgments in similar crimes.
4. The law must specify the degree of evidence that will justify
the detention of an accused offender prior to his trial.
5. Accusations must be public. False accusations should be
severely punished.
6. To torture accused offenders to obtain a confession is
inadmissible.
7. The promptitude of punishment is one of the most effective curbs
on crimes.
8. The aim of punishment can only be to prevent the criminal from
committing new crimes against his countrymen, and to keep others
from doing likewise. Punishments, therefore, and the method of
inflicting them, should be chosen in due proportion to the crime, so as
to make the most lasting impression on the minds of men.
9. Capital punishment is inefficacious and its place should be
substituted by life imprisonment.
10. It is better to prevent crimes than to punish them. That is the
chief purpose of all good legislation.
4. The prevention of a certain act or acts (such as a crime) through fear
of punishment.
a. Deterrence
b. GENERAL DETERRENCE
c. SPECIFIC DETERRENCE
d. Individual deterrence
 MODERN OUTGROWTHS OF CLASSICAL SCHOOL
Rational Choice Theory, Routine Activities Theory, General
Deterrence Theory, Specific Deterrence, Incapacitation

DETERRENCE - the prevention of a certain act or acts (such as a

crime) through fear of punishment.

A. GENERAL DETERRENCE - A crime control policy that hinges on the

fear of criminal penalties. General deterrence measures, such as long
prison sentences for violent crimes, are aimed at convincing the
potential law violator that the pains associated with crime outweigh its
benefits.
B. SPECIFIC DETERRENCE - A crime control policy proposing that
punishment be severe enough to convince convicted offenders never
to repeat their criminal activity.
THREE (3) CHARACTERISTICS OF AN EFECTIVE
DETTERENT (CE- SE – CE)

1. CELERITY OR SWIFTNESS - the rapidity with which

punishment follows a crime.
2. SEVERITY - the complexity or unpleasantness of a sanction.
3. CERTAINTY - the likelihood that a crime will be detected and
punished.
4. The following are the characteristics of the Classical School of
Criminology;
1. The basis of criminal liability is human free-will and the purpose of penalty
is retribution
2. Man is essentially a moral creature with an absolute free-will to choose
between right and wrong
3. Criminals are distinguishable from non-criminals because of their physical
deviation
4. That every man is therefore responsible for his act
A. 1, 2, 3 are correct
B. 1, 3, 4 are correct
C. 2, 3, 4 are correct
D. 1, 2, 4 are correct
5. The cartographical school of criminology stated that crimes against
person increase during summer and crimes against property increase
during winter. Who is the proponent of the said theory?
A. Robert King Merton
B. Edwin Sutherland
C. Adolphe Quetelet
D. Earnest Hooton
6. This school of thought claimed that man is occasionally subdued by
strange and morbid phenomenon, which contains him to do wrong, in
spite or contrary to his volition.
a. THE CLASSICAL SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
b. THE NEO-CLASSICAL SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
c. THE POSITIVIST/ITALIAN SCHOOL
d. THE CHICAGO SCHOOL OF CRIMINOLOGY
7. The positivists maintained that crime as any other act is ______
a. A naturally immoral to be condemned even if it is not written
b. natural phenomenon and is comparable to disaster or calamity.
c. An anti-social behavior that needs to be treated with punishment
d. A deviancy that can be considered crime when the society says so.
The term “POSITIVISM” refers to a method of analysis based on the
collection of observable scientific facts.
- Positivists believe that causes of behavior can be measured and
observed.
- It demands for facts and scientific proof, thus, changing the study of
crimes and criminals into scientific approach.
- Positive theorists were the first to claim the importance of looking at
individuals’ differences among criminals. These theorists who
concentrated on the individual structures of persons stated that
people are passive and controlled whose behaviors are imposed upon
them by biological and environmental factors.
 EZCHIA MARCO “CESARE” LOMBROSO/ CESARE
LOMBROSO (1836 – 1909)
He is recognized as the “Father of Modern and Empirical
Criminology” due to his application of modern scientific methods
to trace criminal behavior. However, most of his ideas are now
discredited.
Known for the concept of atavistic stigmata (the physical
features of creatures at an earlier stage of development).
He claimed that criminals are distinguishable from non-criminals
due to the presence of atavistic stigmata and crimes committed by
those who are born with certain recognizable heredity traits.
Lombroso’s work supported the idea that a criminal is a
biologically and physically inferior person.
He wrote the essay entitled “CRIME: Its Causes and Remedies”
8. According to the study of Lombroso, he noted that most women are
not criminal, however, they are most often________
a. Habitual criminals
b. Occasional criminals
c. Victim
d. Born to be wild
Founded criminal anthropology suggesting that physiological
trait is indicative of criminal tendencies such as measurement of
cheek bones, hairline and clef palate.
THE CRIMINAL MAN (1876) – This criminal man evolved
from the autopsy performed by Lombroso in which he recognized
the following stigmata indicative of criminal tendencies
THE FEMALE OFFENDER (1901) – According to the study
of Lombroso, he noted that most women are not criminal,
however, they are most often occasional criminals but, some
women are atavistic criminals.
10. The return of a trait or reappearance of previous behavior after a
period of absence.
a. ATAVISM
b. ATAVISTIC ANOMALY
c. Atavistic stigmata
d. Born Criminals
CLASSIFICATIONS OF CRIMINALS BY
LOMBROSO
1. Born Criminals – there are born criminals according to
Lombroso, the belief that being criminal behavior is inherited.
ATAVISM - The return of a trait or reappearance of previous
behavior after a period of absence.
ATAVISTIC ANOMALY - physically, their resemblances on the
evolutionary scale to more primitive times where people were
savages.
2. Insane Criminals – are those who commit crime due to
abnormalities or psychological disorders. They should be
exempted from criminal liability.
3. Criminaloid – a person who commits crime due to less
physical stamina/self control.
Types Of Criminaloids:
Habitual Criminals -
Criminal by Passion – hot headed, impulsive person, great
emotions like fit of anger
Juridical Criminals – violates the law by accident

4. Occasional Criminal – are those who commit crime due to

insignificant reasons that pushed them to do at a given
occasion.
5. Pseudo-criminals – are those who kill in self-defense.
11. Who is a person that commits crime due to less physical stamina or
self-control?
A. Criminaloids
B. Criminal by passion
C. Insane criminal
D. Born criminal
12. The basis of criminal liability in classical school is _____and the
purpose of penalty is_____
a. human free will : retribution
b. Morbid phenomenon : treatment
c. Rational thinking : deterrence
d. Physical attributes : reformation
13. Cesare Lombroso focuses on biological while Raffaele Garofalo on
Psychological determinism of crime. How about Enrico Ferri?
a. Psychological
b. Manifold causes
c. Sociological
d. Economical
ENRICO FERRI (1856 – 1929)
He focused his study on the influences of psychological factors
and sociological factors such as ECONOMICS ON CRIMES.
He believed that criminals could not be held morally
responsible because they did not choose to commit crimes but
rather were driven to commit crimes by conditions of their lives.
Advocated the “Theory of Imputability and the Denial of
the Free Will” in 1878.
RAFFAELE GAROFALO ( 1852 – 1934)
Raffaele Garofalo ( 1852 – 1934) – Another follower of
Lombroso, an Italian nobleman, magistrate, senator, and
professor of law. Like Lombroso and Ferri, he rejected the
doctrine of free will and supported the position that the only way
to understand crime was to study it by scientific methods.
Influenced on Lombroso’s theory of atavistic stigmata (man’s
inferior/ animalistic behavior), he traced the roots of criminal
behavior not to physical features but to their psychological
equivalents, which he called “MORAL ANOMALIES”.
TYPES OF CRIMINALS BY GAROFALO
1. MURDERERS
those who are satisfied from vengeance/revenge
2. VIOLENT CRIMINALS
those who commit very serious crimes
3. DEFFICIENT CRIMINALS
those who commit crimes against property
4. LASCIVIOUS CRIMINALS
those who commit crimes against chastity and other
sexual crimes.
14. Raffaele Garofalo traced the roots of criminal behavior not to
physical features but to their psychological equivalents, which he called
a. Physical anomalies
b. Immoral anomalies
c. Mental anomalies
d. Moral anomalies
15. Cesare Beccaria developed in his treatise a number of innovative
and influential principles. According to him, punishment is:
1. Must go beyond the need of preserving the public safety
2. Proportionate to the crime committed.
3. Severity and not probability, would achieve a preventive effect
4. Must be Prompt.
5. Deterrent, not a retributive, function.

a. 1345
b. 2345
c. 135
d. 245
16. Kardo was born from a criminal family and he was always looking
for a pleasure in life but do not take any want risk and avoids pain. PO1
Victor Mangubat is a great representation of a _____.
A. Rational Calculator
B. Atavistic
C. Hedonist
D. Criminaloid
17. Select the approach used by Lombroso, Ferri, and Garofalo that
quantifies and measures behavior and the social conditions associated
with it.
A. Positivism
B. Socialism
C. Modernism
D. Behaviorism
18. Who added a social dimension to Lombroso's work by arguing that
people commit crimes due to outside forces that they cannot control?
A. Cesare Beccaria
B. Enrico Ferry
C. Jeremy Bentham
D. Raffaele Garofalo
19. What is innate to man when desire and capability is present?
a. Intent
b. Motive
c. Instrumentality
d. Criminal tendency
20. According to him, crime is as old as mankind and is inevitable to
growing society. He maintains that crime is not only normal for society
but that it is necessary. Without crime there could be no evolution of
law.
a. Cesare Beccaria
b. Cesare Lombroso
c. Abrahamsen
d. Emile Durkheim
21. The bio-psychosocial model of crime causation is an example of
____
a. SINGLE/UNITARY THEORY
b. MULTIPLE FACTOR THEORY
c. ECLECTIC THEORY
d. INTEGRATED THEORY
 TYPES OF EXPLANATION TO CRIMINAL
BEHAVIOR
1. SINGLE/UNITARY THEORY – contends that crime is produced by
one factor. It may be biological, sociological, or psychological.
2. MULTIPLE FACTOR THEORY – views that crime is not a product of
a single cause or factor but a combination of several factors.
3. ECLECTIC THEORY – That crime stemmed by one or more
factors while in other instances it is caused by another set of
factors.
4. INTEGRATED THEORY – A theory that combines two or more
theories to generate a single model or framework
2. Interpret and differentiate the
fundamental concepts of law, crime,
criminology, criminal justice, deviance,
and delinquency.
22. Refers to the scientific study of crimes, criminals, and victims. It also
deals with the prevention, and solution of crimes.
a. Criminology as defined by Edwind Sutherland
b. Criminology as defined by RA 6506
c. Criminology as defined by IRR RA 11131
d. Criminology as defined by RA 11131
 CRIMINOLOGY
In its broadest sense, criminology is the entire body of
knowledge regarding crimes, criminals, and the effort of the
society to prevent and repress them.
In a narrower sense, criminology is the scientific study of
crimes and criminals.

It also refers to the scientific study of crimes, criminals,

and victims. It also deals with the prevention, and solution of
crimes. (R.A. 11131)
23. Psychologically, crime is an act, which is considered
a. in violation of a criminal law
b. an act that is injurious, detrimental or harmful to the norms of
society
c. undesirable due to behavioral maladjustment
d. exists when it is reported.
 CRIME
Crime may be defined as:

An act or omission in violation of a criminal law in its legal

point of view.
An anti-social act; an act that is injurious, detrimental or
harmful to the norms of society; they are the unacceptable acts
in its social definition.
Psychologically, crime is an act, which is considered
undesirable due to behavioral maladjustment of the offender;
acts that are caused by maladaptive or abnormal behaviors.
 WHEN DOES CRIME EXIST?
• In the legal viewpoint, crime exists when the court has proved
the guilty.
• In the scientific point of view, crime exists when it is
reported. This is more realistic but not all reported cases are
with the sound basis of true happening, some of them are
also unfounded.
24. This pertains to the study of how people, the criminal, and the
government reacts towards the breaking of laws.
a. THE MAKING OF LAWS
b. THE BREAKING OF LAWS
c. PENOLOGY
d. Nota
 SCOPE AND DIVISION OF THE STUDY OF
CRIMINOLOGY
A. THE MAKING OF LAWS
This pertains to the examination of the nature of and structure of
laws
B. THE BREAKING OF LAWS
This pertains to the examination of the reasons of crime causation
which primarily deals to answer issues despite the presence of laws
people still commit crimes.
C. REACTION TOWARDS THE BREAKING OF LAWS
This pertains to the study of how people, the criminal, and the
government reacts towards the breaking of laws because the reactions
necessarily bring light to the development of modern measures to treat
criminal offenders at the same time the reaction maybe contributory to
criminality.
25. It is rule of conduct, just, and obligatory prescribed by legitimate
authority for the common benefit.
a. Evidence
b. Ethics
c. Morality
d. Law
26. Laws should be made for the protection, common good and benefit
of the people. “SALUS POPULI EST SUPREMA LEX”
a. It is rule of conduct
b. It is just
c. It is obligatory
d. It is prescribed by legitimate authority
e. It is ordained for the common benefit
27. Laws serve as guides of an individual in relation to his fellowmen
and to his community
a. It is rule of conduct
b. It is just
c. It is obligatory
d. It is prescribed by legitimate authority
e. It is ordained for the common benefit
 LAW
It is rule of conduct
 laws serve as guides of an individual in relation to his fellowmen and to
his community
It is just
 it means that the law must be fair; treats every person the same and based
on the values and ethics held by the majority of society
It is obligatory
 it means that the law must be enforced, if not the purpose of its creation will
not be served
It is prescribed by legitimate authority
 it means that the law was made by persons who are given the power to
make it.
It is ordained for the common benefit
 laws should be made for the protection, common good and benefit of the
people. “SALUS POPULI EST SUPREMA LEX” –
28. The doctrine of Pro Reo advocates that penal laws and laws penal in
nature are construed and applied in a way_________
a. Strict and harsh to the offender
b. lenient or liberal to the offender.
c. lenient or liberal to the community
d. lenient or liberal to the state
 PROREO DOCTRINE
“The doctrine of pro reo advocates that penal laws
and laws penal in nature are construed and applied in a
way lenient or liberal/in favor to the offender,
consonant to and consistent with the constitutional
guarantee that an accused shall be presumed innocent
until his guilt is established beyond reasonable doubt
 CRIMINAL LAW
A branch of municipal law which defines crimes, treats of their
nature and provides for their punishment.

SOURCES OF CRIMINAL LAW

1. The Revised Penal Code (Act No. 3815) and its amendments
2. Special penal laws passed by the Philippine Commission,
Philippine Assembly, Philippine Legislature, National Assembly,
the Congress of the Philippines, and the Batasang Pambansa.
3. Penal Presidential Decrees issued during Martial Law.
29. It is defined as “state authority to enact legislation that may
interfere with personal liberty or property in order to promote the
general welfare.”
a. Police power of the state
b. Power of eminent domain
c. Power of taxation
d. Nota
THE POWER TO DEFINE AND PUNISH
CRIME
By virtue of its police power, the STATE has the authority
to define and punish crimes. The concept of the police power is
well-established in this jurisdiction. The same has been defined
as “state authority to enact legislation that may interfere with
personal liberty or property in order to promote the general
welfare.” As defined, it consist of (1) an imposition of restraint
upon liberty or property, (2) in order to foster the common good.
30. Crimes that are economic and social by nature should be dealt with
in a positivist manner; thus, the law is more compassionate. Heinous
crimes should be dealt with in a classical manner; thus, capital
punishment.
a. Utilitarian theory or protective theory
b. Classical or juristic philosophy
c. Positivist or realistic philosophy
d. Eclectic or mixed philosophy
 THEORIES OF CRIMINAL LAW:
a. Utilitarian theory or protective theory
The primary purpose: Protection of society from actual or
potential wrongdoers

b. Classical or juristic philosophy

Best remembered by the maxim “An eye for an eye, a tooth for a
tooth.” (Oculo pro oculo, dente pro dente)
c. Positivist or realistic philosophy
The primary purpose: Reformation.
There is great respect for the human element because the
offender is regarded as socially sick who needs treatment, not
punishment.

d. Eclectic or mixed philosophy

This combines both positivist and classical thinking. Crimes that
are economic and social by nature should be dealt with in a positivist
manner; thus, the law is more compassionate. Heinous crimes should
be dealt with in a classical manner; thus, capital punishment.
The Revised Penal Code today follows the mixed or eclectic
philosophy.
31. It is the machinery which society uses in the prevention and
control of crime.
a. Juvenile Justice system
b. Social system
c. Social defense system
d. Criminal justice system
 WHAT IS THE CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM?

The Criminal Justice System (CJS) is the machinery which

society uses in the prevention and control of crime. The
process is the totality of the activities of law enforcers,
prosecutors, defense lawyers, judges and corrections personnel,
as well as those of the mobilized community in crime prevention
and control.
32. In CJS, they are the actual offended party.
a. Accused
b. Victim
c. complainant
d. People of the Philippines
People involved in the system (Parties to the
criminal case)
1. Accused = The most pampered party in a
criminal case.
2. Victim/complainant = The forgotten party in
a criminal case.
3. People of the Philippines = The actual
offended party
33. These are the five stages in the criminal justice process
a. Arrest , charging, adjudication, sentencing, corrections
b. Law enforcement, prosecution, court, correction, and community
c. Initial contact, initial investigation, intervention, reintegration
d. Initial contact, initial investigation, diversion, reintegration
34. Criminology changes as social circumstances changes. It means that
the progress is in concordant with the sciences applied to it. It connotes
that criminology is _____.
A. Progressive
B. Excellent
C. Dynamic
D. Nationalistic
35. One of the three interrelated divisions of criminology has attempted to
explain the systematic analysis of the economic, political and social conditions
in which penal laws are developed, and crime and criminality are either
generated or prevented. Which of the following corresponds with the
preceding statements?
A. Sociology of the application of the criminal justice process and system
B. Sociology of law, crime and social psychology of criminal behavior
C. Sociology of crime and criminal law
D. Sociology of punishment and correction
36. Criminology includes in its studies behavior that are _____in nature.
A. Law-abiding
B. Deviant
C. Normal
D. Righteous
37. Which refers to behavior that is outside the limits of societal
toleration?
A. Deviancy
B. Offense
C. Crime
D. Delinquency
39. Which conform the characteristic of the criminal law that the
venue, whether municipal or international, in the enforcement of its
provisions is jurisdictional?
A. Prospective
B. Adversarial
C. General
D. Territorial
40. Which philosophy emphasized classical theory in the Philippine
criminal law?
A. Realistic
B. Mixed
C. Humanistic
D. Juristic
41. Which is not a function and consequence of crime in society
according to Emile Durkheim?
A. Society becomes vigilant
B. It creates unity in the society
C. Disintegration and disunity of the society
D. Society decide what behavior must be prohibited
42. Criminal justice system is one of the various systems operating in
the society such as political system, economic system, educational
system, health care system, and others. The interplay of these systems
taken together is known as _____.
A. Public safety system
B. Social defense system
C. Total social system
D. Civil defense system
43. Which of the following is not an agency of social control in the
criminal justice system?
A. NBI
B. PDEA
C. BFP
D. PNP
44. Which of the following refers to preventive, rehabilitative and
developmental programs and initiatives that mobilize/utilize the family
and community to respond to a problem, need, issue or concern of
children, youth, women, person with disabilities, older persons and
families who are in need and at-risk?
A. Residential care services
B. Center-based services
C. Institution based services
D. Community based services
45. Which among the justice prevails when people obtains from law
what they deserve to have?
A. Justice as law
B. Justice as substance
C. Justice as law as all
D. Justice as equality
46. Crime is a societal creation and that it exists in a society
a. Criminology is an applied science
b. Criminology is a social science
c. Criminology is nationalistic
d. Criminology is dynamic
 NATURE OF CRIMINOLOGY
Understanding crime is as complex as other fields of interest. It requires
therefore a systematic and balanced knowledge in the examination of why they
exist. In this sense, criminology is:

An Applied Science – Anthropology, psychology, sociology and other natural

sciences may be applied in the study of the causes of crime while chemistry,
medicine, physics, mathematics, etc. maybe utilized in crime detection.
A Social Science – Inasmuch as crime is a societal creation and that it exists
in a society, its study must be considered a part of social science.
Dynamic – Criminology changes as social condition changes. That means
the progress of criminology is concordant with the advancement of other
sciences that have been applied to it.
Nationalistic – The study of crime must always be in relation with the
existing criminal law with in the territory.
 ORIGIN OF THE WORD “CRIMINOLOGY”
Etymologically, the term criminology came from the Latin word
“crimen” meaning crime and Greek word “Logos” which means “to
study”.
In 1885, Rafael Garofalo, an Italian Law Professor coined the
term “criminologia”.
In 1887, Paul Topinard, French Anthropologist, used the term
criminology in French “criminologie” for the first time.

Sociology – It is the mother discipline of Criminology. It is the study

of human society, its origin, structure, functions and direction
47. What crime rate incidence in a given locality is reflective of the
effectiveness of the social defenses employed by the people primarily
of the police system?
A. Crime is reflective
B. Crime is destructive
C. Crime is expensive
D. Crime is pervasive
48. Lack of skill is _______.
a. Negligence
b. Imprudence
c. Deficiency of perception
d. Deficiency of action
49. What is this statement that confirms crime correlates to society
that affects almost all people?
A. Crime is progressive
B. Crime is expensive
C. Crime is destructive
D. Crime is pervasive
 WHY MUST MEMBERS OF SOCIETY INTERESTED IN
CRIME?
➢ CRIME IS PERVASIVE – nearly all participants of a free society are
once upon a time a victim of an offender of a criminal act. Criminal as an
associate of society affects almost all people regardless of age, sex,
race, nationality, religion, financial condition, education and other personal
circumstances.
➢ CRIME IS EXPENSIVE – the government and private sector use an
enormous amount of currency for crime detection, prosecution
correction and prevention. Those expenses are either:
DIRECT EXPENSE – those spent by government or private sector
for the maintenance or the police and security guards for crime detection,
prosecution and judiciary, support of prison system
INDIRECT EXPENSE – those expense utilized to prevent the
commission of crimes like the construction of window grills, fences, gate,
purchase of door locks, safety vaults, hiring of watchmen etc.
➢ CRIME IS DESTRUCTIVE – many lives have been vanished
because of crimes like murder, homicide and other violent
deaths. Properties have been lost or devastated on account of
robbery, theft and arson.
➢ CRIME IS REFLECTIVE – crime rate or incidence in a given
locality is reflecting of the efficiency of the social defenses
employed by the people primarily that of the police system.
➢ CRIME IS PROGRESSIVE – the progressive upsurge in the
volume of crime is on account of the ever-increasing
population. The ever-increasing crime rate and their technique
show the progress thinking of the society for advancement.
50. Which of the following is in front in giving justice in Criminal justice
System?
a. Investigator
b. Prosecutor
c. Court
d. Correction
51. An act or omission punishable by law are ________.
a. Crimes
b. Felonies
c. Offense
d. Misdemeanor
52. An act or omission in violation of public law forbidding or
commanding it.
a. Crime
b. Felony
c. Offense
d. Misdemeanor
3. Distinguish typologies
of crimes, delinquents,
and criminal offenders.
53. A minor infraction of the law, such as a violation of an ordinance.
a. FELONY
b. OFFENSE
c. MISDEMEANOR
d. CRIME
 LEGAL CLASSIFICATIONS:
1. According to law violated
FELONY - The term felony is limited only to violations of the Revised
Penal Code. When the crime is punishable under a special law you do
not refer to this as a felony.
OFFENSE - A crime punished under a special law is called a statutory
offense.
MISDEMEANOR - A minor infraction of the law, such as a violation of
an ordinance.
CRIME - Whether the wrongdoing is punished under the Revised Penal
Code or under a special law, the generic word “crime” can be used.
54. What is the difference between dolo and culpa?
a. Freedom
b. Intelligence
c. Intent
d. Discernment
2. According to the manner of committing crime:
A. By means of dolo or deceit – the act is performed with deliberate intent
REQUISITES of DOLO
• Criminal intent; (Mitigating Circumstance) - No Intention to Commit so Grave a Wrong
(Praeter Intentionem)
• Freedom of action; (Justifying Circumstance) - State of Necessity
• Intelligence (Exempting Circumstance) - Imbecility or Insanity

B. By means of culpa or fault - when the wrongful act results from imprudence,
negligence, lack of foresight, or lack of skill.
REQUISITES of FAULT
• Criminal negligence - that is, the crime was the result of negligence, reckless
imprudence, lack of foresight or lack of skill;
• Freedom of action
• Intelligence
55. Adultery and other offense is an example of
a. Crimes
b. Formal crimes
c. Material crimes
d. Continuing crime
3. According to the stages in the commission:
1. Formal Crimes
Formal crimes are crimes, which are consummated in one
instance (Adultery)

2. Material Felonies
Those that have various stages of execution (Homicide)

3. Crimes which have NO FRUSTRATED STAGE

The essence of the crime is the act itself; (Rape)
56. Kardo wanted to kill his wife by means of poison. Maria, before
consuming the poison, Kardo immediately stopped her and confessed
the crime he is about to commit. Kardo committed a crime of ___
a. Attempted murder
b. Attempted parricide
c. Frustrated homicide
d. No crime committed
e. Frustrated parricide
57. This is the stage When the offender commences the
commission of a felony directly by overt acts but does not
perform all the acts of execution which should produce the felony
by reason of some cause or accident other than his own
spontaneous desistance;
a. CONSUMMATED FELONY
b. FRUSTRATED FELONY
c. ATTEMPTED FELONY
d. nota
A. CONSUMMATED FELONY
- When all the elements necessary for its execution are present.
- The felony is produced
B. FRUSTRATED FELONY
- When the offender performs all the acts of execution;
- All the acts performed would produce the felony as a consequence;
- The felony is not produced;
- By reason of causes independent of the will of the perpetrator.
C. ATTEMPTED FELONY
- When the offender commences the commission of a felony directly by
overt acts;
- He does not perform all the acts of execution which should produce
the felony;
- By reason of some cause or accident other than his own spontaneous
desistance;
58. What is the violent criminal which has mental illness or brain
damage?
A. Emotional violent offender
B. Abnormal violent offenders
C. Delinquent violent offenders
D. Pathologically violent offenders
Types of Violent Offenders

Culturally Violent Offenders – those who live in cultures which

violence is an acceptable problem mechanism.
Criminally Violent Offenders – those who use violence as a means
to accomplish criminal acts.
Pathological Violent Offenders – those who commit violent crimes
due to mental disturbances.
Situational Violent Offenders – those who commit acts of violence on
rare occasions, often under provocations. They are the criminals “by
passion”.
4. ACCORDING TO THEIR GRAVITY
Grave felonies or those to which attaches the capital punishment or penalties which
in any of their periods are afflictive;
Afflictive penalties include: Reclusion Perpetua, Reclusion Temporal, Perpetual or
Temporary Absolute Disqualification, Perpetual or Temporary Special
Disqualification, and Prision Mayor

Less grave felonies or those to which the law punishes with penalties which in their
maximum period is correctional;
Correctional penalties include: Prision Correccional, Arresto Mayor, Suspension,
and Destierro

Light felonies or those infractions of law for the commission of which the penalty is
arresto menor.
Light penalties: Those infractions of law for the commission of which the penalty of
arresto menor or a fine not exceeding 200 pesos, or both is provided. Art. 9, par. 3,
RPC
59. Tanggol fired at Kardo, but the latter had dodge the bullet. Narda,
who was behind Kardo was hit instead and died. This is a best example
of ___
a. Complex crime
b. Delito compuesto
c. Delito complejo
d. Composite crime
e. Nota
60. Kardo, wanted to take revenge to Tanggol. He smashed Tanggol
from behind with baseball bat. He did not noticed that Narda was also
hit and suffered an injury for almost a week in hospital.
a. Complex crime
b. Delito compuesto
c. Delito complejo
d. Composite crime
e. Nota
5. AS TO COUNT

PLURALITY OF CRIMES
Consists in the successive execution by the same individual of different
criminal acts upon any of which no conviction has yet been declared.

COMPLEX CRIMES:
1. COMPOUND CRIME - When a single act results in two or more grave or
less grave felonies
2. COMPLEX CRIME PROPER - When an offense is a necessary means for
committing the other.
Special Complex/Composite Crimes
The substance is made up of more than one crime but
which in the eyes of the law is only a single indivisible
offense. All those acts done in pursuance of the crime agreed
upon are acts which constitute a single crime.

Special Complex Crimes

• Robbery with Homicide (Art. 294 (1))
• Robbery with Rape (Art. 294 (2))
• Kidnapping with serious physical injuries (Art. 267 (3))
• Rape with Homicide (Art. 335)
61. Kardo jumped over the backard of Mang Karding. Once inside, he
stole the rooster of Mang Kanor, Mang Bebot, and Mang Go. Kardo
commited a _____
a. CONTINUED CRIME
b. CONTINUING CRIME
c. Mala in se
d. Malum prohibitum
6. According to the nature of the act:

Mala in se
An act, by its very nature, is inherently and morally wrong; it
should be done with criminal intent.

Malum prohibitum
An act is wrong only because there is a law punishing it. It is
enough that the prohibited act was voluntarily committed and need not
be committed with malice or criminal intent to be punishable.
MALA IN SE v. MALA PROHIBITA
62. One way of classifying criminals in on the basis of etiology. What
kind of criminal is that whose action arises from the intra-psychic
conflict between the social and anti-social components of his
personality?
A. Acute
B. Neurotic
C. Chronic
D. Normal
63. The type of killer that run on a certain group of people as their
target. They believe to unworthy people, the statement is referring to a
mission oriented killer but how about to excitement?
A. Mission-oriented
B. Lust killer
C. Thrill oriented
D. Missionary motive killer
64. Kardo went to canteen to buy snacks ,but he forgot his wallet in the
desk in the room. Suddenly RJ sees Kardo’s wallet and he get the bag,
laptop, and tablet of Kardo, no one see what RJ do. What crime dis RJ
do?
A. Acquisitive
B. Extinctive
C. Seasonal
D. Situational
 ACCORDING TO EFFECTS OF CRIME

Acquisitive Crime- is one which when committed, the offender

acquires something as a consequence of his criminal act.

Extinctive Crime- when the result of criminal act is destruction.

65. Violations of omnibus rules on election is an example of _____
a. Seasonal Crimes
b. Situational Crimes
c. Episodic Crimes
d. Instant Crimes
ACCORDING TO EVENTS OR SEASON
Seasonal Crimes- are those that are committed only at
certain period of the year

Situational Crimes- are those that are committed only when

given a situation conducive to its commission.
ACCORDING TO LENGTH OF TIME
Episodic Crimes- are serial crimes; they are committed by
series of act within a lengthy space of time.

Instant Crimes- are those that are committed the shortest

possible time.
ACCORDING PLACE OF EXECUTION
Static Crimes- are crimes that are committed only in one
place.

Continuing Crimes- are crimes that are committed in

several places.
ACCORDING TO DEGREE OF SANITY
OFFENDER
Rational crimes- are those committed with intent; offender is
in full possession of his mental faculties /capabilities while;

Irrational crimes- are committed without intent; offender

does not know the nature of his act.
66. Graft and corrupt practices is an example of ____
a. Blue Collar Crimes
b. White Collar Crimes
c. Upper World Crimes
d. Under World Crimes
 ACCORDING TO PROFESSION
White Collar Crimes- are those committed by a person of
responsibility and of upper socio-economic class in the
course of their occupational activities.

Blue Collar Crimes- are those committed by ordinary

professionals to maintain their livelihood.
 ACCORDING TO SOCIAL CLASS
Upper World Crimes- are those committed by individuals
belonging to the upper class of society.

Under World Crimes- are committed by members of the

lower or under privilege class of society.
67. Crime like prostitution is committed through rendition of a service
to satisfy desire of another.
a. Service Crimes
b. Crimes by Passion
c. Crimes by Imitation
d. Victimless crime
 ACCORDING TO EXTERNAL
FACTORS
Crimes by Imitation- are crimes committed by merely
duplication of what was done by others.

Crimes by Passion- are crimes committed because of the

fit of great emotions.

Service Crimes - Service Crime refers to crimes committed

through rendition of a service to satisfy desire of another.
68. It is a criminal activity by an enduring structure or organization
developed and devoted primarily to the pursuit of profits through
illegal means.
a. Transnational crime
b. ORGANIZED CRIMES
c. WHITE COLLAR CRIMES
d. Corporate crimes
 CRIMES OF THE MODERN WORLD
Transnational crime
Is an offense that has an international dimension and
implies crossing at least one national border before, during or
after the fact. This include but not limited to illegal drug trafficking,
money laundering, terrorism, arm smuggling, piracy, kidnapping,
trafficking in persons, and cyber crimes. Most of these crimes
falling under this category reflect connection with organized and
white-collar criminals.
ORGANIZED CRIMES
An organized Crime is a criminal activity by an enduring
structure or organization developed and devoted primarily to
the pursuit of profits through illegal means.
69. In accomplishing a white collar crime, it refers to the offenders
conduct while carrying out the scheme.
a. CONCEALMENT
b. DISGUISE OF PURPOSE
c. INTENT
d. RELIANCE ON THE VICTIM’S IGNORANCE
 WHITE COLLAR CRIMES
Edwin Sutherland defined white-collar crime as criminal acts committed by a
person of respectability and high social status in the course of his or her
occupation

5 BASIC ELEMENTS OF WHITE COLLAR CRIME

1. INTENT - offender’s awareness that the activities are wrong or illegal
2. DISGUISE OF PURPOSE – refers to the offenders conduct while carrying out
the scheme
3. RELIANCE ON THE VICTIM’S IGNORANCE – means that the victim is unable
to see that he or she is being deceived
4. VOLUNTARY ASSISTANCE FROM THE VICTIM – may refer to the actions on
part of an actual victim who is to be defrauded of money or property
5. CONCEALMENT – is the goal of white-collar criminals to cover-up their
criminal activities.
70. Kardo is an accountant involve in malversation of funds and any
other crimes in the course of his legal occupation. What is the type of
crime committed by him?
a. Corporate crimes
b. Environmental crimes
c. Occupational crimes
d. Professional Occupational Crime
 Forms of White Collar Crimes
Corporate crimes - the violation of a criminal statute either by a
corporate entity or by its executives, employees or agents, acting
on behalf of and for the benefit of the corporation, partnership or
other business entity.
Environmental crimes - violation of criminal law which, although
typically committed by businesses or by business officials, may also be
committed by other persons or organizational entities, and which
damage some protected or otherwise significant aspect of the
natural environment.
Occupational crimes - any act punishable by law, which is committed
through opportunity created in the course of an occupation that is
legal.
Organizational Occupational Crime - crimes committed for the
benefit of the entire organization in such instances only the
organization or the employer, not individual employees.
State Authority Occupational Crime - crimes by officials through the
exercise of their state-based authority. Such crime is occupation
specific, and can only be committed by person in public office or by
working for such persons.
Professional Occupational Crime - crimes by professionals in their
capacity as professionals. The crimes of physicians, attorneys,
psychologists, and the like are included here.
Individual Occupational Crime - crimes by individuals as individuals
which include income tax evasion, theft of goods and services by
employees, the filing of false expense report, and the like.
71. Which of the following refers to deliberately and without
justification following or surveilling (or both) another person?
A. Harassing
B. Stalking
C. Bullying
D. Manhandling
72. Which is the act of using cyberspace for revenge, destruction and to
achieve a malicious intent such as website defacement, cyber stalking
and cyber bullying?
A. Cyber vandalism
B. Cyber war
C. Cyber terrorism
D. Cyber theft
73. Which is a crime committed in cyberspace to defraud people for
easy profit such as illegal copyright infringement, internet securities
fraud and identity theft?
A. Cyber war
B. Cyber vandalism
C. Cyber theft
D. Cyber terrorism
Cyber theft
Use of computer networks for criminal profits. Illegal copyright
infringement, identity theft, and Internet securities fraud are examples of
_______.

Use of cyberspace to defraud people for quick profits.

Examples:
Illegal copyright infringement, identity theft, internet securities fraud,
warez.
• Cyber vandalism
• Malicious attacks aimed at disrupting, defacing, and destroying
technology.

Use of cyberspace for revenge, destruction, and to achieve a

malicious intent.

Pursuing profits from personal computers.

Example:
Website defacement, worms, viruses, cyberstalking,
Cyberbullying.
74. These are those traditional, illegal behaviors that most people think
of as crime.
a. Conventional crime
b. Violent crimes
c. Property crimes
d. Index crime
 THE CONVENTIONAL CRIMES
Conventional crimes are those traditional, illegal behaviors that most
people think of as crime.
Conventional crimes are groups of crimes categorized as violent crimes
(index crimes) and property crimes.

Violent Crimes - Violent crimes are criminal acts, which in the threat of or
actual physical harm by an offender to a victim.
Violent acts are in the forms of:

Interpersonal Violence - Forcible Rape. Murder, Serious Assault, Family

Violence, Robbery
Political Violence - Terrorism
Collective Violence - Riots, Mobs, Crowds, Urban Violence
Property Crimes - are crimes of economic interest. It includes
those crimes that would most commonly be categorized as theft
in ordinary language

Occasional Property Crimes - Shoplifting, Vandalism, Motor

vehicle theft, Check Forgery
Conventional Property Crimes - Burglary/unlawful entry to
commit theft, Fence, Larceny/Theft
 Violent Crimes (Index Crimes)
• Murder – is the unlawful killing of human being with malice and with the “act of
violence”.
Serial Murder – an act involving killing of several victims in three or more
separate incidents over a week, a month or year.
Mass Murder – it is the killing of four or more victims at one location with one
event.
Spree Murder – the killing of in two or more locations with almost no time break
between murders.
• Homicide and Assault
• Robbery
• Family Violence
• Child Abuse – an attack or assault of an adult against the defenseless or people who
cannot defend themselves, usually by a parent to a child.
• Spouse Abuse – “husband vs wife battering”
75. Refers to the adverse psychological impacts rape victims
continue to suffer long after the incident.
a. rape trauma impact
b. Rape trauma syndrome
c. Rape impact syndrome
d. Rape traumatic syndrome
“Rape Trauma Syndrome” – refers to the adverse
psychological impacts rape victims continue to suffer long after
the incident.
It includes:
• Sexual anxiety
• Pervasive fear to the opposite sex
• Problems in interpersonal relationship
• General problem of unhappiness
76. This rapist primarily wishes to express his domination over
the victim.
a. ANGER RAPE
b. POWER RAPE
c. AGGRAVATED RAPE
d. SERIAL RAPE
e. STATUTORY RAPE
 Classification of Men who Rape
ANGER RAPE – sexual attack becomes a means of expressing anger or rage
and involves more physical assault upon the victim.
POWER RAPE – assailant primarily wishes to express his domination over
the victim.
SADISTIC RAPE – perpetrator combines the sexuality and aggression aims
in psychic desires to often torture or otherwise abuse the victim.
ACQUAINTANCE RAPE - forcible sex in which offender and the victim are
acquainted with one another.
AGGRAVATED RAPE - rape involving multiple offenders, weapons and
victim injuries.
DATE RAPE - forcible sex during the courting relationship.
SERIAL RAPE - multiple rapes committed by one person over time.
STATUTORY RAPE - sexual relations between an underage minor female and
an adult male.
77. Maria greeted Kardo upon meeting the latter at the “inuman
session”. Kardo feels that Maria has sexual feeling towards him because
of the friendliness of the girl that’s why he raped her. Kardo is what
type of rapist?
a. Naïve Graspers
b. Meaning Stretchers
c. Sex Looters
d. Group Conformers
 Categories of Rapists
a) Naïve Graspers – Sexually inexperienced youths who possess an
unrealistic conception of female erotic arousal. Awkward in relating
to the opposite sex, they hold high expectations that their cute
advances will be met with affection by their victims.
b) Meaning Stretchers – An offender misinterprets woman’s
expressions of friendliness and affection as indicating that the female
desire continues even when she says no.
c) Sex Looters – Persons who have a low desire for affection or low
respect for the victim’s autonomy and callously use woman as sex
object.
d) Group Conformers – Rapist participates in a group rape or gang
bang; often following the leader. A sex looter felt a sense of conformity
and notion demonstrating their masculinity
78. A person who violated a social norm or one who did an anti-
social act.
a. Legal Definition
b. Social Definition
c. Psychological Definition
d. All of the above
 THE CRIMINAL
On the basis of the definition of crime, a criminal may be defined in
three ways:
Legal Definition: A person who committed a crime and has been
convicted by a court of the violation of a criminal law.

Social Definition: A person who violated a social norm or one who

did an anti-social act.

Psychological Definition: A person who violated rules of conduct

due to behavioral maladjustment.
Criminological Sense
A person who committed a crime regardless whether reported or
referred.
Legal Sense
A person who was found guilty beyond reasonable doubt.
In criminal justice sense
a criminal may be defined as one who has undergone the process and
went through all the pillars of the Criminal Justice System.
79. Identify the type of criminal psychic organization that ensembles a
normal individual except that he identified himself with criminal
prototype.
A. Acute
B. Ordinary
C. Chronic
D. Normal
 Criminological Classification of Criminals
Based on Etiology
Acute Criminal is one who violates a criminal law because of the
impulse or fit of passion. They commit passionate crimes.
Chronic Criminal is one who commits crime acted in consonance of
deliberated thinking. He plans the crime ahead of time. They are the
targeted offenders.

1. Neurotic criminal – is one who has mental disorder.

2. Normal criminal – a person who commits crimes because he looks
up to and idolizes people who are criminals. Their psychic conditions
resembles that of a normal individual except that they identify
themselves with criminal prototypes
Based on Behavioral System

Ordinary Criminal is considered the lowest form of criminal in a criminal

career. He doesn’t stick to crime as a profession but rather pushed to commit
crimes due to great opportunity. criminal who engages in crimes which do not
require specialized or technical skill.

Organized Criminal is one who associates himself with other criminals to earn a
high degree of organization to enable them to commit crimes easily without
being detected by authorities. They commit organized crimes. Is one who
possesses some skills and know-how which enable him to commit crimes.
Force violence intimidation and bribery are use to gain and maintain control over
economic activities.

Professional Criminal is a person who is engaged in criminal activities with high

degree of skill. He is usually one who practices crime as a profession to
maintain a living.
80. A single act constitutes two or more grave or less grave felonies are
_________
a. Delito compuesto
b. Delito complejo
c. Complex crime
d. Composite crime
81. Kardo maintains his living through robbing an unattended house,
pick pocket ahd robbery holdap.
a. Kardo is a Habitual Criminal
b. Kardo is a Situational criminal
c. Kardo is a Professional Criminal
d. Kardo is a Accidental Criminal
Based on Activities

Professional Criminals are those who practice crime as a profession for

a living. Criminal activity is constant in order to earn skill and develop
ability in their commission.

Accidental Criminals are those who commit crimes when the situation is
conducive to its commission. Those who commit criminal acts as a result
of unanticipated circumstances.

Habitual Criminals are those who continue to commit crime because of

deficiency of intelligence and lack of self – control.

Situational criminal – a person who got involved in criminal act because

82. Kardo killed Narda because of promise of reward from his boss
Tanggol. What type of criminal is kardo?
a. Active Criminals
b. Passive Inadequate Criminals
c. Socialized Delinquents
d. Habitual Delinquent
Based on Mental Attitudes

Active Criminals are those who commit crimes due to aggressiveness.

Such attitude is clearly shown in crimes of passion, revenge and
resentments.

Passive Inadequate Criminals are those who commit crimes because

they are pushed to it by reward or promise without considering its
consequences. They are called “ulukan”

Socialized Delinquents are criminals who are normal in behavior but

defective in their socialization process or development. To this
group belongs the educated respectable members of society who may
turn criminals on account of the situation they are involved.
Based on Legal Classification

Habitual Delinquent
Is a person who, with in a period of ten years from the date of his
release or last conviction of the crimes of serious or less serious
physical injuries, robbery, estafa, or falsification, is found guilty of
any of the said crimes or a third time oftener.

Recidivist
Is one who, at the time of his trial for one crime, shall have been
previously convicted by final judgment of another crime embraced in the
same title of the Revised Penal Code.
 THE DELINQUENT PERSON
A delinquent person is one who repeatedly commits an act that
is against the norms or mores observed by the society. When a
person habitually commits an act that is not in accordance with
the rules or policies of a community where he belongs, he is
considered a delinquent.
DISTINCTION OF CRIMINAL AND DELINQUENT
A CRIMINAL is a person who has violated the penal law and has
been found guilty of crime charges upon observing of the standard
judicial procedure while DELINQUENT is a person who merely
committed an act not in conformity with norms of society.

EXAMPLES OF DELINQUENCY:
1. waywardness of children
2. Street corner gang
3. Children out of parental control
4. school dropouts without justifiable reasons
83. They Kill in order to “rid” society of a certain group.
a. Visionary
b. Mission-oriented
c. Hedonistic
d. Power/control
 TYPES OF SERIAL KILLERS
These types are based on their motivations for carrying out their crimes.
Visionary
Believes that a person or entity is commanding him to kill. Most likely suffering
from psychosis.
Mission-oriented
Kills in order to “rid” society of a certain group.
Hedonistic
Commits his acts for his own personal pleasure. For example, rape, torture or
money. (Lust, Thrill and Comfort)
Power/control
Fantasizes about having power and seeks to dominate and control his victims.

(https://thisinterestsme.com/types-serial-killers/)
84. This is the most common form of serial murderer
a. Thrill killers
b. Mission killers
c. Expedience killers
d. Nota
 Types of serial killers
(jack liven & james allan fox)

Thrill killers
These killers strive for either sexual sadism or dominance. This is the most
common form of serial murderer
Mission killers
These killers want to reform the world or have a mission that derives them to
kill
Expedience killers
Killers who kill out for profit or want to protect themselves from a perceived
threat
85. They are mass murderers who are usually trying to cover-up a
crime, eliminate witnesses, and carry out a criminal conspiracy.
a. Revenge killers
b. Love killers
c. Profit killers
d. Terrorist killers
86. These are are crimes which are sufficiently significant and which
occur with sufficient regularity to be meaningful.
a. Index crimes
b. Non-index crimes
c. Sensational crime
d. Malum In se
87. Violation of special penal laws and other crimes against moral and
order are examples of ____
a. Index crimes
b. Non-index crimes
c. Sensational crime
d. Malum In se
 CRIME STATISTICS
- It refers to the measure of the level or amount of crimes.
-The collection or study of numerical data of crimes recorded/reported
to the police.
-It uses the terms index crimes and non-index crimes in classifying
crimes.
Index crimes are crimes which are sufficiently significant and
which occur with sufficient regularity to be meaningful such as murder,
homicide, physical injury, robbery, theft and rape.
Non-index crimes are crimes that are not classified as index
crimes. Violations of special laws and other crimes against moral and
order. These crimes are generated from the result of positive police-
initiated operations.
4. Understand and introduce
innovation on the concepts of
punishment, sentencing, and
rehabilitation; allied discipline/fields
of criminology.
88. It includes the study of control and prevention of crime through
punishment of criminal offenders.
a. Correction
b. Penology
c. Sociology of law
d. Etiology of crime
89. Which is the study of human society, that deals for its origin,
structure functions and direction?
A. Sociology
B. Physiology
C. Physiognomy
D. Phrenology
90. It is the mother discipline of Criminology.
a. Sociology
b. Psychology
c. Psychiatry
d. Criminal Politics
 SUB-FIELDS OF CRIMINOLOGY
Sociological Criminology – the study of crime focused on the group of people and
society as a whole. It is primarily based on the examination of the relationship of
demographic and group variables to crime. Variables such as socioeconomic status,
interpersonal relationships, age, race, gender, and cultural groups of people are probed in
relation to the environmental factors that are most conducive to criminal action, such
as time, place, and circumstances surrounding the crime.

Psychological Criminology – the science of behavior and mental processes of

the criminal. It is focused on the individual criminal behavior-how it is acquired, evoked,
maintained, and modified. Both the environmental and personality influences are
considered, along with the mental processes that mediate the behavior.

Psychiatric Criminology – the science that deals with the study of crime through
forensic psychiatry, the study of criminal behavior in terms of motives and drives that
strongly relies on the individual. (Psychoanalytic Theory - Sigmund Freud – traditional
view). It also explains that criminals are acting out of uncontrollable animalistic,
unconscious, or biological urges (modern view).
91. What is this principal division of criminology that deals with the
reformation of criminal adult offender, youthful offenders polishing
their behaviour for their return in the mainstream of the society?
A. Correction
B. Criminal Etiology
C. Sociology of Law
D. Penology
92. Which refers to restraining or isolating criminals behind prison or
jail facilities to effectively protect society?
A. Crime prevention
B. Crime deterrence
C. Crime control
D. Crime suppression
93. The branch of the administration of criminal justice charges with
the responsibility for the custody, security, supervision and
rehabilitation of a convicted offender.
A. Community
B. Rehabilitation Center
C. Penology
D. Correction
94. This process submits that the criminal behavior was due to the gap
between the criminal and the community. For this reason the offender
must be assisted to strive hard to face the forces of the society or
community which will join upon his release from jail/prison.
A. Rehabilitation
B. Purpose of sentencing
C. Isolation of prisoners
D. Re-integration
95. Theft like pickpocket is very rampant during holidays in Divisoria
market. What are/is the factors that enhances the development of
criminal behavior of those pick pocketers?
a. Criminal Demography
b. Criminal Epidemiology
c. Criminal Physical Anthropology
d. Criminal Ecology
96. The profile of inhabitants can be a factor to determine what crime
or how crime can develop in such community.
a. Criminal Demography
b. Criminal Epidemiology
c. Criminal Physical Anthropology
d. Criminal Ecology
 FACTORS THAT ENHANCES THE DEVELOPMENT OF
CRIMINAL BEHAVIOR SUCH AS:
a. Criminal Demography – study of the relationship between criminality
and population.
b.Criminal Epidemiology – study of the relationship between
environment and the criminality.
c. Criminal Ecology – study of criminality in relation to spatial
distribution in the community.
d.Criminal Physical Anthropology – study of criminality in relation to
physical constitution of men.
e. Criminal Psychology – study of human behavior in relation to
criminality.
f. Criminal Psychiatry – study of human mind in relation to criminality;
and
g.Victimology – study of the role of the victim in the commission of a
crime.
97. The public will be protected if the offender has been held in
conditions where he cannot harm others especially the public.
a. Retribution
b. Expiation or Atonement
c. Deterrence
d. Incapacitation and Protection
 PURPOSES/JUSTIFICATIONS OF
PUNISHMENT
1. Retribution (PERSONAL VENGEANCE/ REVENGE)– the
punishment should be provided by the state whose sanction is violated
to afford the society or the individual the opportunity of imposing
upon the offender suitable punishment as might be enforced.
Offenders should be punished because they deserve it.
2. Expiation or Atonement – it is punishment in the form of group
vengeance where the purpose is to appease the offended public or
group.
3. Deterrence – punishment gives lesson to the offender by showing
to others what would happen to them if they violate the law. Punishment
is imposed to warn potential offenders that they cannot afford to do what
the offender has done.
4. Incapacitation and Protection – the public will be protected if the
offender has been held in conditions where he cannot harm others
especially the public. Punishment is effected by placing offenders in
prison so that society will be ensured from further criminal
depredations of criminals.
5. Reformation or Rehabilitation – it is the establishment of the
usefulness and responsibility of the offender. Society’s interest can be
better served by helping the prisoner to become law abiding citizen
and productive upon his return to the community by requiring him to
undergo intensive program of rehabilitation in prison.
98. Punishment should be no more or less than the offenders actions
deserve, it must be based on how blameworthy the person is
a. General Deterrence
b. Specific Deterrence
c. Incapacitation
d. Retribution/Just Desert
 Goals of Punishment
1. General Deterrence - the state tries to convince potential criminals that
the punishment they face is certain, swift, and severe so that they will be afraid
to commit an offense.

2. Specific Deterrence - convincing offenders that the pains of punishment is

greater than the benefits of crime so they will not repeat their criminal offending

3. Incapacitation - if dangerous criminals are kept behind bars, they will not
be able to repeat their illegal activities.

4. Retribution/Just Desert - punishment should be no more or less than the

offenders actions deserve, it must be based on how blameworthy the person is
99. Criminals are diverted into a community correctional program
for treatment to avoid stigma of incarceration.
a. Equity/Restitution
b. Rehabilitation
c. Restorative Justice
d. Diversion
5. Equity/Restitution - convicted criminals must pay back their victims for
their loss, the justice system for the costs of processing their case and society
for any disruption they may have caused.

6. Rehabilitation - if the proper treatment is applied, an offender will present

no further threat to society

7. Diversion - criminals are diverted into a community correctional

program for treatment to avoid stigma of incarceration. The convicted offender
might be asked to make payments to the crime victim or participate in
community based program that features counseling.

8. Restorative Justice - repairs injuries suffered by the victim and the

community while insuring reintegration of the offender. Turn the justice system
into a healing process rather than a distributor of retribution and revenge.
5. Learn and explicate The Philippine
Criminology Profession and career
paths versus criminologists in other
countries.
100. Which is known as RA 11131?
A. The Philippine Criminology Profession Act of 2019
B. The Philippine Criminology Profession Act of 2018
C. The Criminology Profession Act of 2018
D. The Criminology Profession Act of 2019
101. Which of the following is true about the powers, functions, duties and
responsibilities of the Professional Regulatory Board for Criminologist?
1. Issue, suspend, revoke or reinstate the certificate of registration of the
registered criminologist
2. Cancel temporary/special permit granted to foreign criminologist
3. Receive complaints and decide the matter as to the malpractices and
unethical conduct in the practice of the criminology profession
4. Monitor all colleges and universities offering criminology program and
recommend sanctions to the CHED, for noncompliance with the policies,
standards and requirements.
A. 1,2,3 and 4
B. 1,3 and 4
C. 2,3 and 4
D. 1,2 and 3
The Professional Regulatory Board for Criminologists shall have the power,
upon notice and hearing , to revoke or suspend the certificate of registration
of a registered criminologist or to cancel temporary/special permit granted to
foreign criminologist for the commission of any of the following acts, except
______.
A. Non-renewal of the professional identification card for a period of 3 years
with the PRC without justifiable cause
B. Perpetration or use of fraud in obtaining one's certificate of registration,
professional identification card or temporary/special permit
C. Non-compliance with CPD and APO requirements, unless one is exempted
therefrom, for the renewal of professional identification card
D. Addiction to drugs or alcohol impairing one's ability to practice the
profession or a declaration by a court of competent jurisdiction that the
registrant is of unsound mind
102. Registered criminologist is a/an, except:
a. Natural person
b. Holder of a valid COR
c. Holds an updated PIC
d. Nota
REPUBLIC ACT No. 11131 - AN ACT REGULATING THE PRACTICE OF
CRIMINOLOGY PROFESSION IN THE PHILIPPINES, AND APPROPRIATING FUNDS
THEREFOR, REPEALING FOR THE PURPOSE REPUBLIC ACT NO. 6506,
OTHERWISE KNOWN AS "AN ACT CREATING THE BOARD OF EXAMINERS FOR
CRIMINOLOGISTS IN THE PHILIPPINES“

This Act shall be known as "The Philippine Criminology Profession Act of 2018".
Criminology refers to the scientific study of crimes, criminals, and victims and criminal
behavior. It also deals with the prevention, and solution of crimes.
(sec. 4 IRR)
Registered criminologist refers to a natural person who holds a valid certificate of
registration and an updated professional identification card as criminologist issued by
the Board and the Commission pursuant to this Act.
 RULE IV
PRACTICE OF CRIMINOLOGY
SECTION 27. Lawful Practitioners of Criminology. — The
following persons shall be authorized to practice the criminology
profession:
(a) Natural persons;
(1) Duly registered criminologists and holders of valid certificates
of registration and valid professional identification cards issued
by the Board and the Commission pursuant to RA No. 11131.
(b) Juridical persons;
(1) Single proprietorship whose owner and technical staff are registered
criminologists;
(2) Partnership duly registered with the Securities and Exchange
Commission (SEC) as professional partnership pursuant to the Civil
Code and composed of partners majority of whom are registered
criminologists;
(3) Corporation duly registered with the SEC as engaged in the practice
of criminology and with officers and Board of Directors whom are all
registered criminologists; and
(4) Association and cooperative duly registered with the appropriate
government agency as a non-stock corporation where majority of the
officers, Board of Trustees and members are registered criminologists.
These juridical persons shall also be registered with the Board and the
Commission in accordance with the rules and regulations thereon. The
Board shall issue a separate guideline to implement this provision.
 A total 192 lawmakers voted to
approve House Bill (HB) 7191 or the
“Philippine Criminology Profession Act”
authored by Reps. Gary Alejano and
Maximo Rodriguez, Jr.
103. All but one are the objectives of the Philippine Criminology
Profession Act of 2018.
a. The examination, registration and licensure for criminologists;
b. The participation in the standardization of the criminology
education program
c. To promulgate and adopt Code of Ethics and Code of Good
Governance for the practice of criminology;
d. The development of the professional competence of criminologists
through Continuing Professional Development (CPD)
SECTION 3. Objectives. — This Act
shall govern:
(a) The examination, registration and licensure for criminologists;
(b) The supervision, control and regulation of the practice of criminology;
(c) The participation in the standardization of the criminology education
program;
(d) The development of the professional competence of criminologists
through Continuing Professional Development (CPD); and
e) The integration of all criminology professional groups and membership
of all registered criminologists to the accredited professional organization.
104. Refers to the one and only recognized and accredited integrated
national organization of criminologists.
a. Autonomous International Professional Organization
b. Accredited Integrated Professional Organization
c. Alliance of Integrated Professional Organization
d. Ako’y Isang Pilipinong taga Olongapo
105. It provides that only nationals of foreign countries in which the
requirements for the licensure examination and/or registration and
practice of criminology are substantially the same as those required
and contemplated by the Philippine laws and regulations, and which
laws and regulations allow Philippine citizens to practice criminology
within the territory of such foreign countries shall be allowed to take
the Philippine Criminologists licensure examination
a. Foreign Reciprocality
b. Foreign Reciprocity
c. Foreign Alliance on Criminologists
d. Practice Through Temporary/Special Permit.
(j) Foreign Reciprocity refers to Sections 14 (a) and 29 of this
IRR which provide that only nationals of foreign countries in
which the requirements for the licensure examination and/or
registration and practice of criminology are substantially the
same as those required and contemplated by the Philippine
laws and regulations, and which laws and regulations allow
Philippine citizens to practice criminology within the
territory of such foreign countries on the same basis and
grant the same privileges as those enjoyed by their citizens,
subjects or nationals shall be allowed to take the Philippine
Criminologists licensure examination and be given CORs
and PICs pursuant to R. A. No. 11131;
SECTION 30. Practice Through
Temporary/Special Permit.
Temporary/Special permit may be issued by the Board subject
to the approval by the Commission and payment of fees the latter
has prescribed and charged thereof to the following:
(a) Registered criminologists from foreign countries/states
whose services are rendered either for free or for a fee:
(1) If they are internationally known criminologists or experts
in any branch, specialty or allied field of criminology; and
(2) If their services are urgently and importantly required for lack or
inadequacy of available local specialists or experts; or for the promotion or
advancement of the practice of criminology through transfer of technology;
(b) Registered criminologists from foreign countries/states whose
services shall be free and limited to indigent clients or for research
purposes; and
(c) Registered criminologists from foreign countries/states employed as
exchange professors in a branch, specialty or allied field of criminology,
in schools, colleges or universities offering the course of criminology.
(d) Filipino professionals in allied disciplines who intend to teach in PHEI
offering criminology program and in review centers for criminology
licensure examination subject to the conditions as stated in section 16 of
this IRR.
The permit shall, among other things, contain the following limitations
and conditions:
(1) its validity must be for a period coterminous with the contract or
engagement but not exceeding one (1) year subject to renewal;
(2) the branch or specialty of criminology; and
(3) specific place of practice such as national security, public safety,
law enforcement agencies, center, school, college or university offering
the program or review of criminology. The Board, subject to the
approval of the Commission, shall promulgate rules and regulations on
the implementation of this particular section.
106. All but one are the qualification of the Chairperson and Members
of the Board.
a. Must be a natural-born Filipino citizen and a resident of the
Philippines
b. Must be a graduate of Bachelor of Science in Criminology, and a
holder of a Post Graduate Degree in Criminology
c. having at least two (2) years of practice in the profession prior to
the appointment including no less than ten (10) years teaching
experience of criminology or law subjects
d. Must not be a member of the faculty of any school, college or
university where a regular class or review course in criminology
SECTION 7. Qualification of the Chairperson and Members of
the Board. — The chairperson and each member shall, at the
time of their appointment, possess all these qualifications:
(a) Must be a natural-born Filipino citizen and a resident of the
Philippines;
(b) Must be of good moral character, good reputation and of sound mind
and body;
(c) Not convicted by a court of competent jurisdiction of any offense
involving moral turpitude;
(d) Must be a graduate of Bachelor of Science in Criminology, and a
holder of a Post Graduate Degree in Criminology from any reputable
school recognized by the CHED or a criminologist-lawyer in good
standing before the Supreme Court and the Integrated Bar of the
Philippines (IBP);
(e) Must be a registered criminologist with a valid certificate of
registration and a valid professional identification card, having at least
ten (10) years of practice in the profession prior to the appointment
including no less than two (2) years teaching experience of
criminology or law subjects in full-time or part-time capacity in any
college of criminology, college of law or law enforcement training
institutions recognized by relevant government agency;
(f) Must be a member in good standing of the AIPO but not an officer or
trustee thereof; and
(g) Must not be a member of the faculty of any school, college or
university where a regular class or review course in criminology is
offered, nor a member of the staff of reviewers in a review school or
center for criminologists, and must not have any direct or indirect
pecuniary interest in any such institution.
 Percentage Number of (30%) (50%) (20%)
Weight Items

and and Distribution Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating

A. THEORIES OF CRIME CAUSATION
Distribution Recall information Explain, Interpret, Using the Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
summarize, examine information in critiquing,
Recognizing, listing, paraphrase, classify another familiar Comparing, experimenting, Designing,
describing, situation organizing, judging constructing,
The registered criminologist can perform retrieving, naming,
deconstructing, planning,
Implementing interrogating, finding producing,
the competencies under the following finding carrying out, using, inventing
20% 100 executing
sub-topics:

3% 15

1. Recall and explain the fundamentals of

crime causation with emphasis on .40% 2 1 - 1 - - -
biological or medical, psychological,
psychiatric, and sociological determinism

2. Enumerate and distinguish biological and .40%

psychological theories of crime causation. 2 - 1 1 - - -

3. Apply and illustrate sociological and 1.0%

economic theories in understanding the 5 - 1 2 1 1 -
causes of crimes.
1. Recall and explain the fundamentals
of crime causation with emphasis on
biological or medical, psychological,
psychiatric, and sociological
determinism
The 3 stages of theory development are _____
a. Deductive, abductive, and inductive
b. Speculative, descriptive and constructive
c. Problem, conclusion, and solution
d. Idea, knowledge, and proof.
 Development of theory
3 stages of theory development
1. Speculative
Attempts to explain what is happening
2. Descriptive
Gathers descriptive data to describe what is really
happening
3. Constructive
Revises old theories and develops new ones based
on continuing research
What are the three existing factors to develop criminal and anti-social
behavior?
A. Biological, psychological and environment
B. Biological, cultural and environment
C. Sociological, psychological and education
D. Socio-economic, political and cultural
Which of the following is the approach that is using the perspective of
heredity in explaining the cause of crime?
A. Geographical approach
B. Biological approach
C. Psychiatric application
D. Psychological application
What physique characterized by lean, slightly build and narrow
shoulder?
A. Asthenic
B. Pyknic
C. Athletic
D. dysplastic
2. Enumerate and distinguish
biological and psychological theories
of crime causation.
Identify the correct statement of Richard Dugdale about the Juke
Family Tree.
A. Criminals in general were different from non-criminal
B. Heredity as a source of criminality based on studies of generations
of criminals in relations to degeneracy and depravity
C. Crime is a result of social conflict
D. Criminality was a product of physical stigmata
Which of the following choices does not relate to the characteristics of
classical theory in criminal law?
A. The basis in criminal liability is human free will and the purpose of
penalty is retribution
B. It has endeavored to establish a mechanical and direct proportion
between crime and penalty
C. That man is essentially a moral creature with an absolutely free will
to choose good and evil
D. That man is occasionally subdued by a strange and morbid
phenomenon
Among the following statements, which best describes the founding of
Charles Goring after analyzing 3,000 English convicts?
A. Crime prone people can be seen through their features
B. There is no such thing as anthropological criminal type
C. There were no significant physical or mental abnormalities among
the criminals
D. Criminals are born
The English Convict: a statistical study, one of the most comprehensive
criminological works of its time. It was first published in 1913, and set out to
establish whether there were any significant physical or mental abnormalities
among the criminal classes that set them apart from ordinary men, as suggested by
Cesare Lombroso.
He ultimately concluded that "the physical and mental constitution of both criminal
and law-abiding persons, of the same age, stature, class, and intelligence, are
identical. There is no such thing as an anthropological criminal type.“
He did, however, assert that it is an "indisputable fact that there is a physical,
mental, and moral type of normal person who tends to be convicted of crime: that
is to say, our evidence conclusively shows that, on average, the criminal of English
prisons is markedly differentiated by defective physique - as measured by stature
and body weight, by defective mental capacity".
Goring went on to argue that one of the three measures in which to combat crime
was to "regulate the reproduction of those degrees of constitutional qualities -
feeble-minded, inebriety, epilepsy, social instinct, etc“
Goring found that those with frequent and lengthy imprisonment where physically
smaller than other people do and were mentally inferior. (Siegel 2019)
What criminological theory states that the external cranial
characteristics dictates which areas of the brain control physical
activity?
A. Physiognomy
B. Phrenology
C. Sociology
D. Psychology
Hydraulic model is also referred to as _____ theory.
A. Passive-aggressive
B. Psychodynamic
C. Social learning
D. Darwinian perspective
• Hydraulic Model of Aggression Definition
• The hydraulic model of aggression visualizes Lorenz's idea on how aggressive behaviours occur in
animals, specifically in that aggression builds up in a reservoir over time, and a sign-stimulus or
releasor unleashes the built-up aggression, resulting in aggressive behaviours. It involves a
reservoir (drive), a release mechanism, a stimulus which "unplugs" the reservoir, and resulting
behaviours upon release.
Interestingly, Lorenz’s hydraulic model of instinctual behaviour goes back to the work of Freud. He
believed that aggression was an inevitable outcome because, in his view, animals, especially males,

Hydraulic model
any physiological or psychological model based on the analogy of fluid flowing
through a system under pressure, such that pressure may build up in the system
and seek release. Sigmund Freud’s model of the libido as an energy that can build
pressure and seek release (catharsis) is a notable example.
The following are explanations of the imitation theory of Gabriel Tarde,
except ____.
A. When two behavior patterns clash, one may take the place of the
other, as when guns largely replaced knives as murder weapons
B. Individual imitate others in proportion to the intensity and
frequency of their contacts
C. A breakdown of social order is a result of loss of standards and
values and if plagued by anomie, disintegration and chaos replace
social cohesion
D. Inferiors imitate superiors - that is, trends on from town to country
and from upper to lower classes
In human personality which of the following can differentiate reality
from fantasy?
A. Id
B. Ego
C. Superego
D. Super id
In psychoanalytic theory, the unconscious wish for death is called ____.
A. Eros
B. Mortem
C. Thanatos
D. Ethos
In ICAP theory, ________ is a person’s risk or propensity to engage in
crime and cognition is the thinking process that turns potential into
actual behavior.
a. Criminal tendency
b. Antisocial potential
c. Antisocial behavior
d. Antisocial propensity
INTEGRATED COGNITIVE ANTISOCIAL POTENTIAL THEORY (ICAP) by
David Farrington
The antisocial potential (AP) and cognition are the key concept of
this theory
This is also interested in the process of desisting from offending,
which occurs for both social and individual reasons and occurs at
different traits according to a person’s level of AP.
As people get older, they tend to become less impulsive and less
easily frustrated
3. Apply and illustrate sociological
and economic theories in
understanding the causes of crimes.
What is this theory which holds that crime is a function of the conflict
between the goals people have and the means they can use to legally
obtain them? It argues that it is the inability to obtain these goals,
usually materials goals that trigger the commission of crimes because
members of the lower class are unable to achieve these goals which
come easy for members of the upper class.
A. Social disorganization theory
B. Cultural deviance theory
C. Social learning theory
D. Strain theory
 Strain Theory
(Robert King Merton)
Holds that crime is a function of the conflict between the goals people
have and the means they can use to legally obtain them. Consequently,
they feel anger, frustration and resentment, which is referred to as
STRAIN.
 SOCIAL DISORGANIZATION THEORY
(CLIFFORD R. SHAW AND HENRY D. MCKAY)
The primary causes of criminal behavior were
neighborhood disintegration and slum conditions to place
what they called transitional neighborhood which refer to the
place in Chicago where ridden by poverty and which suffers high
rates of population turnover and were incapable of inducing
residents to remain and failed to defend the neighborhoods
against criminal groups.
 CULTURAL DEVIANCE THEORY
This theory combines the effects of social disorganization
and strain to explain how people living in deteriorated
neighborhoods react to social isolation and economic deprivation.
Because of the draining, frustrating and dispiriting experiences,
members of the lower class create an Independent Subculture
with its own set of rules and values.
This lower-class subcultures stresses excitement, toughness,
risk-taking, fearlessness and immediate gratification.
Subcultural norms such as being tough followed by the
lower class may tend to clash with conventional values – the
norms set by society.
 SOCIAL LEARNING THEORY
People are not actually born to act violently but they learned to be
aggressive to their life experiences. Criminality is learned through close
relationships with others;
Asserts that children are born “good” and learn to be “bad” from
others.
Sources of behavior:
a) Family member/Parents (Adults to whom they are in close contacts
with)- family life showing children who use aggressive tactics have parents
who use similar behaviors when dealing with others.
b) Mass-media such as movies and films shows commonly depict violence
graphically.
c) Environment are people who reside in areas where violence is a daily
occurrence are more likely to act violently than those in low crime areas.
Steps in Behavior Modeling Process:
Attention: Observing the model's behavior.
Retention: Remembering what you observed.
Reproduction: Imitating the model's behavior.
Motivation: Having a good reason to reproduce the behavior.
The _____ is a broad analysis of the relationship between personal and
social controls. This theory is a form of control, which suggest that a
series of both internal and external factors contributes to criminal
behavior.
A. Anomie theory
B. Strain theory
C. Containment theory
D. Differential Association theory
 CONTAINMENT THEORY
(WALTER RECKLESS)

Assumed that in every individual there is a containing internal

psychological and protective external social structure both of
which provides defense and insulation against criminality.
People commit crimes because of weak inner and outer
containment factors
Reckless called an individual’s ability to resist criminal
inducement “containments”, the most important of which are a
positive self-image and “ego strength”
 CONTAINMENT FACTORS
1.Inner containment. Those ability of a person to resist
temptations to deviate and maintain normative loyalty.
a) Self Control (balanced ego)
b) Self Concept (good self image)
c) Internalization of the social norms (well develop
conscience)
Factors of internal containment (inner)
Strong and favorable self-concept
Goal orientation
Frustration tolerance
2. Outer Containment. Those formidable array of legal demands
and prohibitions that keep most people within the behavioral
bounds of society.
a)Laws/ social norms
b)Parental relationship
c)School supervision and discipline
d)Strong group cohesion
Factors of external containment (outer)
Reasonable limits and expectations
Meaningful roles and activities
Several complementary variables
Reckless noted some of the crime-producing forces that a
strong self-image counteracts (Hagan, 2017):
Internal Pushes – this includes personal factors as
restlessness, discontent, hostility, rebellion, mental
conflict, anxieties, and need for immediate gratification.
External Pressures - this includes adverse living
conditions that influence deviant behavior; relative
deprivation, poverty, unemployment, insecurity, minority
status, limited opportunity and inequalities
External Pulls – these are represented by deviant
companions, membership in criminal subcultures or other
deviant groups.
Marga has a poor relationship with her parents, has no goals for the
future, and participates in few extracurricular activities; hence, this can
lead to deviance. Which theory explains assumption?
A. Conflict
B. Labeling
C. Self-control
D. Social control
 SOCIAL BOND THEORY
(TRAVIS HIRSCHI)
Criminality results from commitment to the major social
institutions (family, peers and school); lack of such commitment allows
them to exercise antisocial behavioral choices.
People engage in crime and delinquency because of broken or
weak social bonds.

Elements of social bond:

1.ATTACHMENT
2.COMMITMENT
3.INVOLVEMENT
4.BELIEF
You get involved with antisocial group but you decided to avoid your
group members because of your family. You do not want to bring pain
and embarrassment to your parents because you love them. Based on
social bond theory, this indicate that you have strong…
a. Commitment
b. Attachment
c. Involvement
d. Belief
Kardo has never been involved in crime because he does not want to
lose everything, he has like being a dean’s lister and afraid that he may
not be able to achieve his dreams if he shall be convicted.
a. Commitment
b. Attachment
c. Involvement
d. Belief
Which of the following is a Marxist criminology review, idea and
philosophy?
A. Inequality and poverty turns people to crime, including that
exploiting of the powerless
B. Criminality is well within the rational choice of a man who is
capable of thinking
C. Crime and criminality are by product of atavistic tendency in a
society
D. Crime is absolutely caused by the free-will or man's own volition
 KARL MARX’S THEORY
Karl Heinrich Marx, in his famous “Communist Manifesto”,
viewed crime as the product of law enforcement policies akin to a
labeling process theory; he also saw connection between
criminality and the inequities found in the capitalist system.
He states that its development had turned workers into a
dehumanized mass who lived an existence that was at the mercy
of their capitalist employers.
This theory explains both law and criminal justice, and focuses
upon the division between the ruling-class elite and the laborers. In a
capitalist society, the ruling-class elite (bourgeoisie) control the
means of production which allows them to control the political state
as well. They use this control to manipulate the laborers
(proletariat) and keep them in a position of powerlessness.
Marx identified that there are two components in the mode of
production:
1) Productive forces, which include such things as technology, energy
sources, and material resources; and
2) Productive relations, which are the relationships that exists
among the people producing goods and services. The most
important relationship in industrial culture is between the owners of the
means of production (capitalist bourgeoisie), and the people who do
the actual labor (proletariat).
In Marxist Theory, it claimed that it is not necessary to have a
particular amount of wealth or prestige to be a member of the capitalist;
it is more important to have the power to exploit others economically,
legally and socially.
It is assumed that participation in criminal activity is the result of an
optimizing individual responding to incentives.
a. Economic Model of Criminal Behavior
b. Karl Marx’s Theory
c. Friedrich Engels’ and Willem Bonger’s Theory
 ECONOMIC MODEL OF CRIMINAL BEHAVIOR: BASIC THEORY
(GARY S. BECKER)

It is assumed that participation in criminal activity is the result of an

optimizing individual responding to incentives. Among the factors that
influence an individual’s decision to engage in criminal activities are:
(1) the expected gains from crime relative to earnings from legal work;
(2) the chance (risk) of being caught and convicted;
(3) the extent of punishment; and
(4) the opportunities in legal activities.
Specifying an equation to capture the incentives in the criminal
decision is natural first step in most analyses of the crime as work models.
The most important of these gives the relative rewards of legal and illegal
activity. For example, the economic model sees the criminal as committing
a crime if the expected gain from criminal activity exceeds the gain from
legal activity; generally work.
 FRIEDRICH ENGELS’ AND WILLEM
BONGER’S THEORY
The Contribution of Friedrich Engels
Friedrich Engels in his work, “The Condition of the Working Class
in England” portrayed crime as a function of social demoralization- a
collapse of people’s humanity reflecting a decline in society. Workers
are demoralized by the capitalist society, are caught up in the
process that leads to crime and violence. Working people committed
crime because their choice was a slow death of starvation or a speedy
one at the hands of the law. The brutality of the capitalist system, he
believed, turns workers into animal-like creatures out of will of
their own.
The Contribution of Willem Bonger
Willem Bonger is famous for his Marxist socialist concepts of crime
causation, which were published in 1916. Bonger believed that crime is a
social and biological origin, but exception of few special cases, crime lies
within the boundaries of normal human behavior.
According to Bonger, no act is naturally immoral or criminal. He
viewed crimes as antisocial acts that reflect current morality.
Bonger believed that society is divided into have and have not
groups, not on the basis of people’s innate ability, but because of the
system production that use in force. In every society that is divided
into ruling class and an inferior class, penal law serves the will of
the ruling class.
Even though criminals may appear to protect members of both
classes, hardly any act is punished that does not injure the
interests of the dominant ruling class. In the capitalist system
makes both the proletariat and bourgeoisie crime prone, but
only the proletariat likely to become officially recognized
criminals. Because the legal system discriminates against
the poor by defending the actions of the wealthy and second
of all, it is the proletariat who are deprived of the materials that
are monopolized by the bourgeoisie. In short, crimes are
function of poverty
Which theory states that juveniles sense a moral obligation to be bound
by law wherein such bind between a person and the law remains in the
place most of the time when it is not in place, delinquents will drift?
A. Denial of Responsibility
B. Denial of Injury
C. Denial of the Victim
D. Neutralization theory
 NEUTRALIZATION/DRIFT THEORY
(DAVID C. MATZA AND GRESHAM M. SYKES)

Suggest that delinquents hold values similar to those law

abiding citizens but they learn techniques that enable them to
neutralize those values and drift back and forth between
legitimate and delinquent behavior. Sykes and Matza suggest
that a person develop a distinct set of justifications for their
behavior when it violates accepted social rules and norms.
FIVE TECHNIQUES OF NEUTRALISATION OF
CRIMINAL BEHAVIOR:

Denial of Responsibility
Denial of Injury
Denial of the Victim
Condemnation of the Condemners
Appeal to Higher Loyalties
What is this THEORY puts the focus on the process of naming
behaviours and the people that perform them.
A. PRIMARY AND SECONDARY DEVIANCE
B. Rational choice
C. Anomie
D. Labelling
 SOCIAL REACTION: LABELING THEORY
(HOWARD BECKER AND FRANK TANNENBAUM)
Explained that society creates deviance through a system of social control
agencies that designate (label) certain individuals as delinquent,
thereby stigmatizing a person and encouraging them to accept this
negative personal identity.
Members of the rule-making society may label rule breaking behavior
deviant depending on the degree of reaction over time (Becker 1963).
In 1938, Frank Tannenbaum presented his own approach to labeling
theory in response to his studies of juvenile participation in street gangs.
Tannenbaum describes the process of defining deviant behavior as
different among juvenile delinquents and conventional society, causing a
"tagging" of juveniles as delinquent by mainstream society.
The stigma that accompanies the deviant "tag" causes a person fall
into deeper nonconformity (Pfohl, 1994).
 CONSEQUENCES OF LABELING
A. STIGMATIZATION
Labels are believed to produce stigma. People who have been
negatively labeled because of their participation or alleged
participation in deviant or outlawed behaviors maybe socially
outcasted wo may be prevented from enjoying a higher education, well-
paying jobs, and other social benefits.
B. SELF-LABELING
It refers to the process by which a person who has been negatively
labeled accepts the label as a personal role or identity.
Example: A child who has been treated by his family as stupid may live
life assuming that he is stupid.
C. SELF-FULFILLING PROPHECY
Deviant behavior patterns that are in response to an earlier labeling
experience, a person act out these social roles even if they were
falsely bestowed.
Example: A wife who keeps on saying that her husband is a cheater
although it is untrue, there is a chance that the husband would fulfill
the statements made by her wife.
D. DRAMATIZATION OF EVIL
Transforms the offender’s identity from a “doer of evil” to “an evil
person”.
Example: One who is labeled as a hired killer from committing a crime
because he is being hired may become a real evil killer
 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY DEVIANCE
(EDWIN LEMERT)

Primary deviance involves norm violations or crimes that have very

little influence on the actor and can be quickly forgotten.
Example: A college student who steals a book to get a higher grade,
later graduated and admitted to a law school and became a judge.
Because of his unnoticed act, it has a relatively unimportant event that
has little bearing on his future life.
Primary deviance refers to acts which have not been publicly labelled,
and are thus of little consequence, while secondary deviance refers to
deviance which is the consequence of the response of others, which is
significant.
 Secondary deviance occurs when a deviant event
comes to the attention of significant others or social control
agents who apply a negative label. The newly labeled offender
then recognizes his or her behavior and personality around
consequences of the deviant act.
Example: The Shoplifter student was caught by a security guard
and got expelled from college. As a result, his law school dream
dashed, his options became limited, and eventually ended as a
drug dealer and winds up in prison.
The develop sense of powerlessness which increases levels of mistrust.
Some residents become so suspicious of authority that they directly
develop a _____. It often results in an expanding mistrust of social
institutions, including law enforcement, business, government and
schools.
a. Crab mentality
b. Brain drain
c. Siege mentality
d. Focus lang sa goal, iwan pati pamilya mentality
Kardo keeps his composure and patiently disregarding his classmate
provocation to involve in fight because he knows that it could lead to
his suspension in school. He really wants to become a policeman
someday that inhibits him from any trouble.
a. Internal Pushes
b. External Pressures
c. external containment
d. internal containment
Containment Theory by Walter Reckless
Internal Pushes – this includes personal factors as restlessness, discontent, hostility, rebellion,
mental conflict, anxieties, and need for immediate gratification.
External Pressures - this includes adverse living conditions that influence deviant behavior; relative
deprivation, poverty, unemployment, insecurity, minority status, limited opportunity and inequalities
External Pulls – these are represented by deviant companions, membership in criminal subcultures
or other deviant groups.
Reckless called an individual’s ability to resist criminal inducement “containments”, the most
important of which are a positive self-image and “ego strength”
Factors of external containment (outer)
1. Reasonable limits and expectations
2. Meaningful roles and activities
3. Several complementary variables
Factors of internal containment (inner)
1. Strong and favorable self-concept
2. Goal orientation
3. Frustration tolerance
It refers to the state where youths are incapable of achieving their
legitimate goals in life because of the social conditions that they are
into.
a. Frustration
b. Strain
c. Status frustration
d. Siege mentality
It is the most common response to middle-class rejection. He is not a
chronic delinquent but may be a truant who engages in petty or status
offenses, such as sex before marriage and recreational drug abuse.
a. The Corner Boy
b. The College Boy
c. The high School Boy
d. The Delinquent Boy
4. Explain and correlate bio-
psychosocial theories of the causes
of crimes.
This might include things like brain changes, genetics, or functioning of
major body organs, such as the liver, the kidneys, or even the motor
system.
a. The “Bio” component
b. The “Psycho” component
c. The “Social” component
d. The BIO-PSYCHOSOCIAL MODEL
This explains that in crime causation, biology can affect
psychology, which can affect social well-being, which can further
affect biology, and so on.
a. The “Bio” component
b. The “Psycho” component
c. The “Social” component
d. The BIO-PSYCHOSOCIAL MODEL
THE BIO-PSYCHOSOCIAL MODEL OF
CRIME CAUSATION
The Bio-psychosocial Model of Crime Causation is an
integration or combination of both the “bio”, “psycho”, and the
“socio”. The “BIO” component of this theory examines aspects
of biology that influence health. This might include things like
brain changes, genetics, or functioning of major body
organs, such as the liver, the kidneys, or even the motor
system.
For example, let’s say Josh met an accident that leaves
him with reduced movement in his left arm. The biological change
might influence how he feels about himself, which could lead to
depression or anxiety in certain situations.
 The “PSYCHO” component of the theory examines
psychological components, things like thoughts, emotions, or
behaviors, Josh might go through many different psychological
changes.
He might experience decreased self-esteem, fear of
judgment, or fell inadequate in his life or job.
These changes in thoughts might lead to changes in
behaviors, like avoiding certain situations, staying at home, or
quitting his job. As he engages in these behaviors, his injury
might worsen, or he could suffer further depression and anxiety.
 The “SOCIAL” component of the bio-psychosocial model
examines social factors that might influence the health of an
individual, thing like our interactions with others, our culture, our
economic status. A possible social factor for Josh could be his role
in his household.
Josh is a new father. An injured arm might reduce his ability to
care for his new baby. Being unable to fulfill this social role might
trigger problems with his wife or other family members, causing
John stress that could lead to further biological or psychological
problems.
An important connection to make here is that the elements of the
biopsychosocial model are all connected. Biology can affect psychology,
which can affect social well-being, which can further affect biology, and
so on. Josh’s biological state changed, which affected his psychological
state and social interactions which all went on to affect each other again.
This theory identifies critical points in the life-course that produce
crime; in childhood, family factors are critical; in adulthood, marital and
job factors are key to show how crime is a developmental process that
shift in direction over the life course.
a. Interactional theory
b. Age-graded theory
c. Latent trait theory
d. Life-course theory
 AGE-GRADED THEORY
Robert J. Sampson and John H. Laub in their work, “Crime
in the Making” identify the turning points in a criminal career.
The stability of delinquent behavior can be affected by the events
that occur in later life, even after a chronic delinquent career has
been undertaken.
Children who enter delinquent careers are those who have
trouble at home and school, and maintain deviant friends.
• In age-graded theory, the type of crime committed by a certain
individual is in consonance with his age governs or dictates the
type of crime to be committed by him.
• Aging-out Process/phenomenon, it is also known as
desistance or remission.
The process by which individuals reduce the frequency of
their offending behavior as they age. It is also known as
spontaneous remission because people are believed to
spontaneously reduce the rate of their criminal behavior as they
mature. Aging out is thought to occur among all groups of
offenders.
 LIFE COURSE THEORY
As people are into the process of transition-moving from one stage
to another stage of life like from adolescents to adulthood, along the
way, he or she may experience some disruption in any of the
stages mentioned.
The disruption in any of the stages can lead to criminal behavior.
It viewed criminality as dynamic process, influenced by a multiple
of individual characteristics, traits, and social experiences.
For example, a female student got pregnant in her third year of
college and eventually stopped by the parents from going to school.
After delivering the baby, the student had no intention anymore of going
back to school, instead she’s now more concerned on joining her friends
wherever they go. Letting her parents took care of her baby
 INTERACTIONAL THEORY
(TERENCE P. THORNBERRY)
The onset can be traced to a deterioration of the social bond
during adolescence, marked by a weakened attachment to
parents, commitment to school, and belief in conventional values.
The onset of criminal career is supported by residence in a social
setting in which deviant values and attitudes can be learned from and
reinforcement by delinquent peers. Weak bonds lead kids to develop
friendships with deviant peers and get involved in delinquency.
So, if we try to analyze interactional theory, it clearly borrowed the
principles of social bond theory by Travis Hirschi.
 LATENT TRAIT THEORY
Latent trait theory is a complete opposite of life course
theory. This theory claims that people do not change, criminal
opportunities change; maturity brings fewer opportunities; early
social control such as proper parenting can reduce criminal
propensity.
It also holds that human development is controlled by a
“master trait-such as personality, intelligence, and genetic
make-up“, present at birth. It is also believed that this trait
remains stable and unchanging throughout the person’s lifetime
whereas others suggest that it can be altered, influenced, or
changed by subsequent experience
This theory suggests that while most people age out of crime, small
segments are not removed from a criminal path and continue crimes
into adulthood.
a. Developmental theories
b. Life-course theory
c. General theory of crime
d. Latent trait theory
A female student got pregnant in her third year of college and eventually
stopped by her parents from going to school. After delivering the baby,
the student had no intention anymore of going back to school instead
she’s now more concerned on joining her friends wherever they go,
letting her parents took care of her baby.
a. Life course theory
b. Routine activity theory
c. Lifestyle theory
d. Latent trait theory
e. Age graded theory
These are the turning points referred in Age-graded theory that cause a
man to change his criminal behavior.
a. Realization and actualization
b. Marriage and career
c. Achievement and self-respect
d. Belongingness and self-esteem
This theory implicates that minor or primary deviance must be given
much coordination and must be deterred immediately before it could
be imitated by others or be continued by the author.
a. Labelling theory
b. Imitation theory
c. Broken window theory
d. Nota
Broken window method
• Fascinated in the work of Philip G. Zimbardo, criminologists James Q.
Wilson (1931-2012) and George L. Kelling proposed that policing
minor offenses might reduce or prevent serious crimes.
• If a window in a building is broken and left unrepaired, all of the
windows will soon be broken
• James Q. Wilson and George L. Kelling
5. Understanding theories on female
offenders.
Among the following choices, this describes a radical criminological
approach to the explanation of crime that sees the conflict and
inequality present in society as being based primarily on gender.
A. Peacemaker criminology
B. Left-realist criminology
C. Radical criminology
D. Feminist criminology
Which views suggest that males such as judges, police officers and
prosecutors tend to have traditional views on women thus; they are
more lenient to them as compared to their male counterparts?
A. Paternalism
B. Chivalry hypothesis
C. Masculinity
D. Power control theory
7. PATERNALISM - This view claims that men act in a manner designed
to keep women and girls in a subservient position in society. While
women and girls may be treated less severely as indicated under the
chivalry hypothesis, they may also be treated more harshly in an
attempt to keep them from achieving equality with men.
8. SELECTIVITY HYPOTHESIS - The belief that chivalry in the criminal
justice, ie lenient sentencing, is extended primarily to white, middle
class, privileged women.
9. TYPICALITY HYPOTHESIS - The belief that chivalry in the criminal
justice, ie lenient sentencing, is extended primarily to women who
commit crimes consistent with the stereotypical view of women,
and to women who can still be viewed as “feminine”
10. CHIVALRY HYPOTHESIS - The view that male police officers,
prosecutors, and judges tend to have traditional views of women and
girls. As a result, the officials are more lenient on the females for
 POWER-CONTROL THEORY
Power control theory by John L. Hagan (1985) suggests
that class influences delinquency and criminality by controlling
the quality of family life. In egalitarian families, in which the
husband and the wife share similar positions of power at home
and in the workplace-daughters gain a kind of freedom that
reflects reduced parental control. These families produce
daughters whose law violating behaviors mirror those of their
brothers. The daughters of successful and powerful mothers are
more at risk of delinquency than the daughters of stay-at-home
mothers
 ADLER’S THEORY OF MASCULINITY
Freda Adler, a prominent female criminologist on her book
entitled, “ Sister in Crime: The Rise of a New Female Criminal” in 1975
has helped to develop the masculinity theory. She argued that, women
are involved in more crime due to the increasing participation of
women in social movements since the 1970’s, which changed role of
female in family and the feelings of independence in her work and
thought. All these factors promote the “masculinization process of
women” role in society.
The main premise of this theory is that criminalities of women
are mainly dependent on the masculinity behavior of female. The
empowered women are involved in more serious violent crime
than non-empowered women due to the masculinity
This theory claims that the cause of criminality originates with the
onset of male supremacy and the efforts of males to control female
sexuality.
a. Critical feminist
b. THEORY OF “PENIS ENVY”
c. MARGINALIZATION THEORY
d. OPPORTUNITY THEORY
 CRITICAL FEMINIST
Also known as Marxist feminist;
This theory holds that gender inequality stems from the
unequal power of men and women and the subsequent
exploitation of women by men;
The cause of criminality originates with the onset of male
supremacy and the efforts of males to control female
sexuality.
Women are “commodity” like land or money. That make
exploitation acts as trigger for female criminal or
delinquent behavior.
 MARGINALIZATION THEORY
Meda Chesney-Lind and Kathleen Daly (1986): Women and
Crime: The Female Offender (1986). Marginality (low salary; inadequate
job; lower class position; family victimization) of a woman penetrates
criminality in contemporary societies. Those women are motivated to
commit crime as a rational response to poverty and economic
uncertainty that they perceive. They pointed out women’s
unemployment, inadequate labor charges, and the increase in the
number of members in the home, that is the care for the large family,
which leads to a reduction in the domestic budget, and on her fee time
can make women crime prone.
 Criminologist Kathleen Daly developed a new term in
criminology that emphasizes women’s involvement in
professional criminality. The term “pink collar crime” appears
as a counterpart to the “white collar crime”. According to Daly,
“pink collar crime” is carried out by women whose office jobs can
be characterized as being set on a low to medium level, or more
simply speaking, at a position as accountant, manager, officers,
etc. which embezzlement from their employers.
That is, women who may not have carrying main functions but
still have enough powers and opportunities to commit fraud or
theft at their jobs
 OPPORTUNITY THEORY
This was created by Rita J. Simon in her work, “Women and Society”,
this theory argued that the involvement of criminal activities is increased
when women have different opportunities.
Increasing opportunities of women reduced the rates of violent female
offending, but increased the rates of property crimes.
According to the empirical observations of this theory, Simon argued
that historically, males are more active in crime because of their greater social
opportunities, competences, and networking than females. In the broader
social context, if female opportunity, efficiency and social communication are
increased, then the rate of female criminality increases accordingly.
Simon logically argued that, “when more women get access in labor
market as skilled labor and possess highly specialized position in the job
sector they commit more employment related property crime like men. Some
women take the advantage of these opportunities, just as some men do
before.
 (30%) (50%) (20%)

Percentage Number of Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating

A. HUMAN BEHAVIOR & Weight Items
Recall information Explain, Interpret, Using the information Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
VICTIMOLOGY and and Distribution Recognizing, listing,
summarize, examine
paraphrase, classify.
in another familiar
situation Comparing,
critiquing,
experimenting, Designing,
describing, organizing, judging constructing,
Distribution Implementing carrying deconstructing, planning,
retrieving, naming, finding. out, using, executing interrogating, finding producing,
inventing

20% 100
The registered criminologist can
perform the competencies under the
following sub-topics:
3% 15

1. Understand and interpret the concepts,

theories, and evolution of human development. .40% 2 2 - - - - -

2. Classify and differentiate typologies of human

behavior, criminal, and personality disorder. 1.0% 5 - 1 3 1 - -

3. Know the legal consequence on account of

behavior issues and appropriate responses to
offenders suffering from a mental disorder such
.80% 4 - 1 2 1 - -
as but not limited to insanity, PTSD, minority,
senility, and others.
1.Understand and interpret the
concepts, theories, and evolution of
human development.
Is a process in which a progressive series of changes occurs as a result
of maturation and experience of a person.
a. Development
b. Human development
c. Innovation
d. Maturation
A perspective in studying human behavior that focuses on the subject’s
experiences, freedom of choice, and strong motivation to achieve self-
actualization.
A. Behavioral
B. Cognitive
C. Humanistic
D. Neurological
Common Perspectives in the Study of Human Behavior
• Neurological - Emphasizes human actions in relation to events that
take place inside the body, especially the brain and the nervous
system
• Cognitive – studies how the brain processes and transforms
information in various ways.
• Psychoanalytical – emphasizes unconscious motives stemming from
repressed sexual and aggressive impulses in childhood.
• Behavioral - Focuses on external activities that can be observed and
measured.
It refers to the person’s knowledge of a given stimulus which largely
helps to determine the actual behavioral response in a given situation.
a. Perception
b. awareness
c. Sensation
d. Learning
Part of moral development theory; individual's moral rules and moral
values consist of do's and don'ts to avoid punishment young children.
a. Preconventional level
b. Conventional level
c. Postconventional level
d. Nota
The period following the onset of puberty during which a young person
develops from a child into an adult.
A. Adolescence
B. Manhood
C. Teenager
D. Adulthood
What is this usual pattern of behavior of any individuals as express by
physical and rational activities and attitudes?
A. Attitude
B. Character
C. Customs
D. Behavior
It claimed that childhood experiences and unconscious desires
ultimately influence our behaviors as adults.
a. THEORY OF PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
b. PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORIES
c. Sociocultural Theory of Cognitive Development
d. Constructivism
 PSYSCHOLOGICAL THEORIES ON HUMAN
DEVELOPMENT
1. PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORIES
As one of the most popular theories of development,
Psychoanalytic theory originated with the work of SIGMUND FREUD
who argued that childhood experiences and unconscious desires
ultimately influence our behaviors as adults.

Sigmund Freud- He is recognized as the FATHER OF

PSYCHOANALYSIS.
- He is known for his psychoanalytic theory.
- According to him, criminality is caused by the imbalance of the three
(3) components of personality: the id, the ego, and the superego.
- According to him there are three parts of personality:
It is the objective, rational part of the personality.
a. ID
b. EGO
c. SUPEREGO
1. ID – this stands for instinctual drives. It is governed by the
“pleasure principle”. The id impulses are not social and must be
repressed or adapted so that they may become socially
acceptable.
2. EGO – this is considered to be the sensible and responsible
part of an individual’s personality and is governed by the “reality
principle”. It is developed early in life and compensate for the
demands of the id by helping the individual guide his actions to
remain within the boundaries of accepted social behavior; it is the
objective, rational part of the personality.
3. SUPEREGO – serves as the moral conscience of an
individual. It is structured by what values were taught by the
parents, the school and the community as well as belief in God. It
is largely responsible for making a person follow the moral codes
of society.
In Sigmund Freud's psychosexual development, in phallic stage, the
libido focuses on what?
A. Bowel and bladder control
B. Mouth area
C. Genitals
D. Sexual interest
2. FREUD’S THEORY OF PSYCHOSEXUAL DEVELOPMENT
Stage 1: Oral Stage (Birth to 18 months)
During this stage, an infant source main source of interaction
occurs through the mouth, and as such, rooting and sucking are specially
important in this stage. The infant may develop a sense of trust and
comfort with an adult who is providing this kind of oral stimulation
Conflict occurs during the weaning process, and at this point, the
child must less become dependent upon his/her caretakers; otherwise
fixation may occur.
Fixation – is the tendency to stay at a particular stage: The
individuals troubled by the conflict that characterizes the stage and
seeing to reduce it by means of the behavior characteristics of that
stage.
If this fixation is not resolved, then the child may grow up with
issues concerning binge eating, drinking, nail biting or smoking. The
individual may also have problems related to dependency and
Stage 2: Anal Stage (18 Months to 3 Years)
During this stage, a child becomes aware of correct bowel
control and experiences pleasure in eliminating or retaining
feces. Some parents praise and reward children who show
correct behavior in this sense. These children eventually grow up
to become productive and confident.

ANAL RETENTIVE – if the child can control and eliminate feces.

Becomes obsessed with perfection, order, cleanliness and
control as an adults
ANAL EXPULSIVE- extremely disorganized and chaotic
Stage 3: Phallic Stage (3 to 6 Years)
This stage is mainly characterized by a child’s focus on sexual
interests, stimulation, and excitement in relation to genital area.
It lays down the foundation of one’s gender identity. The patterns
of identification arising from the phallic stage primarily determine the
development of human character. (McLeod, 2008)

Oedipus Complex (mommy’s boy)

Oedipus refers to a 5th-century BC Greek mythological character Oedipus,
who unwittingly kills his father, Laius, and marries his mother, Jocasta.
Electra Complex (daddy’s girl)
This is a period of exploration and place an important role in the
development of confidence as well as social and communication
skills.
a. Latency Stage
b. Genital Stage
c. Anal Stage
d. Oral Stage
The main objective of this phase is the eventual separation from
one’s attachment to his/her parents and the achievements of
mature relationships as well as adults roles and duties.
a. Latency Stage
b. Genital Stage
c. Anal Stage
d. Oral Stage
Stage 4: Latency Stage (5 or 6 years to puberty)
This development stage begins around the same time when
children enter school, and becomes more focused on their peer
relationships.
This is a period of exploration and place an important role in
the development of confidence as well as social and
communication skills.
Stage 5: Genital Stage (puberty to adulthood)
During this period, a child undergoes the psychological
maturation of systems of sexual functioning and associated
hormonal systems, thus leading to intensified drives and impulses.
The main objective of this phase is the eventual separation from
one’s attachment to his/her parents and the achievements of
mature relationships as well as adults roles and duties.
It is the shortest of all developmental periods and is considered a
time of extreme adjustments, thus making it a hazardous period.
a. Prenatal Period
b. Infancy
c. Early Childhood
d. Puberty Or Preadolescence
e. Early Adulthood
STAGES IN THE HUMAN LIFESPAN

Prenatal Period
• This period begins at conception and ends at birth.
• It occurs within about 270 to 280 days or 9 calendar months.
Infancy
• From birth to 2 weeks.
• It is the shortest of all developmental periods and is considered
a time of extreme adjustments, thus making it a hazardous
period.
Babyhood
• 2 weeks to 2 years
• period of the true foundation of age and marks the beginning of
socialization and creativity.
Early Childhood
• From 2 to 6 years
• A problematic or troublesome age
• Preschool age
Late childhood
• 6 to 1`0 or 12 years
• the so-called elementary years
• This is the “gang age”

Puberty Or Preadolescence
• 12 to 13 or 14 years
• Short overlapping period
• Subdivided into prepubescent, pubescent and post
pubescent stage
• Period of rapid growth and change
Adolescence
• 13 or 14 to 18 years
• Important transitional period that is characterized by significant change.
• A problem or dreaded age
• The child searcher for his/her identity
• About to cross over into adulthood

Early Adulthood
• 18 to 40 years
• The productive age
• Period of dependency
• Period of emotional tension or even social isolation
• Time of commitment
• A time of values changes which can lead to changes in lifestyle choices
Middle Age
• 40 to 60 years
• Time of stress and transition
• Others may feel bored with their lives
• May feel awkward or inadequate when comparing themselves with
others
• Evaluating their lives against them

Old age or senescence

• 60 years to death
• Period of decline
• Old people
• May feel that they are part of minority
• The desire for rejuvenation is widespread in old age
A major element of this theory is the “ego identity”, which is the
“conscious sense of self that we develop through social interaction.”
a. THEORY OF PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
b. PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORIES
c. Sociocultural Theory of Cognitive Development
d. Constructivism
Is a theory in education which posits that individuals or learners do not
acquire knowledge and understanding by passively perceiving it within
a direct process of knowledge transmission, rather they construct new
understandings and knowledge through experience and social
discourse, integrating new information with what they already know
a. THEORY OF PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
b. PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORIES
c. Sociocultural Theory of Cognitive Development
d. Constructivism
 Sociocultural Theory of Cognitive
Development by Lev Vygotsky’s
• One of the foundations of constructivism
• Constructivism is a theory in education which posits that individuals or learners do
not acquire knowledge and understanding by passively perceiving it within a direct
process of knowledge transmission, rather they construct new understandings and
knowledge through experience and social discourse, integrating new information
with what they already know (prior knowledge)
It asserts three major themes regarding social interaction, the more knowledgeable
other, and the zone of proximal development.
Social Interaction
 plays a fundamental role in the process of cognitive development. In contrast to Jean
Piaget’s understanding of child development (in which development necessarily
precedes learning), Vygotsky felt social learning precedes development. He states:
“Every function in the child’s cultural development appears twice: first, on the social
level, and later, on the individual level; first, between people (interpsychological) and
then inside the child (intrapsychological)”
Behavior is ________ when acts are with in the level of awareness.
a. Overt
b. Covert
c. Conscious
d. Unconscious Behavior
This behavior involved more number of neurons, a combination
of simple behaviors.
a. Simple
b. Complex
c. Irrational Behavior
d. Rational
These behaviors refers the bodily processes that foes on even
when we are awake or asleep like respiration, circulation and
digestion.
a. Irrational Behavior
b. Rational
c. Voluntary
d. Involuntary
 KINDS OF BEHAVIOR
• Overt or Covert Behavior - Behaviors that are outwardly manifested or those
that are directly observable are overt behaviors. On the other hand, covert
behavior are behaviors that are hidden – not visible to the naked eye.
• Conscious or Unconscious Behavior - Behavior is conscious when acts are
with in the level of awareness. It is unconscious when acts are embedded in
one’s subconscious – unaware.
• Simple or Complex Behavior - These are acts categorized according to the
number of neurons involved in the process of behaving. Simple behavior involves
less number of neurons while complex behavior involved more number of
neurons, a combination of simple behaviors.
• Rational or Irrational Behavior - There is rational behavior when a person
acted with sanity or reason and there is irrational behavior when the person
acted with no apparent reason or explanation – as when a man loses his sanity
and laugh out loud at nobody or nothing in particular.
• Voluntary or Involuntary Behavior - Voluntary behavior is an act done with full
volition or will such as when we discriminate, decide or choose while involuntary
behaviors refers the bodily processes that foes on even when we are awake or
asleep like respiration, circulation and digestion.
It is this behavior that sets human being apart from other
animals.
a. Voluntary
b. Involuntary
c. Inherited (Inborn) Behavior
d. Learned (Operant) Behavior
 Two Basic Types of Behavior
a. Inherited (Inborn) Behavior – It refers to any behavioral reactions
or reflexes exhibited by people because of their inherited capabilities
or the process of natural selection e.g., the survival of species who are
dependent on behaviors like breathing, digesting food, mating and
depending oneself.
b. Learned (Operant) Behavior – It involves knowing or adaptation
that enhances human beings’ ability to cope with changes in the
environment in ways which improve the chances of survival. It may be
acquired through environment or training e.g., good command of
English, logical problem-solving technique, job skills, and other
learned expertise that give people more control over their lives. It is
this behavior that sets human being apart from other animals.
It is generally unlearned and simply comes out of man’s instinct
which can be seen among instinct survival behaviors.
a. Habitual
b. Instinctive
c. Symbolic
d. Complex
 Classifications of Human Behavior
Habitual – It refers to motorized behavior usually manifested in
language and emotion.

Instinctive – It is generally unlearned and simply comes out of

man’s instinct which can be seen among instinct survival
behaviors.

Symbolic – It is a behavior that is usually carried out by means

of unsaid words and shown through symbols or body signs.

Complex – It is a behavior that combines two or more of the

classified ones.
They frequently seeks stimulation, excitement, and thrills.
a. Extraversion
b. Neuroticism
c. Psychoticism
Personality Dimensions that affect Human Behavior
(P-E-N Model of Personality by Hans Eysenck)
Types Characteristics effects
Extraversion Frequently seeks stimulation, Gets people in trouble, has
excitement, and thrills the greatest role in crime and
delinquency

Neuroticism Intensely reacts to stress, Enhances habits and

generally moody, touchy, influences the individual to
sensitive to slights and behave in ways that are
anxious or nervous considered anti-social

Psychoticism Cold, cruel, social Impulse aggressive individual

insensitivity, disregard for without appreciable
danger, troublesome conscience or sense of
behavior, dislike of others, morals
attraction towards the
unusual.
This family is usually due to value differences as common
sources of conflict and dissatisfaction.
a. THE INADEQUATE FAMILY
b. THE ANTI-SOCIAL FAMILY
c. THE DISCORDANT/DISTURBED FAMILY
d. THE DISRUPTED FAMILY
Pathogenic Family Structure – those families associated with high frequency of
problems such as:

THE INADEQUATE FAMILY – characterized by the inability to cope with the ordinary
problems of family living. It lacks the resources, physical of psychological, for
meeting the demands of family satisfaction.
THE ANTI-SOCIAL FAMILY – those that espouses unacceptable values as a result
of the influence of parents to their children.
THE DISCORDANT/DISTURBED FAMILY – characterized by non-satisfaction of
one or both parent from the relationship that may express feeling of frustration. This
is usually due to value differences as common sources of conflict and dissatisfaction.
THE DISRUPTED FAMILY – characterized by incompleteness whether as a result of
death, divorce, separation or some other circumstances.

Childhood Trauma
The experiences, which affect the feeling of security of a child undergoing
developmental processes. The development processes are being blocked
sometimes by parental deprivation as a consequence of parents or lack of adequate
maturing at home because of parental rejection, overprotection, restrictiveness, over
This is a result of drives which is a psychological state of arousal
that prompts someone to take action.
a. Needs
b. Drives
c. Motivation
 OTHER DETERMINANTS
In order to further understand and provide answers on the
question that why do some people behave criminally, it is
important to study the other determinants of behavior. These are
needs, drives and motivation.

Needs and Drives

Need, according to a drive reduction theory, is a biological
requirement for well being of the individual. This need creates
drives – a psychological state of arousal that prompts someone
to take action (Bernstein, et al, 1991). Drive therefore is an
aroused state that results from some biological needs.
Motivation
Is defined as behavior instigated by needs within the
individual and directed towards a goal that can satisfy the needs.
Motivation may also be regarded as explanation for action which
influences behavior in many ways. All definitions of motivation
have certain things in common such as: it comes from within; it is
directed towards a goal; and it arouses interest in the activity.
According to Abraham Maslow, this is the most important needs.
Biological or Physiological Needs
a. Safety Needs
b. Love/Belongingness
c. Esteem Needs
d. Self- actualization
Biological or Physiological Needs – these motives include the
need for food, water, oxygen, activity, and sleep.
Safety Needs – these pertains to the motives of being cared for
and being secured such as in income and place to live.
Love/Belongingness – Belongingness is integration into various
kinds of social groups or social organizations. Love needs means
need for affection.
Cognitive Needs – our motivation for learning and exploration
Esteem Needs – our motivation for an honest, fundamental
respect for a person as a useful and honorable human being.
Aesthetic Needs - our motivation for beauty and order
Self- actualization – pertains to human total satisfaction, when
people are motivated not so much by unmet needs, as by the
desire to become all they are capable of (self-realization).
Refers to the characteristics of an individual, describing a habitual way
of behaving, thinking and feeling.
a. Behavior
b. Attitude
c. Character
d. Trait
This theory attempt to learn and explain the traits that make up
personality, the differences between people in terms of their personal
characteristics, and how they relate to actual behavior.
a. THEORY OF PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
b. PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORIES
c. Sociocultural Theory of Cognitive Development
d. Trait Theory
Trait approach identifies where a person might lie along a continuum of
various personality characteristics. Trait theories attempt to learn and
explain the traits that make up personality, the differences between
people in terms of their personal characteristics, and how they relate to
actual behavior.
Trait refers to the characteristics of an individual, describing a habitual
way of behaving, thinking and feeling.
This refers to the process of consciously experiencing deep emotions
that have previously been repressed, thus moving them to the surface
and allowing them to come out.
a. Frustration Aggression Theory
b. What is the Hypothesis of Catharsis
c. purging or cleansing
d. catharsis
Frustration Aggression Theory – this is an example of
frustration turning into aggression. Aggression is a
maliciously behavior or attitude towards someone or
something, usually triggered by frustration.
What is the Hypothesis of Catharsis? also known as
“purging or cleansing” In psychotherapy, catharsis refers to
the process of consciously experiencing deep emotions
that have previously been repressed, thus moving them to
the surface and allowing them to come out.
It is the ability to withstand frustration without developing
inadequate modes of response such as being emotionally
depressed or irritated, becoming neurotic or becoming
aggressive.
a. Frustration Tolerance
b. Coping Mechanism
c. Defense Mechanism
d. Frustration
 Frustration

Is a negative emotional state that occurs when one is prevented form

reaching a goal.
Is an unpleasant state of tension and heightened sympathetic activity
resulting from a blocked goal.
External frustration- is a distress caused by outward perceivable
conditions that impedes progress toward a goal.
Internal/Personal Frustration- caused by the individual’s inner
characteristics that impedes progress toward a goal.
Frustration Aggression Theory – this is an example of
frustration turning into aggression. Aggression is a
maliciously behavior or attitude towards someone or
something, usually triggered by frustration.
What is the Hypothesis of Catharsis? also known as
“purging or cleansing” In psychotherapy, catharsis refers to
the process of consciously experiencing deep emotions
that have previously been repressed, thus moving them to
the surface and allowing them to come out.
Frustration Tolerance
It is the ability to withstand frustration without developing
inadequate modes of response such as being emotionally
depressed or irritated, becoming neurotic or becoming
aggressive.

Broad Reactions to Frustration

Fight – It is manifested by fighting the problem in a constructive
and direct way by means of breaking down the
obstacles preventing the person reaching his goals.
Flight – It can be manifested by sulking, retreating, becoming
indifferent and giving up
 Coping Mechanism
• It is defined as the way people react to frustration. People differ
in the way they react to frustration. This could be attributed to
individual differences and the way people prepared in the
developmental task they faced during the early stages of their
life
A pillar of human development that every person has the right to an
education and health care, that there must be fairness for all.
a. Equity
b. Sustainability
c. Production
d. Empowerment
Four pillars of Human Development
Equity
the idea that every person has the right to an education and health care,
that there must be fairness for all
Sustainability
it encompasses the view that every person has the right to earn a living
that can sustain him or her, while everyone also has the right to access to
goods more evenly distributed among populations.
Production
It is the idea that people need more efficient social programs to be
introduced by their governments
Empowerment
It is the view that people who are power-kw r. need to he given power
This includes forgotten trauma in childhood, hidden feelings of hostility
toward a present, and repressed sexual desires of which you are
unaware
a. The Conscious Level
b. The Preconscious Level
c. The Unconscious Level
The Conscious Level
It consists of whatever sensations and experiences you are aware of at a given
moment of time.
The Preconscious Level
This domain is sometimes called "available memory" that encompasses all
experiences that are not conscious at the moment but which can easily be retrieved
into awareness either spontaneously or with a minimum of effort. Examples might
include memories of everything you did last Saturday nigh, all the towns you ever lied
in, your favorite books, or an argument you had with a friend yesterday.
The Unconscious Level - It is the deepest and major stratum of the human mind. It is
the storehouse for primitive instinctual drives plus emotion and memories that are so
threatening to the conscious mind that they have been repressed, or unconsciously
pushed into the unconscious mind. Examples of material that might be found in your
unconscious include forgotten trauma in childhood, hidden feelings of hostility
toward a present, and repressed sexual desires of which you are unaware
Refers to feelings affective responses as a result of physiological
arousal, thoughts and beliefs, subjective evaluation and bodily
expression. It is characterized by facial expressions, gestures, postures
and subjective feelings.
a. Needs
a. Emotion
b. Drives
c. Motivation
According to Dr. Daniel Goleman, it is a person’s ability to manage his
feelings so that those feelings are expressed appropriately and
effectively.
a. Intelligence
b. Emotion
c. Emotional intelligence
d. Intelligence quotient
2. Classify and differentiate typologies
of human behavior, criminal, and
personality disorder.
What is the disorder that has been linked to brain disfunction and
damage, neurological immaturity, and genetic predisposition?
A. Attention-deficit hyperactivity
B. Learning
C. Post-traumatic stress
D. Obsessive-compulsive
Which describes traits of people who will often try to justify their faults
often think that any criticism is directed at them; loves praises because
it gives them temporary self-confidence; and they do not like
competition unless they are certain to win because it hurts them too
much when they lose?
A. Superiority complex
B. Maladjusted personality
C. Anti-personality disorder
D. Inferiority complex
Which of the following is the true psychopath?
A. Secondary psychopath
B. Dyssocial psychopath
C. Neurotic
D. Primary psychopath
Dyssocial Psychopath
- display aggressive, antisocial behaviour learned from their subculture

- like gangs, terrorist groups, and families

Dissocial Personality Disorder
People with dissocial personality disorder exhibit traits of
impulsivity, high negative emotionality, low conscientiousness and
associated behaviours, including irresponsible and exploitative
behaviour, recklessness and deceitfulness
People with dissocial personality disorder have often grown up
with parental conflict and harsh inconsistent parenting. Their
childhoods have typically featured parental inadequacies and often
transfer of care to outside agencies. Dissocial personality disorder is
also associated with a high incidence of truancy, delinquency and
substance misuse
Primary Psychopath
a "true" psychopath

- has certain identifiable psychological, emotional, cognitive, and

biological differences
Secondary Psychopath
commit antisocial or violent acts because of severe emotional
problems or inner conflicts
- (parallel is "acquired callous-unemotional" traits in youth)
-aka acting-out neurotics, neurotic delinquents, symptomatic
psychopaths, emotionally disturbed defenders
-demonstrates more emotional instability and impulsivity than primary
psychopath, and are more aggressive and violent
-more rooted in parental abuse and rejection
 Primary psychopathy has a characteristic emotional deficiency. This implies
that the parts of the brain that are involved in behavioral and emotional responses
are hampered along with the ability to react to environmental changes. Serotonin
level in such a case is hyper-stable.
Secondary psychopathy on the other hand is characterized by emotional
disturbance owing to physiological changes that are in line with environmental
aspects like malfunctioning of the prefrontal cortex (the area of the brain that deals
with cognitive control) and deficiency of serotonin.
Both of these types vary in terms of traits, personalities and causal physiological
mechanisms. Each of the categories are further divided into separate continuums.
Primary psychopaths lie on the continuum of controlled to disinhibited while
secondary psychopaths lie on the continuum of detached to unstable (Yildirim &
Derksen, 2015).
Bringing in the nature vs nurture debate, it is theorized that primary
psychopathy is due to nature while secondary is due to nurture.
The difference between a primary and a secondary psychopath is: Human
attachment
What is the sexual disfunction wherein there is no sexual drive or
interest in sexual activity?
A. Sexual aversion disorder
B. Hypoactive sexual desire disorder
C. Sexual pain disorder
D. Post traumatic sexual disorder
What is the false interpretation of external stimulus which manifested
through sight, hearing, taste, smell and touch?
A. Hallucination
B. Illusion
C. Delusion
D. Mania
A serious mental and emotional disorder that is a manifestation of
withdrawal from reality. Some of examples are encephalitis,
intoxication, mania, dementia praecox or split personality.
A. Psychosomatic
B. Psychoneurosis
C. Psychosis
D. Psychogenic
Mr. Jessie, during sexual intercourse, utters obscence languages to
achieve sexual satisfaction. What form of abnormality sexual behavior
is this?
A. Exhibitionism
B. Coprolalia
C. Don Juanism
D. Pluralism
Which of the following is characterized by infantile level of response,
lack of conscience, deficient feeling of affection to others and
aggression to environment and other people?
A. Schizophrenic personality
B. Psychopathic personality
C. Compulsive neurosis
D. Neurotic personality
Which of the following is a disorder characterized by chronic mental
and physical fatigue and by various aches and pains?
A. Anxiety disorder
B. Somatoform disorder
C. Dissociative disorder
D. Amnesia
Kardo has this serious mental and emotional disorder that manifest a
withdrawal from reality. He feels that he has this split personality.
A. Psychosis
B. Schizophrenia
C. Psychosomatic
D. Psychoneurosis
A serious mental and emotional disorder that is manifestation of
withdrawal from reality. Some example are encephalitis, intoxication,
cerebral arteriosclerosis, senile brain disease, mania, dementia praecox,
or split personality.
A. Psychosomatic
B. Psychoneurosis
C. Psychosis
D. Psychogenic
This is the inexcusable reverential of a specific situation when there is
no existing evil that are totally out of dimensions.
A. Phobias
B. Obsessive-compulsive
C. Exposure
D. Anxiety neurosis
Ricardo "Cardo" Dalisay submits himself to humiliation, beatings, and
other forms of physical abuse for sexual excitement. What type of
paraphilia does he possess?
A. Sadism
B. Sadomasochism
C. Masochism
D. Battered woman syndrome
Displays neurological symptoms such as numbness, paralysis, or fits,
even though no neurological explanation is found and it is determined
that the symptoms are due to the patient’s psychological response to
stress.
a. Hypochondriasis
b. Conversion Disorder (Hysteria)
c. Body Dysmorphic Disorder
d. Mass Hysteria
• HYPOCHONDRIASIS- preoccupied with their health and are convinced
that they have some serious disorder despite reassurance from
doctors to the contrary.
• BODY DYSMORPHIC DISORDER (DYSMORPHOHOBIA) – referred to as
body dysmorphia or dysmorphic. It is a (psychological) somatoform
disorder in which the affected person is excessively concerned about
and preoccupied by a perceived defect in his or her physical features
(body image).
• UNDIFFERENTIATED SOMATOFORM DISORDER – only one
unexplained symptom is required for at least 6 months. Included
among these disorders are false pregnancy, psychogenic urinary
retention, and mass psychogenic illness (so-called Mass Hysteria)
Lack of empathy or conscience, difficulty controlling impulses and
manipulative behaviors. It is called Conduct disorder in less than 18
years old.
a. Antisocial personality disorder
b. Schizoid Personality Disorder
c. Paranoid Personality Disorder
d. Schizotypal Personality Disorder
Exhibit a pervasive pattern of excessive emotionality and attempt to get
attention in unusual ways, such as bizarre appearance or speech.
a. Histrionic personality disorder
b. Avoidant Personality Disorder
c. Narcissistic personality disorder
d. Borderline personality disorder
• Schizoid Personality Disorder – somber, aloof and often are referred
to as loners
• Paranoid Personality Disorder – more often come across as
emotionally cold or excessively serious.
• Borderline personality disorder – interferes with an individual’s
ability to regulate emotion. Highly sensitive to rejection, and fear of
abandonment may result in frantic efforts to avoid being left alone,
such as suicide threats and attempts.
• Narcissistic personality disorder – characterized primarily by
grandiosity, need for admiration, and lack of empathy.
•
A person with mental defectiveness of such a degree that he is unable
to guard himself against common physical dangers. His mental capacity
is commensurate to 2 years old.
a. Feeble–Minded
b. Idiot
c. Imbecile
d. Morally defective
CLASSICAL TYPES OF MENTAL DEFICIENCIES
• Idiot –wanting in memory, willpower and emotion, cannot expressed
himself in language, is quiet, timid and easily irritated. I.Q. 0-10.
• Imbecile –cannot manage his own affairs, able to speak but worth
poor command language. IQ. 21-40
• Feeble-Minded –incapable of receiving benefits from instruction in
ordinary school, lacks initiative and ability for any work or
responsibility. I.Q. 41-70.
• Morally Defective – devoid of a moral sense and often shows
intellectual deficiency, careless, pleasure-loving and a devil –may-
care-sort who adheres to the principles of live today for tomorrow we
die, live fact and die young and it is only happiness that counts.
It is recurrent, persistent ideas, thoughts, images, or impulses that are
ego-dystonic, that is, they are not experienced as voluntarily produced,
but rather as ideas that invade consciousness.
a. Obsession
b. Anxiety
c. Phobia
d. Compulsion
This is a psychoneurotic condition that is accompanied by a vast range
of mental and emotional symptoms that cannot be controlled.
a. Psychasthenia
b. Amnesia
c. Phobias
d. Compulsion
e. Obsession
It is defined as the way people react to frustration. This could be
attributed to individual differences and the way people prepared in the
developmental task they faced during the early stages of their life.
a. Coping mechanism
b. Defense mechanism
c. Fight/flight
d. Frustration Tolerance
It is the ability to withstand frustration without developing inadequate
modes of response such as being emotionally depressed or irritated,
becoming neurotic, or becoming aggressive.
a. Coping mechanism
b. Defense mechanism
c. Fight/flight
d. Frustration Tolerance
When an individual realizes that in finding for the right solution of the
problem, he always end up with a negative outcome or result. Thus, he
tries to change direction first and find out if the solution or remedy is
there.
a. Direct approach
b. Detour
c. Substitution
d. Developing feeling of inferiority
Most of time are resulted to in handling frustration when an original
plan intended to solve the problem did not produce the intended
result, thus the most practical way to face the problem, is to look for
most possible or alternative means.
a. Direct approach
b. Detour
c. Substitution
d. Developing feeling of inferiority
Substituting acceptable physical symptoms for unacceptable emotions
and feelings. For example, a student has a test and is nervous and
afraid of failing, develops nausea and vomiting.
a. Denial
b. Conversion
c. Repression
d. Sublimation
Ricardo "Cardo" Dalisay is a volleyball team captain that keeps the
game on even if it is a 25-20 and they're losing at the fourth set of
game. This situation if referring to:
A. Denial
B. Dissociation
C. Avoidance
D. Acting out
A manifestation of mental disorder through an erroneous perception
without an external object of stimulus.
A. Mania
B. Hallucination
C. Illusion
D. Delusion
An anxiety that is occasional but intense.
a. Panic
b. Worry
c. neurotic fear
d. Nota
 Anxiety Disorders

Anxiety disorders are commonly known as “neurotic fear”.

When it is occasional but intense, it is called “panic”. When it is
mild but continuous, it is called “worry” which is usually
accompanied by physiological symptoms such as sustained
muscular tension, increased blood pressure, insomnia, etc. They
are considered as the central feature of all neurotic patterns.
These disorders are characterized by mild depressions, fear and
tensions, and mild stresses.
Refers to fear that instincts will get out of control and cause the person
to do something for which he or she will be punished.
a. Anxiety
b. Reality Anxiety
c. Neurotic Anxiety
d. Moral Anxiety
Three Types of Anxiety According to Freud
1. Reality Anxiety - refers to fear of real dangers in the
external world.
2. Neurotic Anxiety - refers to fear that instincts will get out of
control and cause the person to do something for which he
or she will be punished.
3. Moral Anxiety - is the fear of the conscience. People with
well-developed superegos tend to feel guilty when they do
something that is contrary to the moral code by which they
have been raised.
It is characterized by immaturity, excitability, emotional instability
and self-dramatization.
a. Paranoid Personality Disorder
b. Schizoid Personality Disorder
c. Schizotypal Personality Disorder
d. Histrionic Personality Disorder
Paranoid Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
suspicious, rigidity, envy, hypersensitivity, excessive self-
importance, argumentativeness and tendency to blame others of
one’s own mistakes.
Schizoid Personality Disorder - This is characterized by the
inability to form social relationship and lack of interest in doing
so. The person seem to express their feelings, they lack social
skills. They are the so-called “loners”.
Schizotypal Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
seclusiveness, over sensitivity, avoidance of communication and
superstitious thinking is common.
It is characterized by an exaggerated sense of self-importance
and pre-occupation with receiving attention. The person usually
expects and demands special treatment from others and
disregarding the rights and feeling of others.
a. Narcissistic Personality Disorder
b. Borderline Personality Disorder
c. Avoidant Personality Disorder
d. Dependent Personality Disorder
Borderline Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
instability reflected in drastic mood shifts and behavior problems.
The person usually displays intense anger outburst with little
provocation and he is impulsive, unpredictable, and periodically
unstable.
Avoidant Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
hypersensitivity to rejection and apprehensive alertness to any
sign of social derogation. Person is reluctant to enter into social
interaction.
Dependent Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
extreme dependence on other people – there is acute discomfort
and even panic to be alone. The person lacks confidence and
feels helpless.
It is characterized by excessive concern with rules, order, and
efficiency that everyone does things their way and an ability to
express warm feeling.
a. Passive-Aggressive Personality Disorder
b. Compulsive Personality Disorder
c. Anti-social Personality Disorder
d. Nota
Passive-Aggressive Personality Disorder - It is characterized
by being hostile expressed in indirect and non-violent ways. They
are so called “stubborn”. The individual with this personality
disorder is usually found to have overindulged in many things
during the early years to the extent that the person comes to
anticipate that his needs will always be met and gratified.
Anti-social Personality Disorder - It is characterized by
continuing violation of the rights of others through aggressive,
anti-social behavior with out remorse or loyalty to anyone.
Believes they have done something terribly wrong. One
extremely rare instance if this diseases is called FOLIE A DEUX.
a. JEALOUS PARANOIA
b. SOMATIC DELUSION
c. GUILT DELUSION
d. Paranoia
Paranoia – it is a psychosis characterized by a systemized
delusional system. A type of psychotic reaction, the main
symptom of which is characterized by suspicion. (aka
DELUSIONAL DISORDER)

JEALOUS PARANOIA – The state of having extreme and

irrational jealousy
SOMATIC DELUSION – focuses on delusional physical
abnormality or disorder
GUILT DELUSION – believes they have done something terribly
wrong. One extremely rare instance if this diseases is called
FOLIE A DEUX
Having grandiose delusions and believes himself/herself as
someone with great power or importance, usually reformer or
religious crusader.
a. PERSECUTORY PARANOIA
b. LITIGIOUS PARANOIA
c. EROTIC PARANOIA
d. EXALTED PARANOIA
PERSECUTORY PARANOIA – this refers ti having delusions of
persecution. The person believes that some people are plotting ti
harm him/her in some way
LITIGIOUS PARANOIA – This refers to having delusions of both
persecution and grandeur; a person may go to great lengths to
bring alleged persecutors to court.
EROTIC PARANOIA – Also called amorous paranoia, this refers
to having delusions that a certain person is in love with him/her
A response to obvious stress characterized by amnesia, multiple
personality, and depersonalization. Loss of integration of
consciousness, identity and memories of important personal
events.
a. Dissociative Disorders
b. Amnesia
c. Multiple Personality
d. Depersonalization
 Dissociative Disorders
A response to obvious stress characterized by amnesia,
multiple personality, and depersonalization. Loss of integration of
consciousness, identity and memories of important personal
events.

1. Amnesia - The partial or total inability to recall or identify past

experiences following a traumatic incident.
Brain pathology amnesia – total loss of memory and it
cannot be retrieved by simple means. It requires long period of
medication.
Psychogenic amnesia – failure to recall stored information
and still they are beneath the level of consciousness but
“forgotten material.”
2. Multiple Personality - It is also called “dual personalities.”
The reason manifests two or more symptoms of personality
usually dramatically different.

3. Depersonalization - The loss of sense of self or the so-called

out of body experience. There is a feeling of detachment from
one’s mental processes or body or being in a dream state. Cases
of somnambulism (sleep walking) may fall under this disorder.

4. Psychogenic Fugue - Flight from family, problem, or location.

In highly uncommon cases, the person may create an entirely
new life
3. Know the legal consequence on
account of behavior issues and
appropriate responses to offenders
suffering from a mental disorder such as
but not limited to insanity, PTSD, minority,
senility, and others.
Refers to anti-social acts that place the actor at risk of becoming
a focus of the attention of criminal and juvenile justice
professionals.
a. Abnormal behavior
b. Criminal behavior
c. Anti-social behavior
d. Maladaptive behavior
 CRIMINAL BEHAVIOR
-Refers to anti-social acts that place the actor at risk of
becoming a focus of the attention of criminal and juvenile justice
professionals. It refers to acts that are injurious, acts prohibited
under the law and that render the actor subject to intervention by
justice professionals.

3 elements of criminal behavior (Goldoozian)

• legally, the criminal act should be prohibited by law.
• Materially, the criminal act should be executed or realized.
• Spiritually, the criminal act should be accompanied by criminal
intention or guilt. These three must be present.
Which of the following conditions is characterized by a cluster of
behavioral and emotional features that were often shared by women
who have been physically and psychologically abused over a period of
time by the dominant male figure in their lives?
A. Intimate partner violence
B. Munchausen syndrome by proxy
C. Same sex domestic violence
D. Battered women syndrome
What is that common human tendency to discount the influence of the
situation and explain behavior by referring to the personality of the
actor instead?
A. Self-serving bias
B. Crime of obedience
C. Frustration-induced situation
D. Fundamental attribution error
What is Frustration—induced
Criminality?
Frustration induced criminality is the idea that when out
behavior is directed at a specific goal and is blocked, arousal increases
and the individual experiences a need to reduce it. Individuals "who
employ violence to reduce this frustration will, under extreme
frustration, become more vigorous than usual, possibly even resorting
to murder and other violent actions".
A good example of this, is the child who does not have their
needs met and becomes frustrated. "The frustration of not having
dependency needs met prevents the child from establishing emotional
attachments to other people. The individual may thus become
resentful, angry, and hostile toward other people in general
 Fundamental Attribution Error
The fundamental attribution error refers to an individual's tendency to
attribute another's actions to their character or personality, while
attributing their behavior to external situational factors outside of their
control. In other words, you tend to cut yourself a break while holding others
100 percent accountable for their actions.
For instance, if you've ever chastised (reprimand) a "lazy employee" for
being late to a meeting and then proceeded to make an excuse for being late
yourself that same day, you've made the fundamental attribution error.
The fundamental attribution error exists because of how people perceive
the world. While you have at least some idea of your character, motivations, and
situational factors that affect your day-to-day, you rarely know everything that's
going on with someone else. Similar to confirmation and overconfidence biases,
its impact on business and life can be reduced by taking several measures.
Fundamental Attribution Error Examples

In working with your colleagues, for example, you probably form

a general impression of their character based on pieces of a situation,
but never see the whole picture. While it would be nice to give them the
benefit of the doubt, your brain tends to use limited information to make
judgments.
Within organizations, FAE can cause everything from arguments
to firings and ruptures in organizational culture. In fact, it's at the root of
any misunderstanding in which human motivations have the potential to
be misinterpreted.
 For example, think back to the "lazy employee." Since she was
late to an important meeting, you might be inclined to form a judgment
of her character based on this one action alone. It's possible, however,
that her behavior is due to several external, rather than internal, factors.
For instance, any number of situational factors could have caused her to
run behind schedule, such as a family emergency or traffic jam, which
have nothing to do with the quality of her character.
In action, forming impressions of a person's character based on
limited information can have long-lasting effects. Now that you
perceive this person as "lazy," your opinions of her may begin to shift
over time. Unless the opportunity arises for you to get to know your
employee better, you may always view her in a negative light.
 Crimes of Obedience

The term “crimes of obedience” was first explicitly used — at

least in English language sources[1] — by two social psychologists,
Herbert Kelman and Lee Hamilton, in 1989 in their book Crimes of
obedience: Toward a social psychology of authority and responsibility.
The case studies they investigated range from the My Lai military
massacre in Vietnam, to organizational misconduct such as the
Watergate scandal and the systemic failures that led to the crash of the
Challenger space shuttle.
 They defined “crimes of obedience” as: “an illegal or immoral
act committed in response to orders or directions from authority”
(1989: 307). Kelman and Hamilton identified authorization,
routinization, and dehumanization as requisite to sanction massacres.
Authorization meant that sanctioned massacres occur in a context of an
authority ordering or at least tacitly approving the killing. Routinization
allows people to participate in actions without considering the
implications of that action and without really making a decision.
Dehumanization of the victims occurs when a group of people is
defined entirely in terms of a category to which they belong, and when
this category is excluded from the human family.
A Scottish Woodcutter was accused of killing a man he believed to be
Prime Minister for thought that he was persecuted by the Tories and
their leader, Robert Peel, however turned out to be another person.
The court believed he was so mentally deranged that it would be
inhuman to convict him since it was clear he was not in control of his
faculties. This case became known as:
A. ALI " Substancial Capacity" Test
B. The M'naghten Rule
C. The Durham Rule
D. "Product Test"
 The formal insanity defense has its beginnings in 1843, when Daniel
McNaughton tried to kill Robert Peel, the British prime minister (he shot
and killed his secretary instead).
At his trial, McNaughten testified that he believed that the British
government was plotting against him, and he was acquitted of murder.
The McNaughton Rule requires that a criminal defendant (a) not
know what he was doing at the time or (b) not know that his actions
were wrong (because of his delusional belief, McNaughton thought he as
defending himself.
The Rule created a presumption of sanity, unless the defense
proved "at the time of committing the act, the accused was laboring
under such a defect of reason, from disease of the mind, as not to know
the nature and quality of the act he was doing or, if he did know it, that
he did not know what he was doing was wrong." This rule was adopted
in the US, and the distinction of knowing right from wrong remained the
basis for most decisions of legal insanity.
What is the Durham Rule or "Product
Test" ?
The Durham rule states that, "an accused is not criminally
responsible if his unlawful act is the product of mental disease or
mental defect."
Some States added to their statutes this doctrine which is also
known as "irresistible impulse" recognizing some ill individuals may
respond correctly but may be unable to control their behavior.
In the United States, the next advance in the insanity defense was
The Durham Rule or "product test" adopted in 1954, which states that
"... an accused is not criminally responsible if his unlawful act was the
product of mental disease or defect". This "product test" was
overturned in 1972, largely because its ambiguous reference to "mental
disease or defect" places undue emphasis on subjective judgments by
psychiatrists, and can easily lead to a "battle of the experts".
This rule stated that a person is not responsible for his criminal act if, as
a result of the mental disease or defect he lacks substantial capacity to
appreciate the criminality of his act or to conform his conduct to the
requirements of the law.
A. ALI " Substancial Capacity" Test
B. The M'naghten Rule
C. The Durham Rule
D. "Product Test"
Insanity and Criminal Law in the Philippines In the Philippines, the courts
have established a more stringent criterion for insanity to be exempting as it
is required that there must be a complete deprivation of intelligence in
committing the act. Which of the following agrees to the statement?
a. he accused is deprived of reason; he acted without the least discernment
because there is a complete absence of the power to discern, or that there is
a total deprivation of the will. Mere abnormality of the mental faculties will
not exclude imputability. The issue of insanity is a question of fact for insanity
is a condition of the mind, not susceptible of the usual means of proof. As no
man can know what is going on in the mind of another, the state or condition
of a person's mind can only be measured and judged by his behavior.
4. Define the nature and concept of
victimology and victimization, the
typology of crime victims, and the
intervention to help victims of crime.
In the Mendelsohn's victim types, who is the victim with minor guilt?
A. No provocation or facilitating behavior
B. Victim provokes or instigate the casual act
C. Victim was engaging in vice crimes and was hurt, suicide victim
D. Victim inadvertently places himself in compromising situation
Completely innocent victim
a victim who bears no responsibility at all for victimization; victimized simply because of his or her
nature, such as being a child
Victim with minor guilt
a victim who is victimized due to ignorance; a victim who inadvertently places himself or herself in
harm's way
Victim as guilty as offender/voluntary victim
a victim who bears as much responsibility as the offender; a person who, for example, enters into a
suicide pact
Victim more guilty than offender
a victim who instigates or provokes his or her own victimization
Most guilty victim
a victim who is victimized during the perpetration of a crime or as a result of crime Simulating or
imaginary victim
a victim who is not victimized at all but, instead, fabricates a victimization event
Mendelsohn's classification emphasized degrees of culpability, recognizing that some victims
bear no responsibility for their victimization, whereas others, based on their behaviors or
actions, do.
What occours when a victim unintentionally makes it easier for an
offender to commit a crime, a victim may, and in this way be a catalyst
for victimization ?
A. Victim precipitation
B. Victim provocation
C. Victim facilitation
D. Victim instigation
Jose and his fellow adolescents are living with economic difficulties and
are engaged in some unlawful activities. Adjacent in their environment
is a subdivision not regularly patrolled by policemen and "tanods" and
whose residents are mostly middle and upper class of the society
whose houses are fully equipped with easily saleable items, fixtures
and appliances. Applying the routine activity theory, which may aptly
consider to Jose and his fellow adolescents?
A. Motivated offenders
B. Economically poor
C. Suitable targets
D. Capable guardians
What kind of crime victim does these people who experience the harm
intensely through media publicity as their source of information?
A. Specific crime victim
B. Tertiary crime victims
C. direct crime victim
D. indirect crime victim
What type of victim who is particularly vulnerable to stresses that
occur at a given period of time in the life cycle, such as juvenile victims?
A. Self-serving
B. Wanton
C. Tormentor
D. Greedy
Depressive type
VON HENTIG
A victim who lacks ordinary prudence, and discretion. It is an easy target, careless,
and unsuspecting. They are submissive by virtue of emotional condition.
Greedy of gain or Acquisitive type
A victim who lacks all normal inhibitions and well-founded suspicions. The victim is
easily duped because his or her motivation for easy gain lowers his or her natural
tendency to be suspicious
Wanton or Overly Sensual type
A victim where female foibles play a role. The victim is particularly vulnerable to
stresses that occur at a given period of time in the life cycle, such as juvenile victims.
Further, this victim is rules by passion and thoughtless seeking pleasure.
Tormentor type
The victim of an attack form the target of his or her abuse, such as with battered
women. The most primitive way of solving a personal conflict is to annihilate physically the
cause of trouble
Victim typologies based on the offender-victim dyad in a criminal act.
Common to the ideas of these early victimologists was that each
classified victim in regard to the degree to which they had cause their
own victimization.
a. First Generation: Early Criminologist
b. Second Generation: Theories Of Victimization
c. Third Generation
d. Moving Beyond Opportunity Theories
Theories of Victimization
• First Generation: Early Criminologist – work in victimology proposed
victim typologies based on the offender-victim dyad in a criminal act.
Common to the ideas of these early victimologists was that each
classified victim in regard to the degree to which they had cause their
own victimization.
Hans Von Hentig - a German criminologist who developed a typology of
victims based on the degree to which victims contributed to causing the
criminal act. He classified victims into 13 categories depending on their
propensity or risk for victimization. His notion that victims contributed to
their victimization through their actions and behaviors led to the
development of the concept of “Victim Blaming” and is seen by many
victim advocates as an attempt to assign equal culpability to the victim.
Benjamin Mendelsohn - an attorney, has often been referred to as the
“Father of Victimology.” he developed a six categories typology of victims
based on legal considerations of the degree of a victim’s culpability.
Benjamin E. Wolfgang – the first empirical evidence to support the notion
that victims are to some degree responsible for their own victimization was
presented by him. He analyzed Philadelphia’s Police homicide records from
1948 through 1952. he identified 3 factors common to victim-precipitated
homicide:
a)The victim and offender had some prior interpersonal relationship
b)There was a series of escalating disagreements between the parties.
c) The victim had consumed alcohol
• Stephen Schafer – classifies victims on the basis of their
“functional responsibility”
• Menachem Amir – undertook one of the first studies of
rape. He reported that 19% of all forcible rapes were
victim precipitated by such factors as te use of alcohol by
both parties; seductive actions by the victims. His work
was criticized by the victims movement and the feminist
movement as blaming the victim.
• Second Generation: Theories Of Victimization - Shifted
attention from the role of the victim toward an emphasis
on a situation approach that focuses on explaining and
testing how lifestyles and routine activities of everyday life
create opportunities for victimization.
1.Lifestyle Exposure Theory
2.Routine Activities Theory
3.Empirical Support
• Third Generation: refinement and empirical tests of opportunity
theories of victimization
Miethe and Meier developed an integrated theory of victimization,
called structural-choice theory, which attempts to explain both offender
motivation and the opportunities for victimization. This further
refinement of opportunity theories of victimization was an important
contribution to the victimology literature.
Sampson and Wooldredge, who used data from the 1982 British crime
survey (BCS. Their findings showed that individual and household
characteristics were significant predictors of victimization, as were
neighborhood-level characteristics.
• FOURTH GENERATION: Moving Beyond Opportunity
Theories - work by Schreck and his colleagues suggest that
antecedents to opportunity such as low self-control, social
bonds, and peer influences, have also been found to be
important predictors of violent and property victimization.
It is a term that describes the relationship between the victim and
the criminal.
a. Penal lover
b. Penal couple
c. Penal relationship
d. Penal exam
 BENJAMIN MENDELSOHN
Is generally credited as the initiator of the word VICTIMOLOGY as
well as the concept of PENAL COUPLE.

PENAL COUPLE – is a term that describes the relationship between

the victim and the criminal.

He also coined the term VICTIMAL to describe the victim

counterpart of criminal and the word VICTIMITY which signified the
opposite of criminality.
Another class of victim is the LOSER or one who is initially the
attacker but later, the situation is reversed. An example could be the
case of a bully who ends up injured or a swindler becomes swindled.
This model of victimization is applicable to victims of man-made
causes like homicide, rape and others.
a. VICTIM OF CRIME MODEL
b. VICTIM OF DISASTER MODEL
c. VICTIM IMPACT PANEL
d. S.A.U.C.E.R
2. VICTIM OF DISASTER MODEL (Natural Cause)
This model of victimization is applicable to victims of natural
causes like earthquake, flood, volcanic eruption and others.

The stages are as follows:

A. PRE-IMPACT STAGE – state of the victim prior to being
victimized
B. IMPACT STAGE – phase in which victimization occurs
C. POST-IMPACT STAGE – entails the degree and duration of
the personal and social disorganization following victimization
D. BEHAVIORAL OUTCOME – describes the victim’s adjustment
to the victimization experience.
 MODELS OF VICTIMIZATION
1. VICTIM OF CRIME MODEL (Man-made Cause)
This model of victimization is applicable to victims of man-made
causes like homicide, rape and others:
The stages are as follows:
A. Stage of Impact and Disorganization
This depicts the attitude or activity of the victim during and
immediately following the criminal event
B. Stage of Recoil
This stage occurs during which the victim formulates
psychological defenses and deals with conflicting emotions of guilt,
anger, acceptance, and desire of revenge
C. Reorganization Stage
This stage occurs during which the victim puts his/her life back to
 RESPONSE TO VICTIMIZATION
The contemporary study of the characteristics of crime
victims has tended to focus on identifying risk factors in order to
better understand the phenomena without attributing blame to the
victims.

Let’s look at the INDIVIDUAL FACTORS. It can be

described in terms of their socio-demographic characteristics
enumerated in the acronym S.A.U.C.E.R
 SOCIO-DEMOGRAPHIC
CHARACTERISTICS
The risk of becoming victim varies as a function of SAUCER
SEX – men have higher risk of assault than women
AGE – adolescents have substantially higher rates of assault than young
adults or older
URBAN – Crime and victimization is mostly an urban problem
CLASS – violence disproportionately affects those from lower
socioeconomic classes
ETHNICITY – Racial and ethnic minorities have higher rates of assault
than other people.
RELIGION – certain religious group tends to be regularly prosecuted and
over represented in hate crime statistics.
VICTIM IMPACT PANEL
 is a form of community-based or restorative justice in which the
crime victims meet with the defendant after conviction to tell the
convict about how the criminal activity affected them in the hope of
rehabilitation or deterrence.
 (30%) (50%) (20%)
Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
A. PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT Percentage Number of
Weight Recall information Explain, Using the Understandin hypothesizin Generating
AND ETHICAL STANDARDS Interpret, information in g, g, critiquing,
Items
and Recognizing, summarize, another familiar experimentin Designing,
and listing, describing, examine, situation Comparing, g, judging constructin
The registered criminologist can Distribution Distributio retrieving, naming, paraphrase, organizing, g, planning,
Implementing deconstructin producing,
perform the competencies under the n finding classify
carrying out, g, inventing
following sub-topics: using, executing interrogating,
20% 100
finding

2% 10

1. Understanding the philosophy of ethics,

morality, values, social norms, and standards. .40% 2 1 - - - 1 -

2. Relate and demonstrate the Professional

Regulation Commission Oath and Philippine .60% 3 - 1 2 - - -
Registered Criminologists Code of
Professional Conduct and Ethical Standards.

3. Learn and observe the Oath of Office for

Public Officers and Employees, and Code of .60% 3 - 1 1 1 - -
Conduct and Ethical Standards among
Government Officials and Employees (R.A.
1. Understanding the philosophy of
ethics, morality, values, social
norms, and standards.
Which oof the following is/are true?
Statement number 1: Ethics ordinarily suggests the study of moral
conduct or the principle underlying the desirable types of human
conduct;
Statement number 2. Morals ordinarily refers to the human conduct
itself.
Statement number 3: Ethics will guide a person’s judgment concerning
the morality of human acts
Statement number 4:, moral is the application of ethics.
a. 1 and 2 only
b. 1,2 and 3 only
c. 1,3 and 4 only
d. All of the above
Ethics
the science of the morality of human acts
the study of the human motivation and
ultimately of human rational behavior
from the Greek words:
 ethos, which means characteristic way of acting
 ethikos, which means customary (done in
particular situation)
 Derived from ethike (doctrine of morality)
From the Latin word:
 ethicus
These are actions which stand neutral in relation to the norm of
morality.
a. MORAL (GOOD) ACTIONS
b. IMMORAL (BAD) ACTIONS
c. AMORAL (INDIFFERENT) ACTIONS
d. Human acts
e. Acts of man
 Types of Act
Human Acts  Acts of Man
Deliberate  Not Deliberate
Free  No free Choice
Voluntary  Involuntary

Example:  Example:
Walking  Digestion
Talking
 Heartbeats
Eating
 Sensation
Peter was walking down the street when he heard several boys catcall a
lady who was wearing mini skirt. Peter told the group to stop what they
are doing since it was wrong. Select which best describes Peter's action.
A. Moral decision
B. Moral issue
C. Courtesy
D. Moral judgment
Which of the statement best suits on the phrase "Ignorance of the law
excuses no one"?
A. Mr. Trilly a crazy person shouting that the mall is on fire
B. Mr. Trilly skills another person just to save himself from danger
C. Mr. Trilly did not renew his driver's license while driving a vehicle
D. Mr. Trilly violated an offense because he was not informed
Invincible ignorance
Is simply ignorance that cannot be overcome by ordinary diligence
and effort or without being aware of having it
is the type which a person possesses without being aware of
it.

Example:
Two siblings of opposite sex, who got separated when they were
infants, eventually ended up marrying each other not knowing that
they were related by blood.
Vincible Ignorance
Ignorance that can be overcome with due diligence and effort on part of
the agent
Agent must be aware of his ignorance for him to dispel it

Example:
A student heard a rumor regarding a new school policy but he is unaware
whether it is true or not. This made him aware of his ignorance and with
due diligence by asking proper school authorities, he will be able to
overcome his ignorance
Affected Ignorance/ studied ignorance
A type of vincible ignorance where the agent is very much aware and fully
capable of overcoming his own ignorance without exerting much effort.
can increase culpability for a sin, especially if it displays hardness of heart,
whereby one would commit the sin irrespective of any law that might exist
concerning it. Such an attitude shows contempt for moral law and so increases
culpability
Example:
A police officer helps a murderer escape after knowing it was his brother.
What is the most supreme CORE VALUES of the Philippine National
Police?
A. Respect for sanctity of marriage
B. Respect for women
C. Respect for authority
D. Love of God
During Local and National elections, the Commission on Election
requires Ricardo "Cardo" Dalisay not to carry firearms and other form
of explosives even if he is a law enforcer unless he is on duty. If Cardo
shall be caught in the said regulation he shall be facing administrative
case. What type of duty is the above mentioned?
A. Natural duties
B. Positive duties
C. Confirmative duties
D. Negative duties
What is this ability to go on despite the tremendous adversity?
A. Endurance
B. Patience
C. Perseverance
D. Prudence
Virtue
a habit that inclines the person to act in a way that harmonizes with his nature
the habit of doing good
the opposite is vice (the habit of doing bad)
4 Cardinal Virtues
 Prudence (exercising the right decisions)
 the ability to govern and discipline oneself by means of reason and sound judgment
 the virtue that attracts the intellect to choose the most effective means for accomplishing what is morally good
and avoiding what is evil
 Temperance (resistance to temptations)
• one’s ability to moderate or avoid something
• the virtue that regulates the carnal appetite for sensual pleasures
 Fortitude (courage to pursue)
• Patience: calmness and composure in enduring situations
• Perseverance: the ability to go on despite the obstacles
• Endurance: the ability to last
 Justice (giving what is due)
• Commutative: regulates those actions that involve the rights that exist between one and another, violation of
which calls for reparation and restitution
• Distributive: regulates those actions that involve the rights that an individual may claim from society
This provides the basis for judgments about what is important for the
organization to succeed in its core business.
A. Habits
B. Customs
C. Moral values
D. Practices
Pat Kardo was conducting beat patrol when he found a bag with no
apparent owner in a sidewalk. When he opened the bag, it was full of
money. He was faced with a moral issue between appropriating the bag
or returning it to its rightful owner. This situation is called
a. Moral judgment
b. Moral dilemma
c. Moral decision
d. Moral issue
Kardo was a bus driver. As he was driving near a bridge, he noticed a
couple riding a motorbike. When he applied the brakes, it did not
respond. The only way he could avoid the couple is to ditch the vehicle
into the river which will possibly kill numerous passengers or run over
the couple. This situation which calls for choosing between, two evils is
called
a. Moral judgment
b. Moral dilemma
c. Moral decision
d. Moral issue
Maria Osaka, a fourth year criminology student was approached by the
school janitor who claimed that he has a photocopy of the final
examination. The latter offered to give her a copy in exchange for
PhP1,000. Maria Leonor declined saying that she would rather fail the
exam than cheat. She was placed in a situation and confronted by the
choice of what act to perform. This is called
a. Moral judgment
b. Moral dilemma
c. Moral decision
d. Moral issue
2. Relate and demonstrate the
Professional Regulation Commission Oath
and Philippine Registered Criminologists
Code of Professional Conduct and Ethical
Standards.
All public officers and employees of the government including every
member of the armed forces shall, before entering upon the discharge
of his duties ______
a. bear true faith and allegiance to it; obey the laws, legal orders and
decrees promulgated by the duly constituted authorities
b. Take an oath or affirmation to uphold and defend the Constitution
c. voluntarily assumes the obligation imposed by his oath of
office
d. Copies of the oath shall be deposited with the Civil Service
Commission and the National Archives.
 Executive Order No. 292
CHAPTER 10
Official Oaths
SECTION 40. Oaths of Office for Public Officers and Employees.—All
public officers and employees of the government including every member
of the armed forces shall, before entering upon the discharge of his
duties, take an oath or affirmation to uphold and defend the
Constitution; that he will bear true faith and allegiance to it; obey the
laws, legal orders and decrees promulgated by the duly constituted
authorities; will well and faithfully discharge to the best of his ability the
duties of the office or position upon which he is about to enter; and that he
voluntarily assumes the obligation imposed by his oath of office, without
mental reservation or purpose of evasion. Copies of the oath shall be
deposited with the Civil Service Commission and the National Archives.
Officers authorized to administer oaths, with the exception of
notaries public, municipal judges and clerks of court, are not
obliged to administer oaths or execute certificates save in
matters of official business.
a. notaries public
b. municipal judges
c. clerks of court
d. All of the above
 SECTION 42. Duty to Administer Oath.—

Officers authorized to administer oaths, with the

exception of notaries public, municipal judges
and clerks of court, are not obliged to administer
oaths or execute certificates save in matters of official
business; and with the exception of notaries public,
the officer performing the service in those matters
shall charge no fee, unless specifically authorized by
law.
A person who is a unique professional who can broadly practice the
works of a criminologist, function of a criminalist and the role of a
criminal justice practitioner.
A. None of these
B. Criminal Justice Practitioner
C. Criminologist
D. Criminalist
What is the primary responsibility of registered criminologist?
a. Improve their effectiveness by diligent study
b. To bear faithful allegiance to the Republic of the Philippines and be
loyal to his profession
c. To know its bounds upon him, be aware of limitations and
prescriptions and recognize the system of government
d. be just, impartial and reasonable, never according anyone more
preferential treatment than another.
 Article I
PRIMARY RESPONSIBILITY
OF REGISTERED CRIMINOLOGIST
a. The primary responsibility of every person admitted to the practice of
Criminology as a Registered Criminologist is to bear faithful allegiance to
the Republic of the Philippines and be loyal to his profession. They shall
accept as a sacred obligation and responsibility as citizens to support the
Constitution of the Philippines and as a Registered Criminologist to
defend the principles of liberty as defined in the Constitution and Laws.

b. As a Registered Criminologist, they shall strive to improve their

effectiveness by diligent study and sincere attention to improvement and
welcome the opportunity to disseminate practical and useful information
relating to matters accruing to the benefit of public safety and welfare.
 Article 2
LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY
a. The first duty of a criminologist as upholder of the law is to know its
bounds upon him, be aware of limitations and prescriptions and
recognize the system of government that gives to no man group or
institution absolute power. He must ensure that he is prime
defender of that system and as such must never pervert its
character.

b. They shall in the performance of their duty be just, impartial and

reasonable, never according anyone more preferential treatment
than another. They shall recognize the limitation of their authority
and at no time use the power of their profession for personal
advantage.
The Registered Criminologist must be mindful of his special
identification by the public as an upholder of the law. For achieve this,
what should be done?
a. He must never be lax in conduct or manner in private life, express
disrespect for the law, nor seek to gain special privilege that would
be reflective upon the profession
b. develop and maintain complete support and cooperation of the
public
c. deal with individuals of the community in a manner calculated to
instill respect for its laws and their profession.
d. encouraging complete cooperation of members for their mutual
benefit.
 Article 2
LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY
a. The first duty of a criminologist as upholder of the law is to know its
bounds upon him, be aware of limitations and prescriptions and
recognize the system of government that gives to no man group or
institution absolute power. He must ensure that he is prime
defender of that system and as such must never pervert its
character.

b. They shall in the performance of their duty be just, impartial and

reasonable, never according anyone more preferential treatment
than another. They shall recognize the limitation of their authority
and at no time use the power of their profession for personal
advantage.
 Article 3
PRIVATE CONDUCT
a. The Registered Criminologist must be mindful of his special identification
by the public as an upholder of the law. He must never be lax in conduct
or manner in private life, express disrespect for the law, nor seek to gain
special privilege that would be reflective upon the profession. He must so
conduct his private life that the public will regard him as an example of
stability fidelity and morality.
b. He must strive to elevate the standing of the profession in the public
mind, strengthen public confidence in law enforcement, develop and
maintain complete support and cooperation of the public and insure the
effectiveness by encouraging complete cooperation of members for their
mutual benefit.
3. Learn and observe the Oath of
Office for Public Officers and
Employees, and Code of Conduct and
Ethical Standards among Government
Officials and Employees (R.A. 6713).
Which of the following means service, refers to the commitment,
dignity and attitude of an individual towards work and his integrity and
practice of the core moral value principles?
A. Competence
B. Efficiency
C. Professionalism
D. Integrity
SEC 4, RA 6713: Norms of Conduct of
Public Officials and Employees
Commitment to public interest
 Public officials and employees shall always uphold the public interest over and above personal interest..
Professionalism
 Public officials and employees shall perform and discharge their duties with the highest degree of
excellence, professionalism, intelligence and skill.
 They shall enter public service with utmost devotion and dedication to duty.
 They shall endeavor to discourage wrong perceptions of their roles as dispensers or peddlers of undue
patronage.
 Justness and sincerity
 Public officials and employees shall remain true to the people at all times.
 They must act with justness and sincerity and shall not discriminate against anyone, especially the poor
and the underprivileged.
 They shall at all times respect the rights of others, and shall refrain from doing acts contrary to law,
good morals, good customs, public policy, public order, public safety and public interest.
 They shall not dispense or extend undue favors on account of their office to their relatives whether by
consanguinity or affinity except with respect to appointments of such relatives to positions considered
strictly confidential or as members of their personal staff whose terms are coterminous with theirs.
PNP Ethical Standards
Integrity
PNP members shall not allow themselves to be victims of corruption and
dishonest practices in accordance with the provisions of RA 6713 and other
applicable laws.
Justice
PNP members shall strive constantly to respect the rights of others so that
they can fulfill their duties and exercise their rights as human beings, parents,
children, citizens, workers, leaders, or in other capacities and to see to it that
others do likewise
Humility
PNP members shall recognize the fact that they are public servants and not
the masters of the people and towards this end, they should perform their
duties without attracting attention or expecting the applause of others.
Which core values of the BJMP concern on the strong sense of
dedication to the ideals of the organization and to the public that is
serve?
A. Commitment
B. Cooperation
C. Competence
D. Teamwork
SEC 4, RA 6713: Norms of Conduct of
Public Officials and Employees
Commitment to public interest
 Public officials and employees shall always uphold the public interest over and above personal interest..
Professionalism
 Public officials and employees shall perform and discharge their duties with the highest degree of
excellence, professionalism, intelligence and skill.
 They shall enter public service with utmost devotion and dedication to duty.
 They shall endeavor to discourage wrong perceptions of their roles as dispensers or peddlers of undue
patronage.
 Justness and sincerity
 Public officials and employees shall remain true to the people at all times.
 They must act with justness and sincerity and shall not discriminate against anyone, especially the poor
and the underprivileged.
 They shall at all times respect the rights of others, and shall refrain from doing acts contrary to law,
good morals, good customs, public policy, public order, public safety and public interest.
 They shall not dispense or extend undue favors on account of their office to their relatives whether by
consanguinity or affinity except with respect to appointments of such relatives to positions considered
strictly confidential or as members of their personal staff whose terms are coterminous with theirs.
SEC 4, RA 6713: Norms of Conduct
of Public Officials and Employees
Commitment to democracy
Public officials and employees shall commit themselves to the democratic
way of life and values, maintain the principle of public accountability, and
manifest by deeds the supremacy of civilian authority over the military.
 They shall at all times uphold the Constitution and put loyalty to country
above loyalty to persons or party.
Simple living
Public officials and employees and their families shall lead modest lives
appropriate to their positions and income.
They shall not indulge in extravagant or ostentatious display of wealth in
any form.
Which of the following is the key to professionalism, and its improper
implementation will greatly prejudice the personnel professionalization
process as regard to procurement , promotion, assignment, placement,
and training awards and retirement?
A. Police professionalism
B. Police management
C. Career management
D. Management ethics
PNP Basic Issues
PNP Image
The image of any organization affects the esprit de’ corps, morale
and welfare of members and sense of pride to the organization.
In view thereof, all members of the PNP conduct themselves in a
manner that would not place the PNP in bad light.
Career Management
the key to professionalism
 its improper implementation will greatly prejudice the
personnel professionalization process as regards
procurement, promotion, assignment, placement, training,
awards, and retirement

Public officials and employees shall provide service to everyone without
unfair discrimination and regardless of party affiliation or preference.
A. Police neutrality
B. Political neutrality
C. Professionalism
D. Commitment to public interest
What social norm provides direction for people in their dealings with
one another, as a standard against which actions are evaluated, and as
a prescription or requirement that people act justly?
A. Justice
B. Conduct
C. Ethics
D. Commandment
PNP Ethical Standards
Integrity
PNP members shall not allow themselves to be victims of corruption and
dishonest practices in accordance with the provisions of RA 6713 and other
applicable laws.
Justice
PNP members shall strive constantly to respect the rights of others so that
they can fulfill their duties and exercise their rights as human beings, parents,
children, citizens, workers, leaders, or in other capacities and to see to it that
others do likewise
Humility
PNP members shall recognize the fact that they are public servants and not
the masters of the people and towards this end, they should perform their
duties without attracting attention or expecting the applause of others.
An old woman approached PO2 Cardo Dalisay asking the police officer
to run after an unidentified young man who allegedly snatched her
mobile phone. PO2 Cardo Dalisay declined claiming that the man was
already a block away from them and besides the police officer alleged
that he is rushing home for an urgent matter at home. The officer's
refusal to help the old woman is an example of?
A. Neglect of duty
B. Malfeasance
C. Misconduct
D. Misfeasance
Primary attribute for effective leadership.
a. Be a born leader
b. Have acquired the techniques of handling men
c. Have enough experience and training
d. Have normal intelligence and sincere desire to serve
4. Familiarize and demonstrate the
Law Enforcement Code of
Professional Conduct and Ethical
Standards.
Napolcom Resolution No. 92-4
resolution issued by the NAPOLCOM approving
the draft of the Philippine National Police Code
of Professional Conduct and Ethical Standards
by the PNP
approved on March 12 1992
Which explains the concept of the Performance Evaluation System in
the police force?
A. Foster the improvement of individual efficiency as well as the
promotion of organizational effectiveness
B. Overhaul the organizational structure and implement measures
which promote gender sensitivity
C. Ensure fairness and objective rating during promotions
D. Ensure the just and equitable payment of Performance Based Bonus
PURPOSES OF THE CODE
To foster individual efficiency, behavioral discipline and
organizational effectiveness, as well as respect for constitutional
and human rights of citizens, democratic principles and ideals
and the supremacy of civilian authority over the military;
To set the moral tone and norms of professional conduct in the
police service;
To provide moral and ethical guidance to all PNP members; and
To enlighten members of the police service of what behavior is
really acceptable – to define what is permitted and what is
prohibited.
Which of the following exemplifies the core value of Makatao?
A. PNP members and their family members shall be actively involved
in religious, social and civic activities
B. PNP members shall not inflict, instigate or tolerate any act which
will violate human rights
C. PNP members shall not avoid attendance to seminars or lectures on
human rights
D. PNP members shall perform their duties with dedication and
efficiency
Police Professional Conduct
Respect for Human Rights
In the performance of duty, PNP members shall respect and protect human
dignity and uphold the human rights of all persons.
No member shall inflict, instigate or tolerate extra-judicial killings, arbitrary
arrests, any act of torture or other cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or
punishment and shall not invoke superior orders or exceptional circumstances
such as a state –of-war, a threat to national security, internal political
instability or any public emergency as a justification for committing such
human rights violations.
Devotion to Duty
PNP members shall perform their duties with dedication thoroughness,
efficiency enthusiasm, determination, and manifest concern for public welfare,
and shall refrain from engaging in any activity which shall be conflict with
their duties as public servants.
11 Canons of Police Ethics
Primordial Police Responsibility
 the primary responsibility of the police is crime prevention
Limitation of Police Authority
 laws set limits to the power of the police
 police officers are not exempted from obeying the laws they are enforcing
Knowledge of the Law and other Responsibilities
 police officers are expected to know and understand the laws they are enforcing
 police officers must fully understand their duties and responsibilities as police officers
 police officers must know and fully understand the relationship of the PNP organization with other law
enforcement agencies and other government agencies
Use of Proper Means to Obtain Proper Ends
 police officers must only employ legal methods in the conduct of their work
Cooperation with Public Officials
 police officers must cooperate with other public officials and government agencies
11 Canons of Police Ethics
Proper Conduct and Behavior
police officers must always observe proper conduct and behavior both in their personal and
official life
Conduct towards the Community
police officers must never forget that they are public servants
Conduct in Arresting Law Violators
police officers must always adhere to the prescribed rules when effecting arrests of suspects
Firmness in Refusing Gifts
police officers must never ask for nor accept gifts or special favors
Impartial Presentation of Evidence
police officers must be fair in presenting evidence
Attitude towards Police Profession
police officers must have a high regard for the police profession and must be proud that
they are police officers
police officers must strive to improve their knowledge and skills in order be the best police
officers that they can be
Which is not an interpretation of the purpose of the formulation of the
PNP core values based on PNP Manual?
A. Provides guidance towards the internalizations of moral values and
service dedication
B. Provides guidelines for the placement and promotions of PNP
personnel
C. Serve as an effective instrument in the moral values internalization
in the PNP
D. Gives moral and ethical guidance to all PNP members
PURPOSES OF THE CODE
To foster individual efficiency, behavioral discipline and
organizational effectiveness, as well as respect for constitutional
and human rights of citizens, democratic principles and ideals
and the supremacy of civilian authority over the military;
To set the moral tone and norms of professional conduct in the
police service;
To provide moral and ethical guidance to all PNP members; and
To enlighten members of the police service of what behavior is
really acceptable – to define what is permitted and what is
prohibited.
Legal Basis for Police Ethics
Section 37, RA 6975
. Performance Evaluation System. – There shall be established a
performance evaluation system which shall be administered in accordance
with the rules, regulations and standards, and a code of conduct
promulgated by the Commission for members of the PNP. Such
performance evaluation system be administered in such a way as to foster
the improvement of individual efficiency and behavioral discipline as well
as the promotion of organizational effectiveness and respect for the
constitutional and human rights of citizens, democratic principles and
ideals and the supremacy of civilian authority over the military.
The rating system as contemplated herein shall be based on standards
prescribed by the Commission and shall consider results of annual physical,
psychological and neuropsychiatric examinations conducted on the PNP
officer or member concerned
Which PNP ethical standard mandates that PNP members are public
servant and not the masters of the people and they shall perform their
duties without arrogance?
A. Obedience
B. Discipline
C. Courtesy
D. Humility
Police Professional Conduct
Obedience to Superiors
PNP members shall obey lawful orders of and be courteous to superior
officers and other appropriate authorities within the chain of command.
They shall readily accept whenever they are assigned anywhere in the
country. Therefore, it is taboo for any personnel to petition in court or in any
public forum his assignment
Command Responsibility
In accordance with the Doctrine on Command Responsibility, immediate
Commanders/ Directors shall be responsible for the effective supervision,
control and direction of their personnel and shall see to it that all government
resources shall be managed, expended or utilized in accordance with laws and
regulations and safeguard against losses thru illegal or improper disposition.
Police Traditions
Spiritual Beliefs
 PNP members are traditionally religious and God-loving person. They attend religious services
together with the members of their family.
Valor
 History attests that the Filipino law enforcers have exemplified the tradition of valor in defending the
country from aggression and oppression and protecting/preserving the life and property of the
people. They sacrificed their limbs and lives for the sake of their countrymen whom they have
pledged to serve.
Patriotism
 The PNP members are traditionally patriotic by nature. They manifest their love of country with a
pledge of allegiance to the flag and a vow to defend the constitution.
Discipline
 The discipline of the PNP members is manifested by instinctive obedience to lawful orders and
thorough and spontaneous actions towards attainment of organizational objectives guided by moral,
ethical and legal norms
Sec 2, Chapter 4: PNP Ethical Doctrine
Manual
Customs
 Established usage or social practices carried on by tradition that
have obtained the force of law.
Traditions
 Bodies of beliefs, stories, customs and usages handed down from
generation to generation with the effect of an unwritten law.
 Courtesy
 A manifestation of expression of consideration and respect for
others.
 Ceremony
 A formal act or set of formal acts established by customs or
authority as proper to special occasion.
Social Decorum
 A set of norms and standards practiced by members during social
activities and other functions.
Which of the following choices exemplifies that PNP members shall
provide services to everyone without discrimination regardless of party
affiliation?
A. Non-partisanship
B. Non-solicitation of political patronage
C. Devotion to duty
D. Secrecy discipline
Police Professional Conduct
Respect for Human Rights
In the performance of duty, PNP members shall respect and protect human
dignity and uphold the human rights of all persons.
No member shall inflict, instigate or tolerate extra-judicial killings, arbitrary
arrests, any act of torture or other cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or
punishment and shall not invoke superior orders or exceptional circumstances
such as a state –of-war, a threat to national security, internal political
instability or any public emergency as a justification for committing such
human rights violations.
Devotion to Duty
PNP members shall perform their duties with dedication thoroughness,
efficiency enthusiasm, determination, and manifest concern for public welfare,
and shall refrain from engaging in any activity which shall be conflict with
their duties as public servants.
PNP Basic Issues

 Political Patronage
PNP members shall inhibit themselves from soliciting
political patronage on matters pertaining to assignment,
award,, training and promotion

 Setting Example
All PNP members shall set good example to their
subordinates and follow good example from the superiors.
Identify the basic mission of the police.
A. Public approval
B. Cooperation from the public
C. Respect for the police
D. Crime prevention
11 Canons of Police Ethics
Primordial Police Responsibility
 the primary responsibility of the police is crime prevention
Limitation of Police Authority
 laws set limits to the power of the police
 police officers are not exempted from obeying the laws they are enforcing
Knowledge of the Law and other Responsibilities
 police officers are expected to know and understand the laws they are enforcing
 police officers must fully understand their duties and responsibilities as police officers
 police officers must know and fully understand the relationship of the PNP organization with other law
enforcement agencies and other government agencies
Use of Proper Means to Obtain Proper Ends
 police officers must only employ legal methods in the conduct of their work
Cooperation with Public Officials
 police officers must cooperate with other public officials and government agencies
The PICE program is intended to enhance police skills and to promote
work ethics. The acronym P.I.C.E stands for?
A. Police Investigations Corrections Education
B. Police Information and Continuing Education
C. People's Initiative for Corrective Education
D. Police Investigation and Correctional Engagement
Patrolman Kardo hosted a birthday party in a hotel which provided him
with one free room. When he was in the room, he found out that he
lost several pieces of jewelry and cash. Suspecting that the program
coordinator is the perpetrator, Patrolman Kardo frisked him in front of
the guests. Which is the basis of the civil liability of Patrolman Kardo, if
any?
A. Abuse of a right
B. Doctrine of self help
C. Doctrine of vicarious liability
D. Performance of duty
Self-help, in the sense of a legal doctrine, refers to individuals'
implementation of their rights without resorting to legal writ or
consultation of higher authority, as where a financial institution repossesses
a car on which they hold both the title and a defaulted note. Individuals
resort to self-help when they retrieve property found under the
unauthorized control of another person, or simply abate nuisances (as by
using sandbags and ditches to protect land from being flooded).
Vicarious liability exists due to the legal doctrine of respondent superior,
which essentially means let the master answer. Employers, parents or
others with a superior legal relationship to someone who does harm are
expected to answer for those who are under their control.
The PNP is characterized as an agency which is civilian in character and
national in scope. What is the source of this provision?
A. RA 8551
B. 1987 Constitution Section 6 Article XVI
C. 1987 Constitution Section 16 Article VI
D. RA 6975
SPO2 Jack Chan, an active member of PNP General Santos City,
conhabited with Mrs. Ashley Conrado knowing her to be legally
married. What virtu as PNP member SPO2 Chan did not passess?
A. Integrity
B. Honor
C. Charity
D. Valor
Police Traditions
Spiritual Beliefs
 PNP members are traditionally religious and God-loving person. They attend religious services
together with the members of their family.
Valor
 History attests that the Filipino law enforcers have exemplified the tradition of valor in defending the
country from aggression and oppression and protecting/preserving the life and property of the
people. They sacrificed their limbs and lives for the sake of their countrymen whom they have
pledged to serve.
Patriotism
 The PNP members are traditionally patriotic by nature. They manifest their love of country with a
pledge of allegiance to the flag and a vow to defend the constitution.
Discipline
 The discipline of the PNP members is manifested by instinctive obedience to lawful orders and
thorough and spontaneous actions towards attainment of organizational objectives guided by moral,
ethical and legal norms
Police officer Cardo Dalisay is assign in one of the street in Pasay to
patrol and he do his daily routine as a police officer, upon patrolling
police officer Cardo see a suspicious person who wants to go inside a
store that night. What will be the response or action of Ricardo Dalisay?
A. He will shoot immediately the person to prevent him from
committing a crime
B. He will arrest the person in a clandestine manner and extract
confession
C. He will ignore the person and continue his daily routine
D. Ricardo Dalisay use his wise own judgment
Important Terms
NON-FEASANCE/NEGLECT OF DUTY
 the failure to perform an act or duty that is part of one’s obligation without sufficient excuse
MALFEASANCE/MISCONDUCT
 the commission of an act that one is prohibited to do
MISFEASANCE/IRREGULARITIES IN THE PERFORMANCE OF DUTY
 the improper or incorrect performance of an act that should be done or performed
INCOMPETENCY
 lack of adequate ability and fitness for the satisfactory performance of police duties; could be due to
physical or intellectual limitations or lack of skill
DISLOYALTY TO THE GOVERNMENT
 abandonment or renunciation of one’s loyalty to the government of the Philippines
 advocating to overthrow the present administration
POLICE DISCRETION
 the act or the liberty to decide according to the principles of justice and the police officer’s ideas of
what is right and proper under the circumstances
MOONLIGHTING
The PNP shall endeavor to promote a lifestyle for every member of the
organization that is ____ in the eyes of the public.
A. Respectable and adorable
B. Disciplined and professional
C. credible and respectable
D. Efficient and competent
PNP Basic Issues
Delicadeza
in consonance with the requirements of honor and integrity in the PNP,
all members must have the moral courage to sacrifice self-interest in
keeping with the time-honored principle of delicadeza.
 Police Lifestyle
The PNP shall promote and maintain a lifestyle for its members which
the public will find credible and respectable.
The public expects a police officer to live a simple and dignified life.
They must be free from greed corruption and exploitation.
Which of the following refers to the state of affairs requiring tact to
protect the integrity of a person?
A. Dedication
B. Word of honor
C. Delicadeza
D. Trustworthiness
Police Traditions
Gentlemanliness
PNP members are upright in character, gentle in manners, dignified in appearance, and sincere
in their concern to fellowmen.
 Word of Honor
 PNP members’ word is their bond. They stand by and commit to uphold it.
Duty
PNP members have historically exemplified themselves as dedicated public servants who
perform their tasks with a deep sense of responsibility and self-sacrifice. They shall readily
accept assignment anywhere in the country.
Loyalty
PNP members are traditionally loyal to the organization, country and people as borne by
history and practice.
Camaraderie
The binding spirit that enhances teamwork and cooperation in the police organization,
extending to the people they serve., in manifested by the PNP members’ deep commitment
PNP Basic Issues
Delicadeza
in consonance with the requirements of honor and integrity in the PNP,
all members must have the moral courage to sacrifice self-interest in
keeping with the time-honored principle of delicadeza.
 Police Lifestyle
The PNP shall promote and maintain a lifestyle for its members which
the public will find credible and respectable.
The public expects a police officer to live a simple and dignified life.
They must be free from greed corruption and exploitation.
Which of the following doctrine states that immediate commanders
shall be responsible for supervision the effective supervision and
control of their personnel?
A. Chain of command
B. Span of control
C. Command responsibility
D. Leadership
PNP members shall perform their duties with dedication, thoroughness,
efficiency, enthusiasm, determination and manifest concern for public
welfare is called ____.
A. Loyalty
B. Perseverance
C. Devotion of duty
D. Morality
Police Professional Conduct
Conservation of Natural Resources
PNP members shall help in the development and conservation of
our natural resources for ecological balance and posterity as
these are the inalienable heritage of our people
Discipline
PNP members shall conduct themselves properly at all times in
keeping with the rules and regulations of the organization
Loyalty
PNP members shall be loyal to the Constitution and the police
service as manifested by their loyalty to their superiors peers
and subordinates as well
When these public officials and employees remains true to the people
at all times, what norm of conduct they are emphasizing?
A. Professionalism
B. Responsiveness to the public
C. Commitment to public interest
D. Justness and sincerity
Professionalism
Public officials and employees shall perform and discharge their
duties with the highest degree of excellence, professionalism,
intelligence and skill.
They shall enter public service with utmost devotion and
dedication to duty.
They shall endeavor to discourage wrong perceptions of their
roles as dispensers or peddlers of undue patronage.
Commitment to public interest
Public officials and employees shall always uphold the public interest over
and above personal interest..
• Responsiveness to the public
• Public officials and employees shall extend prompt, courteous, and adequate
service to the public.
• Unless otherwise provided by law or when required by the public interest,
public officials and employees shall provide information of their policies and
procedures in clear and understandable language, ensure openness of
information, public consultations and hearings whenever appropriate,
encourage suggestions, simplify and systematize policy, rules and procedures,
avoid red tape and develop an understanding and appreciation of the socio-
economic conditions prevailing in the country, especially in the depressed
rural and urban areas.
What is being emphasized under the new rule during the conduct of
anti-illegal drugs operation?
A. All cops to wear body cameras in operation
B. Respect for human rights shall always be strictly observed at all
times
C. Implement the one strike policy in addressing the problem
D. Police to focus on high value targets
The unnecessary and unreasonable use of force in effecting arrest or
abuse in the manner of conducting search and seizure.
A. Disloyalty
B. dishonesty
C. Incompetency
D. Oppression
DISHONESTY
Concealment or distortion of truth in a matter of fact relevant of
one’s office or connected with the performance of his duties.
VIOLATION OF LAW
Presupposes conviction in court of any offense penalized under
Revised Penal Code or any Special Ordinances
OPPRESSION
Act of cruelty, severity, unlawful execution, domination, or excessive
use of authority.
Exercise of unlawful powers or others means, in depriving an
individual of his liberty or property against his will
What does it presents if Patrolman Kardo and his immediate family
members were actively involved in the religious, social and civic
activities which somehow enhance the image of the Police Organization
even without affecting Patrolman Kardo official duties?
A. Non-partisanship
B. Physical Fitness
C. Table manners
D. Social awareness
The PNP members shall actively involved in all civic, religious and other
social activities with the end purpose of increasing ____ awareness.
A. Business
B. Camaraderie
C. Religious
D. Social
It was observed by the public through media and news print outs that
Police Chief Dalisay was exercising proper legitimate use of authority in
the performance of his duty to avoid critiques from the oppositions,
Police Chief Dalisay is performing what ethical standard?
A. Police discretion
B. Public service
C. Justice
D. Judicious use of authority
P/Supt. Kardo Dalitay went to Criminal Justice College and punched
Prof. Prof. Tango Ol in the stomach after berating the professor for
scolding the police official's son who is a Criminology student. P/Supt.
Dela Cruz's act should be condemned because it is an act
A. Of irregularity in the performance of duty
B. Of malfeasance
C. Of misconduct
D. Of incompetence
5. Understand and correlate human
and public relations.
What is this regular program of the PNP designed to harmonized and
extend support between police and community?
A. Psychology
B. Public information
C. Civil information
D. Public relation
Terms Related to Community Relations
• Police Community Relations
• the sum total of the dealings between the police and the people it serves, and whose goodwill and
cooperation it craves, for the greatest possible efficiency in the service
• refers to the reciprocal attitudes of the police and the community
• Public Relations
• the act of bringing about better understanding, confidence and acceptance for an individual or an
organization
• Police Public Relations
• the continuing process by which endeavors are made to obtain the goodwill and cooperation of the
public for effective enforcement of the law and accomplishment of the police purposes
• Human Relations
• consist of the fundamental rules both moral and legal, which govern the relationship of men in all
aspects of life
• Most important element in community relations
Which statement refers to a conduct that a public servant, especially
members of the uniformed services, must strictly observe social
decorum?
A. A formal act or set of formal acts established by customs or
authority as proper to special occasion
B. A set of norms and standards practiced by members during social
and other functions
C. Bodies of unwritten beliefs, stories, customs and usages handed
down from generation to generation
D. A manifestation or expression of consideration and respect to
others
Choose the level of care that is required of PNP members to exercise in
the protection and care of public property like a " good father of the
family".
A. Degree of diligence exercised by regulatory institutions
B. Degree of diligence exercised by banks and financial institutions
C. Duty of extraordinary care, vigilance and precaution
D. Reasonable care required of an ordinarily prudent person
Police Professional Conduct
Non- Solicitation of Patronage
 PNP members shall seek self-improvement through career development and shall not
directly or indirectly solicit influence or recommendation from politicians, high ranking
government officials prominent citizens, persons affiliated with civic or religious
organizations with regards to their assignments, promotions, transfer or those of other
members of the force, nor shall they initiate any petition to be prepared and presented by
citizens in their behalf.
• Moreover, they shall advise their immediate relatives not to interfere in the activities of
the police service particularly in the assignment and reassignment of personnel
Proper Care and Use of Public Property
 PNP members shall promote and maintain sense of responsibility in the protection, proper
care and judicious disposition and use of public property issued for their official use or
entrusted to their care and custody just like “ a good father of their family”.
 When the Commander/Director is relieved from his post, all properties/equipment
belonging to the government must be turned-over to the incoming. A committee for the
purpose shall be proper. Hence, it is a taboo for outgoing Commander/Director to detach,
remove and bring home or to his new assignment properties which do not personally belong
to him.
Which of the following is not a principle of police community relation?
A. Public support must be maintained
B. Public resentment must be encouraged
C. Public goodwill must be developed
D. Keep the public informed
Police Community Relations
4 RINCIPLES OF POLICE-COMMUNITY RELATIONS
Community support must be maintained.
 Every police shall be worthy of high public trust by doing his job and leaving nothing undone
 He shall make himself available and be willing to serve everyone
Community resentment must be avoided.
 Every police officer shall have in mind the interest of the public
 He shall develop friendly relations by his good conduct
 He shall avoid by any occasion to humiliate, embarrass, annoy or inconvenience anyone
Community goodwill must be developed.
 Police officer should be courteous, fair, and quick to assist individuals in the solution of their
problems
Community must be kept informed
 The people should inform the community of the regulations and policies of the police force
and the reasons of their adoption
Design to bridge any communication between the police and people
a. Public information program
b. Civic action program
c. Mass communication program
d. Public relations program
• Civic Action Program - designed to maintain and encourage
community development
• Public Relations Program - designed to maintain harmony and
mutual support between the police and the community; designed to
“sell” the police to the public
• Mass communication program - Designed to influence public opinion
in favor of the police force.
MEDIA/MASS MEDIA - the channels through which information is disseminated
to the public may be in the form of television, movies, radio or newspaper, and
the like
PROPAGANDA - the planned use of mass communication for public purpose
It is an influencing action through information which has a value or relevance to
needs that motivates target audience
• POLICE PUBLIC IMAGE - refers to how the people in the community
perceive or regard the police
Designed to influence public opinion in favor of the police force.
a. Public information program
b. Civic action program
c. Mass communication program
d. Public relations program
Consist of moral and legal precepts which govern the relationship of
man in all aspects of life.
a. Public relations
b. Human relations
c. Police community relations
d. Civic action program
Terms Related to Community Relations
• Police Community Relations
• the sum total of the dealings between the police and the people it serves, and whose goodwill and
cooperation it craves, for the greatest possible efficiency in the service
• refers to the reciprocal attitudes of the police and the community
• Public Relations
• the act of bringing about better understanding, confidence and acceptance for an individual or an
organization
• Police Public Relations
• the continuing process by which endeavors are made to obtain the goodwill and cooperation of the
public for effective enforcement of the law and accomplishment of the police purposes
• Human Relations
• consist of the fundamental rules both moral and legal, which govern the relationship of men in all
aspects of life
• Most important element in community relations
The most important medium to determine public attitudes between
the police and the public attitude is the:
a. Radio and television
b. Print mass media
c. Individual policeman
d. Police public relation officer
 (30%) (50%) (20%)
Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Percentage Number of
A. JUVENILE DELINQUENCY AND Weight Items Recall information Explain, Interpret, Using the Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
JUVENILE JUSTICE summarize, information in critiquing,
and and Recognizing, examine another familiar Comparing, experimenting, Designing,
Distribution listing, describing, paraphrase, situation organizing, judging constructing,
Distribution deconstructing, planning,
classify
The registered criminologist can retrieving, naming, Implementing interrogating, producing,
finding
perform the competencies under the 20% 100 carrying out, finding inventing
using, executing
following sub-topics:

3% 15

1. Define and distinguish the nature,

.60% 3 2 - 1 - - -
extent, and theories of juvenile
delinquency.
2. Identify and explain the factors
.60% 3 - 1 1 1 1 -
and causes of juvenile delinquency.
3. Define and enumerate parental rights,
responsibility, and disciplinary authority over their .40% 2 - 1 1 - - -
children.
4. Distinguish and explain the Rights, Welfare,
and Protection of Children under applicable laws. .40% 2 - 1 1 - -

5. Enumerate and identify Juvenile

Delinquency Prevention Programs. .20% 1 - - 1 - - -

6. Identify and compare Models of

1. Define and distinguish the nature,
extent, and theories of juvenile
delinquency.
Which of the following is the universal or generic term used for
youthful offender?
A. Child at risk
B. Juvenile delinquent
C. Minor offender
D. Child in conflict with the law
Jose is a student of one university, one time, the University
Administrator saw him smoking inside the campus, while the
Administrator telling him not to do so because it is in violation to
University's regulation, Jose violently uttered bad words and resent the
Administrator. In what type of delinquent youth Jose belong?
A. Neurotic
B. Asocial
C. Social
D. Accidental
 TYPES OF DELINQUENT YOUTH
1. SOCIAL - an aggressive youth who resents authority of anyone
who makes an effort to control his behavior
2. ASOCIAL - one whose delinquent acts have a cold, brutal and
vicious quality for which the youth feels no remorse
3. NEUROTIC - one who has internalized his conflicts and is
preoccupied with his own feelings
4. ACCIDENTAL - one who is essentially sociable and law abiding but
happens to be at the wrong time and place and becomes involved in
delinquent acts not typical of his general behavior
Petra Mercado is a kind of hunchback girl, every time she will go out
with her friends; she always felt that she is a normal person because
her friends make her feel it. What approach towards delinquency is
this?
A. Neurogenic
B. Sociogenic
C. Biogenic
D. Psychogenic
 GENERAL APPROACHES IN THE STUDY OF
DELINQUENCY
1. BIOGENIC APPROACH - gives an explanation that law violations
and delinquency are a result of some physical defects
2. PSYCHOGENIC APPROACH - argues that the critical factors in
delinquency are personality problems to which misbehavior is
presumed to be the response
3. SOCIOGENIC APPROACH - attributes delinquency pattern to
social structures; views youthful misdeed as a result of a learning
process through interactions with other members of society
What do you call a child who is vulnerable to and at the risk of
committing criminal offenses because of personal, family and social
circumstances?
A. Child in conflict with the law
B. Youthful offender
C. Child in conflict with the law enforcer
D. Child at risk
The study on the nature of human being concerning his physical
needs in order to satisfy his ants. It explains that the deprivation
of the physical body on the basic needs is an important
determiner of the commission of crime or delinquency
a. ANTHROPOLOGICAL APPROACH
b. MEDICAL APPROACH
c. BIOLOGICAL APPROACH
d. PHYSIOLOGICAL APPROACH
 SUBJECTIVE APPROACHES
It deals mainly on the biological explanation of crimes, focused
on the forms of abnormalities that exist in the individual criminal
before, during and after the commission of the crime (tradio, 1999).
Included under this approach are:
1. ANTHROPOLOGICAL APPROACH – the study on the physical
characteristics of an individual offender with non offenders in the
attempt to discover differences covering criminal behavior (hooton).
2. MEDICAL APPROACH - the application of medical examinations on
the individual criminal explain the mental and physical condition of the
individual prior and after the commission of the crime (positivist).
3. BIOLOGICAL APPROACH –the evaluation of genetic influences to
criminal behavior. It is noted that heredity is one force pushing the
criminal to crime (positivist).
4. PHYSIOLOGICAL APPROACH – the study on the nature of human
being concerning his physical needs in order to satisfy his ants. It
explains that the deprivation of the physical body on the basic needs is
an important determiner of the commission if crime (Maslow).
5. PSYCHOLOGICAL APPROACH – it is concerned about the
deprivation of the psychological needs of man, which constitute
the development of deviations of normal behavior resulting to
unpleasant emotions (freud, maslow).
6. PSYCHIATRIC APPROACH – the explanation of crime
through diagnosis of mental diseases as a cause of the criminal
behavior (positivist).
7. PSYCHOANALYTICAL APPROACH – the explanation of
crimes based on the freudian theory, which traces behavior as
the deviation of the repression of the basic drives (freud).
These approaches deal on the study of groups, social
processes and institutions as influences to behavior. They are
primarily derived from social sciences.
a. subjective approach,
b. objective approach and
c. The contemporary approach.
d. Nota
 OBJECTIVE APPROACHES
The objective approaches deal on the study of groups, social
processes and institutions as influences to behavior. They are primarily
derived from social sciences (tradio, 1999). Under this are:
1. GEOGRAPHIC APPROACH – this approach considers topography,
natural resources, geographical location, and climate lead an individual
to commit crime (quetelet).

2. ECOLOGICAL APPROACH – it is concerned with the biotic

grouping of men resulting to migration, competition, social
discrimination, division of labor and social conflict as factors of crime
(park).
3. ECONOMIC APPROACH – it deals with the explanation of
crime concerning financial security of inadequacy and other
necessities to support life as factors to criminality (Merton).

4. SOCIO – CULTURAL APPROACH – those that focus on

institutions, economic, financial, education, political, and religious
influences to crime (Cohen).
This approach is focused on the psychoanalytical, psychiatric
and sociological explanations of crime in an integrated theory.
a. subjective approach,
b. objective approach and
c. The contemporary approach.
d. Nota
2. Identify and explain the factors and
causes of juvenile delinquency.
These are conditions and elements which provoke crimes such
as personal problems, curiosity, ignorance, necessities,
diseases, traumatic experiences and the like.
a. PREDISPOSING FACTORS
b. PRECIPITATING FACTORS
c. Family factors
d. School
CAUSES OF BEHAVIORAL DISORDERS

1. PREDISPOSING FACTORS - internal propensities which may

not be considered as criminal unless the attempt was made.

2. PRECIPITATING FACTORS - conditions and elements which

provoke crimes such as personal problems, curiosity, ignorance,
necessities, diseases, traumatic experiences and the like.
This is the institution necessary in transforming the unrefined mind of
child. They used instruments to achieve goals and objectives in the
development of child?
A. Church
B. Family
C. DSWD
D. School
When it comes to rules, they believe “it’s their way or the highway.”
a. Indulgent parents
b. Authoritarian parents
c. Authoritative parents
d. Indifferent parents
Types of Parenting Style
1. Authoritarians or Disciplinarians
Less warmth and nurturing, high expectations but low
responsiveness and mistakes are punished harshly and expect
blind obedience. A child tends to have lower academic
performance, low self-esteem, poorer social skills, mental
illness, drug and alcohol abuse and delinquency.
They believe kids should be seen and not heard.
When it comes to rules, they believe “it’s their way or the
highway.”
They don’t take their child’s feelings into consideration.
The focus is on obedience and punishment over discipline
2. Authoritative
Warm and responsive, clear rules, high expectations, supportive
and value independence. Children tends to have higher academic
performance, more self-esteem, better social skills, less mental illness
and lower delinquency
They put a lot of efforts into creating and maintaining a positive
relationship with their child.
They explain the reasons behind their rules.
They enforce rules and give consequences but they take their
child's feelings into consideration
they create positive relationship and enforce rules.
3. Permissive or Indulgent
Warm and responsive, few or no rules, indulgent, lenient.
Children may be having impulsive behavior, egocentric, poorer
social skills and problematic relationship.
They set rules but rarely enforce them.
They don't give out consequences very often.
They think their child will learn best with little interference from
them.
They don’t enforce rules. Kids will be kids.
FAMILY IMMUNITY DOCTRINE
- Legal doctrine preventing unemancipated children from suing their parents.
FAMILY PURPOSE DOCTRINE
- Legal doctrine holding parents liable for injuries caused by a child's negligent
driving or other actions.
FOSTER CARE
- Temporary care funded via federal-state pass through and arranged by a child
welfare agency in order to allow receipt of adequate food, clothing, shelter,
education, and medical treatment for anyone raising a child that is not their own.
GUARDIAN AD LITEM
- Phrase meaning "for the proceeding" referring to adults who look after the
welfare of a child and represent their legal interests.
IN LOCO PARENTIS
- Teachers, administrators, and babysitters who are viewed as having some
temporary parental rights & obligations.
4. INDIFFERENT OR NEGLECTFUL (Uninvolved)
Cold and unresponsive, no rules, uninvolved, indifferent.
Children can be impulsive, cannot self-regulate emotions,
encounter more delinquency and addiction problems and may have
more mental issues like suicidal behavior.
They don't ask their child about school or homework.
They rarely know where their child is or who she is with.
They don't spend much time with your child.
They provide little guidance, nurturing or attention.
Frequent, unreasonable absenteeism from school; being out of
school without permission for 20 days or more might lead the
child into involvement in crime.
a. TRUANCY.
b. DROPPING OUT
c. UNDERACHIEVERS
d. SCHOOL FAILURE
 EDUCATIONAL PROBLEMS
1. TRUANCY - Frequent, unreasonable absenteeism from school;
being out of school without permission for 20 days or more.
2. DROPPING OUT – Leaving the school before completing the
required program of education.
3. UNDERACHIEVERS – Those who fail to meet expected levels of
school achievement
4. SCHOOL FAILURE – Failing to achieve success in school can
result in frustration, anger and reduced self-esteem, which may
contribute to delinquent behavior.
The kind of family structure that could influence a person to criminal
behavior, characterized by non-satisfaction of one or both parent from
the relationship that may express feeling of frustration refers to _____.
A. Anti-social Families
B. Disturbed Families
C. Disrupted Families
D. Inadequate Families
This is also called as ability grouping or streaming. When children
considered to be slow learners are grouped, they come to see
themselves in an unfavorable light and therefore will result to dislike
school, to truancy and even to delinquency.
a. Underachievers
b. School failure
c. School tracking
d. Grade retention
School Tracking – ability grouping or streaming. (Slavin) when children
considered to be slow learners are grouped, they come to see themselves
in an unfavorable light and therefore will result to dislike school, to
truancy and even to delinquency.
Grade retention (Smith and Shepard) – children make progress during
retention but not as much progress as similar children who were
promoted.
Alternatives to retention is tutor or summer class which are both effective and lest
costly
Yamamoto and Byrnes – children rated “Retention” as the most stressful event
they could suffer next to blindness or death of parents.
3. Define and enumerate parental
rights, responsibility, and disciplinary
authority over their children.
What is the primary right of the parents on their children?
a. Company of their children
b. Provide for their upbringing
c. Authority
d. Discipline
 Rights Of Parents
Primary Right of Parents. – The parents shall have the right to the
company of their children and, in relation to all other persons or
institutions dealing with the child’s development, the primary right and
obligation to provide for their upbringing.

Right to Discipline Child. – Parents have the right to discipline the

child as may be necessary for the formation of his good character, and
may therefore require from him obedience to just and reasonable rules,
suggestions and admonitions.
Parents shall endeavor to discover the child’s talents or aptitudes, if any,
and to encourage and develop them. If the child is especially gifted,
what should be done by parents?
a. Support the child and maximize his time to enhance his talent
b. Enrolled the child to such institution that will help him enhance his
skills and talents.
c. Spoil the child with everything he needs to express his talent without
affecting his/her study
d. Report this fact to the national center or to other agencies concerned
so for official assistance or recognition
Special Talents. – Parents shall endeavor to discover the child’s talents
or aptitudes, if any, and to encourage and develop them.
If the child is especially gifted, his parents shall report this fact to the
national center for gifted children or to other agencies concerned so that
official assistance or recognition may be extended to him.
Reading Habit. – The reading habit should be cultivated in the home.
Parents shall, whenever possible, provide the child with good and
wholesome reading material, taking into consideration his age and
emotional development. They shall guard against the introduction in the
home of pornographic and other unwholesome publications.
Association with Other Children. – Parents shall encourage the child to
associate with other children of his own age with whom he can develop
common interests of useful and salutary nature. It shall be their duty to
know the child’s friends and their activities and to prevent him from falling
into bad company. The child should not be allowed to stay out late at night
to the detriment of his health, studies or morals.
If by reason of his studies or for other causes, a child does not
live with his parents, the latter shall _____
a. Maintain his distance to give the child an opportunity to live
his own life
b. Communicate with him regularly and visit him as often as
possible
c. Let him take this chance to prove himself
d. All of the above
What is the legal doctrine holding parent liable for injuries caused by a
child's negligent driving or other actions?
A. Family Purpose Doctrine
B. Family Immunity Doctrine
C. Parens Patriae Doctrine
D. Nota
Which of the following statement best describes the concept of
guardian ad litem?
A. For the proceeding
B. Protection of child by the law
C. Guardians of the little children
D. Legal authority
Teachers, administrators and babysitters who are viewed as having
some temporary parental rights and obligations are considered as ____.
A. Guardianship
B. Order of authority
C. In loco parentis
D. Parens patriae
What is the legal doctrine granting custody to the parent whom the
child feels the greatest emotional attachment to?
A. Psychological parent
B. Tender years doctrine
C. Joint parental authority
D. Family immunity doctrine
In case of separation between parents of the child, a child of what age
is given by the court the preference to choose between either parents?
A. Under nine (9) years of age
B. Seven (7) years of age
C. Ten (10) years of age
D. Five (5) years of age
In the absence of death of the parents of the child, who shall continue
to exercise authority over the child?
1. Surviving grand parents
2. Elder brother and sister over 21 years of age
3. Surviving parents of child
4. Actual custodian of the child over 21 years of age
A. 1, 2 and 4 only
B. 1 and 2 only
C. 1, 2, 3 only
D. All of the above
Kardo is a child who is malnourished, ill clad and without proper
shelter. what category of child kardo is?
a. abandoned child
b. dependent child
c. NEGLECTED CHILD
d. physical neglected child
e. Emotional neglected child
 Special Categories Of Children
1) A dependent child Is one who is without a parent, guardian or custodian; or one
whose parents, guardian or other custodian for good cause desires to be relieved
of his care and custody; and is dependent upon the public for support.
(2) An abandoned child Is one who has no proper parental care or guardianship,
or whose parents or guardians have deserted him for a period of at least six
continuous months (3 MONTHS – RA 9523)
(3) A NEGLECTED CHILD Is one whose basic needs have been deliberately
unattended or inadequately attended. Neglect may occur in two ways:
a) There is a physical neglect when the child is malnourished, ill clad and without
proper shelter.
A child is unattended when left by himself without provisions for his needs and/or
without proper supervision.
b) Emotional neglect exists: when children are maltreated, raped or seduced;
when children are exploited, overworked or made to work under conditions not
conducive to good health; or are made to beg in the streets or public places, or
when children are in moral danger, or exposed to gambling, prostitution and other
Is an institution or person assuming the care, custody, protection
and maintenance of children for placement in any child-caring
institution or home or under the care and custody of any person
or persons for purposes of adoption.
a. A child-placing agency
b. A reception and study center
c. A shelter-care institution
d. Receiving homes
(3) A shelter-care institution Is one that provides temporary
protection and care to children requiring emergency reception
as a result of fortuitous events, abandonment by parents,
dangerous conditions of neglect or cruelty in the home, being
without adult care because of crisis in the family, or a court order
holding them as material witnesses.

(4) Receiving homes Are family-type homes which provide

temporary shelter from ten to twenty days for children who shall
during this period be under observation and study for eventual
placement by the department of social welfare. The number of
children in a receiving home shall not at any time exceed nine:
provided, that no more than two of them shall be under three years
of age.
(8) A reception and study center Is an institution that receives for
study, diagnosis, and temporary treatment, children who have
behavioral problems for the purpose of determining the appropriate
care for them or recommending their permanent treatment or
rehabilitation in other child welfare agencies.
(9) A child-placing agency Is an institution or person assuming the
care, custody, protection and maintenance of children for placement in
any child-caring institution or home or under the care and custody of
any person or persons for purposes of adoption, guardianship or
foster care. The relatives of such child or children within the sixth
degree of consanguinity or affinity are excluded from this definition.
An institution, whose primary purpose is education, is
deemed to be a child-caring institution when nine or more of its
pupils or wards in the ordinary course of events
a. do not return annually to the homes of their parents or
guardians for at least six months of summer vacation.
b. do not return annually to the homes of their parents or
guardians for at least three months of summer vacation.
c. do not return annually to the homes of their parents or
guardians for at least two months of summer vacation.
d. do not return annually to the homes of their parents or
guardians for at least one month of summer vacation.
(1) A child-caring institution Is one that provides twenty-four hour
resident group care service for the physical, mental, social and spiritual
well-being of nine or more mentally gifted, dependent, abandoned,
neglected, handicapped or disturbed children, or youthful
offenders.
An institution, whose primary purpose is education, is deemed to be a
child-caring institution when nine or more of its pupils or wards in the
ordinary course of events do not return annually to the homes of
their parents or guardians for at least two months of summer
vacation.
(2) A detention home Is a twenty-four hour child-caring institution
providing short term resident care for youthful offenders who are
awaiting court disposition of their cases or transfer to other
agencies or jurisdiction.
4. Distinguish and explain the Rights,
Welfare, and Protection of Children
under applicable laws.
The doctrine of " Parens Patriae" which is enshrined in the Constitution
literally means that the State serves as _____.
A. Defender of the Country
B. Protector of the Country
C. Benefactor of the Country
D. Father or Guardian of the Country
In case of doubt as to the age of the child, it shall be resolved in favor
of the _____.
A. Child
B. The investigator
C. DSWD
D. Court
The following are the differences between the juvenile and adult justice
system, except _____.
A. Juvenile court procedures are generally informal and private, those
adult court are formal and open to the public
B. Juvenile proceedings are not considered criminal
C. Court's duty to release information to the press about juvenile cases
D. Juveniles can be detained for acts that would not be criminal if they
were committed by an adult ( status offenses)
Restricting or prohibiting the child to mingle with other persons as a
means of depriving his/her liberty for socialization is an example of
____.
A. Emotional abuse
B. Psychological abuse
C. Physical abuse
D. Mental abuse
 TYPES OF CHILD ABUSE
1. PHYSICAL ABUSE
Is an act of deliberately inflicting physical injuries on a child.
2. EMOTIONAL MALTREATMENT/PSYCHOLOGICAL CHILD ABUSE
Is when an adult demeans the child’s worth or dignity as a human being by
constant scolding or ridiculing. This could lead to a child with very low self-esteem and
many hang-ups and psychological problems.
3. CHILD NEGLECT
Is the failure to provide for the child’s basic needs.
PHYSICAL NEGLECT – Not providing adequate food or clothing, medical care etc.
EDUCATIONAL NEGLECT – Failure to provide appropriate schooling or special
educational needs, allowing truancy
PSYCHOLOGICAL NEGLECTS – Lack of emotional support and love, allowing the
child to participate in drug and alcohol use
SEXUAL CHILD ABUSE – Is any act of maliciously molesting the child sexually
whether the sexual act is consummated or not.
What should be the proper action for all the records and proceedings
involving children in conflict with the law from initial contact until final
disposition of the case?
A. Place in the dockets of court which forms part of the public record
B. It can be open to the public
C. Considered restricted
D. Nota
As a general rule, children below 15 years old shall _______
a. Shall not be employed
b. Shall be employed provided that he is under responsibility of his
parents
c. Shall be employed provided that his employer obtained permit
from DOLE
d. Nota
 EMPLOYMENT OF CHILDREN (RA 9231)
Children below fifteen (15) years of age shall not be employed except:
"1) when a child works directly under the sole responsibility of his/her
parents or legal guardian and where only members of his/her family are
employed: provided, however, that his/her employment neither
endangers his/her life, safety, health, and morals, nor impairs his/her
normal development: Provided, further, That the parent or legal
guardian shall provide the said child with the prescribed primary
and/or secondary education; or
"2) where a child's employment or participation in public
entertainment or information through cinema, theater, radio,
television or other forms of media is essential:
Provided,that the employment contract is concluded by the
child's parents or legal guardian, with the express agreement of
the child concerned, if possible, and the approval of the
department of labor and employment: provided, further, that the
following requirements in all instances are strictly complied with:
 Hours of Work of a Working Child (RA 9231)
Working Hours
If the child is under 15:
Maximum of four (4) hours a day, twenty (20) hours a week
Between six o’clock in the morning to eight o’clock in the evening (6am to 8pm)
If the child is 15 but under 18:
Maximum of eight (8) hours a day, forty (40) hours a week
Between six o’clock in the morning to ten o’clock in the evening (6am to 10pm)
Note:
No child below fifteen (15) years of age shall be allowed to work between eight
o'clock in the evening and six o'clock in the morning of the following day and no
child fifteen (15) years of age but below eighteen (18) shall be allowed to work
between ten o'clock in the evening and six o'clock in the morning of the following
day
Dagul is a child star in Going Damulag. His parents must set up a trust
fund for ____ of his earnings.
a. At most thirty percent (30%)
b. at least twenty percent (20 %)
c. at least thirty percent (30%)
d. at most twenty percent (20%)
In relation to questions above, Dagul’s income that______may be used
for the collective needs of the family
a. At most thirty percent (30%)
b. at least twenty percent (20 %)
c. at least thirty percent (30%)
d. at most twenty percent (20%)
Sec. 12-B. Ownership, Usage and Administration of the Working
Child's Income. (RA 9231)
COLLECTIVE NEEDS OF THE FAMILY : not more than twenty
percent (20%) of the child's income

"Sec. 12-C. Trust Fund to Preserve Part of the Working Child's

Income. (RA 9231)
TRUST FUND : at least thirty percent (30%) of the earnings of the
child
A parent who only abuses the child when he/she is confronted with a
particular situation. One who is usually non-abusive but "fly off the
handle" when some circumstances develops.
A. Accidental abuser
B. Institutionally prescribed abusers
C. Parentally incompetent abuser
D. Situational abuser
 TYPOLOGY OF CHILD ABUSERS
1. MENTALLY DISORDERED ABUSER – A person who has defective mental
ability
2. PARENTALLY INCOMPETENT ABUSER – An individual whose practice of
disciplining the child is in the same way he was disciplined
3. SITUATIONAL ABUSER – A parent who only abused the child when he/she is
confronted with a particular situation, one who is usually non abusive
4. ACCIDENTAL ABUSER – A parent who exercises poor judgement in his/her
parenting decisions; poor judgement results to child abuse
5. SUBCULTURAL ABUSER – A group of people who share a number of values,
norms and attitudes in common
6. SELF-IDENTIFIED ABUSER – Parents who are abusive; although some of
these kind of abusers want to stop abusing their children, they cannot and their
area afraid to make their discipline practices known.
7. INSTITUTIONALLY PRESCRIBED ABUSERS – Some institutions are grounded
with belief that are abusive to children
The preliminary investigation of cases related to child abuse shall be
terminated ________
a. Within a period of 60 days from the date of filing
b. within a period of 45 days from the date of filing.
c. within a period of 30 days from the date of filing.
d. within a period of 15 days from the date of filing.
"Sec. 16- A. Jurisdiction - The family courts shall have original
jurisdiction over all cases involving offenses punishable under this act:
provided, that in cities or provinces where there are no family courts
yet, the regional trial courts and the municipal trial courts shall have
concurrent jurisdiction depending on the penalties prescribed for the
offense charged.
The preliminary investigation of cases filed under this act shall be
terminated within a period of thirty (30) days from the date of filing.
If the preliminary investigation establishes a prima facie case, then
the corresponding information shall be filed in court within forty eight
(48) hours from the termination of the investigation.
Trial of cases under this act shall be terminated by the court not later
than ninety (90) days from the date of filing of information. Decision on
said cases shall be rendered within a period of fifteen (15) days from
the date of submission of the case.
Shall ensure that the status, rights and interests of children are
upheld in accordance with the constitution and international
instruments on human rights.
a. Child Rights Center
b. Commission of human rights
c. Child Rights Center of the Commission on Human Rights
d. Nota
5. Enumerate and identify Juvenile
Delinquency Prevention Programs.
Willy and Lemuel, both aged 14 were arrested for petty theft and
chronic vandalism. As a result, both of them will be charged accordingly
for their acts and processed judicially after careful evaluation of the
authority. What system or process will they be subjected to?
A. Social Justice System
B. Criminal Justice System
C. Juvenile Justice Welfare Council
D. Juvenile Justice System
The goal of any juvenile justice system is _____.
A. Punish the children
B. Save children from becoming criminals
C. Remove children from streets
D. Ensure that children are in school
Who has the jurisdiction over a child at-risk who, immediately after
initial intervention of the case, said child at-risk is found to be a non-
resident of a particular city or municipality?
A. The local social welfare development officer if the child is non-
resident of the municipality or city
B. The Bureau of Jail Management and Penology of the city or
municipality
C. The barangay council for the protection of children if residing in that
barangay
D. The PNP detention facility in the city or municipality
Which trend in the juvenile welfare system where Bahay Pag-asa is a
component thereof?
A. Non-residential community treatment
B. Institutionalization
C. Deinstitutionalization
D. Community treatment and residential treatment
If a youthful offender has a good conduct while in custody of DSWD or
training institution and has shown his capability to be useful member of
the community, his case shall be _____.
A. Remanded to the court
B. Remanded to the fiscal's office
C. Decided with finally the court
D. Dismissed and offender finally discharged
A twenty-four hour child-caring institution providing short-term
residential care for children in conflict with the law, who are awaiting
court disposition of their cases or transfer to other agencies or
jurisdiction, is known as _____.
A. Youth rehabilitation center
B. Youth detention home
C. Orphanage
D. DSWD
When may a child in conflict with the law undergo diversion program
without necessity of court intervention?
A. When the imposable penalty for the crime committed is not more
than six (6) years
B. When the imposable penalty for the crime committed exceeds six
(6) years imprisonment
C. When the imposable penalty for the crime committed exceeds six
(6) years imprisonment but not more than twelve (12) years
imprisonment
D. When the imposable penalty for the crime committed does not
exceeds twelve (12) years imprisonment
Kardo, a minor has been found guilty of an act committed without
knowingly that the act committed is wrong. Now he must undergo
____.
A. Intervention program
B. Diversion
C. Diversion program
D. Counselling
A multi-disciplinary team compose of the following shall operate the ‘Bahay
Pag-asa’, except:
1. Psychologist/mental health professional
2. Social worker
3. Principal of public school
4. Medical doctor
5. Educational/Guidance councilor
6. BCPC member
7. Member of IBP
a. 1 and 7
b. 2 and 7
c. 3 and 7
d. none of these
The primary mode of intervention.
a. Institutionalized program
b. Community-based programs
c. Community service program
d. Center-based program
6. Identify and compare Models of
Juvenile Justice System.
This model is based on the assumptions that juvenile wrongdoing is
the product of social or environmental factors for which the young
person cannot be held individually responsible. Its primary goal is to
provide appropriate help or treatment for offenders rather than
punishment.
a. Justice Model Of Corrections
b. Minimum Intervention Model
c. Restorative Justice Model
d. Welfare Model
Models of juvenile justice system

Justice Model Of Corrections – this is based on the concept that the

criminal justice system should not be concerned with offender
rehabilitation but should limit itself to the fair administration of
punishment appropriate to the severity of the crime committed.
Welfare Model - it adopts a positivistic approach that is based on the
assumptions that juvenile wrongdoing is the product of social or
environmental factors for which the young person cannot be held
individually responsible. Its primary goal is to provide appropriate help
or treatment for offenders rather than punishment.
This model suggests that all official forms of processing young
offenders are potentially harmful to them since they label and
stigmatized them as criminals.
a. Justice Model Of Corrections
b. Minimum Intervention Model
c. Restorative Justice Model
d. Welfare Model
Models of juvenile justice system

Minimum Intervention Model – its philosophy is derived in part from

criminological “labelling theory”, which suggests that all official forms of
processing young offenders are potentially harmful to them since they
label and stigmatized them as criminals. (primary and secondary
deviance)
Restorative Justice Model – is based on a radically different sets of
assumptions about the concept of crime itself, the relationship between
offenders, victims, citizens and the state, and also about the most
appropriate ways of responding to crime. The traditional juvenile justice
theorists have portrayed crimes as against state while restorative model
emphasizes on the harm that is done to the victim.
7. Learn and apply the provisions of
R.A. 9344 as amended and other
relevant and applicable laws and UN
declarations.
Under RA 9344, JJWC is hereby created ________
a. Under the DSWD for administrative supervision
b. Attached to the DOJ under its administrative supervision
c. Under DOJ for administrative supervision
d. Attached to DSWD under its administrative supervision
• R.A 10630
• SECTION 1. the title of RA 9344 is hereby amended to read as follows:
“An act establishing a Comprehensive Juvenile Justice and Welfare
System, creating The Juvenile Justice and Welfare Council under the
Department of Social Welfare And Development”
• Juvenile Justice and Welfare Council (JJWC). A juvenile justice and
welfare council (JJWC) is hereby created and attached to the
department of social welfare and development and placed under its
administrative supervision. The JJWC shall be chaired by an
undersecretary of the department of social welfare and development.
A child committed drug related offense punished
with______imprisonment shall be deemed a neglected child and shall
be committed to intensive intervention in IJISC
a. reclusion temporal
b. more than 12 years
c. 12 years and more
d. More than 6 years
Part of the features of a Bahay Pag-asa is an/a _______. This will cater
to children in conflict with the law in accordance with sections 20, 20-a
and 20-b as amended.
a. Intensive Juvenile Intervention Support Center
b. Intervention for Juvenile in Intensive Support Center
c. Intensive Juvenile Intervention and Support Center
d. Intensive Juvenile Intervention and Service Center
The LSWDO shall determine the appropriate programs for the child who has
been released in consultation with the child and the person having custody
over the child. If the parents, guardians or nearest relatives cannot be located
or if they refuse to take custody, the child may be released to any the
following;
1. duly registered NGO
2. Duly registered religious organization
3. barangay official
4. BCPC member
5. LSWDO
6. DSWD
a. 1, 2, 3, and 4
b. 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6
c. 1, 3, 4, and 5
d. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6
In relation to the section 6 of RA 10630 that amended sec. 20 or RA
9344, if the child has no parents or guardians or if they refuse or fail to
execute the written authorization for voluntary commitment, the
proper petition for involuntary commitment shall be immediately filed
by the DSWD or LSWDO, provided that the minimum age for children
committed to a youth care facility or ‘Bahay Pag-asa’ shall be ________
a. 9 years old
b. 12 years old
c. 15 years old
d. 17 years old
Under RA 10630, Serious Crimes refer to the following, except:
a. Homicide
b. Parricide
c. Infanticide
d. Murder
The child with age ______ shall be committed to intensive intervention
if she/he committed serious crimes.
a. 12 to 15
b. More than 12 but less than 15
c. 12 but not exceeding 18
d. 13 to 15 years old
A child committed a crime in violation of RA 9165 with more than 12
years imprisonment shall deemed _______ and be committed to
intensive intervention.
a. Serious criminal
b. Child at risk
c. CICL
d. Neglected child
Under this law "A child is deemed to be fifteen (15) years of age on the
day of the fifteenth anniversary of his/her birthdate.
a. Pd 603
b. Ra 7610
c. Ra 9344
d. Ra 10630
A child committed an offense for the 2nd time or oftener shall be
deemed a neglected child provided that _______
a. he previously subjected to diversion program but failed to
rehabilitate
b. he previously subjected to intensive intervention program but
failed to reform
c. previously subjected to a community-based intervention
program
d. he previously tried by court but not qualified for diversion
Which of the following pertains to Restorative Justice?
A. Implementation of punishment
B. Concentrating more on the crime itself than on the people involved
C. Focuses on restoring damaged relationships between the victim,
offender and community
D. Retribution and punishing the offender
The moment the child is taken into custody, the law enforcement officer shall
properly identify oneself and present proper identification to the child then
immediately notify the ________
1. child’s parents or guardians
2. Local Social Welfare and Development Officer
3. The victim’s parents
4. Public Attorney’s Office
5. WCPD
a. 1245
b. 124
c. 1235
d. 1234
RULE 26. Procedure for Taking Child Into Custody
From the moment the child is taken into custody, the law enforcement officer shall
faithfully observe the following procedures, as provided in section 21 of the act:
(1) Properly identify oneself and present proper identification to the child.
(2) Immediately notify the child’s parents or guardians, the Local Social Welfare and
Development Officer (LSWDO), and the Public Attorney’s Office (PAO) Of the child’s
apprehension. The notification shall be made not later than eight (8) hours after
apprehension.
(3) Explain to the child, in simple language and in a language or dialect, which the 15
child can understand:
a. The reason for placing the child under custody;
b. The offense allegedly committed; and
c. The child’s constitutional rights and the child’s rights under Republic Act 7438 Or an act defining
certain rights of person arrested, detained or under custodial investigation as well as the duties
of the arresting, detaining and investigating officers, and providing penalties for violations
thereof [R.A. 7438].
If the child cannot understand the language or local dialect or suffers from disability, an
interpreter or a mental health professional shall be provided.
When may LSWD or DSWD file for involuntary commitment of the
child?
a. The child in conflict with the law who is at least 15 years old and
below is determined by the LSWDO to be dependent, abandoned,
neglected or abused by the parents.
b. The best interest of the child requires that the child be placed in a
youth care facility or “Bahay Pag-asa,”
c. The child, who is above twelve (12) years of age up to fifteen (15)
years of age, commits a serious crime under RA 10630
d. All of the above
A Petition for Involuntary Commitment shall be filed by the LSWDO, or
in his or her absence, by the DSWD if:
(a) The child in conflict with the law who is at least twelve (12) years old is
determined by the LSWDO to be dependent, abandoned, neglected or
abused by the parents, and the best interest of the child requires that
the child be placed in a youth care facility or “Bahay Pag-asa,” pursuant
to section 20 of the act; or
(b) The child, who is above twelve (12) years of age up to fifteen (15) years
of age, commits a serious crime covered by section 20-A of the act; or
(c) The child, who is above twelve (12) years of age up to fifteen (15) years
of age, commits an offense for the second time or oftener, and if the
best interest of the child requires that the child be placed in a youth
care facility or “Bahay Pag-asa,” pursuant to section 20-B.
In accordance with existing laws, rules, procedures and guidelines, the
LOCAL SOCIAL WELFARE AND DEVELOPMENT OFFICER (LSWDO) of the
LGU where the offense was committed; or in the absence of the LSWDO,
by the DSWD social worker; shall file the proper petition for involuntary
commitment and placement of the CICL under the IJISC, within twenty-
four (24) hours from the time of the receipt of a report on the alleged
commission of said child.
The court, where the petition for involuntary commitment has been filed
shall decide on the petition within seventy-two (72) hours from the time
the said petition has been filed by the DSWD or the LSWDO.
The court will determine the initial period of placement of the child
within the IJISC, which shall not be less than one (1) year.
The multi-disciplinary team shall develop individual case management
plans with offense-specific interventions.
Rule 48.c. Duty of the Law Enforcement Officer When There is No
Diversion
Pursuant to section 23 of the act, the law enforcement officer handling
the case shall forward the records to the prosecutor or judge, when:
• The case involves an offense with an imposable penalty of more than six (6)
years imprisonment; or
• The child or the child’s parents or guardians do not consent to a diversion.
The case records shall be forwarded within three (3) days from
determination of the absence of jurisdiction or the termination of the
diversion proceedings as stated above.
Upon receipt of the referral, the prosecutor or judge shall then
conduct the preliminary investigation and determine whether or not
the child should remain in custody and correspondingly charged in
court.
A child in conflict with law may undergo diversion proceedings outside
of the criminal justice system when the case is referred to the
Barangay through the_______
a. Chairman
b. Lupong tagapamayapa
c. Pangkat tagapagkasundo
d. Pangkat tagapagsindi
RULE 47. At the Katarungang Pambarangay Level
Rule 47.a. Diversion Prior to Entry into the Criminal Justice System
A child in conflict with law may undergo diversion proceedings outside
of the criminal justice system when the case is referred to the
Barangay through the Lupong Tagapamayapa.
Rule 47.d. Duty of Punong Barangay When There is No Diversion
Pursuant to Section 27 of the Act, the Punong Barangay handling the case
shall, within three (3) days from determination of the absence of
jurisdiction or termination of the diversion proceedings as provided below,
forward the records of the case to the:
(1) LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICER OR PROSECUTOR – when the child or the
child’s parents or guardian do not consent to a diversion. Upon the
issuance of the corresponding document, certifying to the fact that no
agreement has been reached by the parties, the case shall be filed
according to the regular process.
(2) Prosecutor or the court – when the case involves an offense with an
imposable penalty of more than six (6) years imprisonment.
RULE 48. At the Law Enforcement Level
Rule 48.a. Diversion Proceedings at the Law Enforcement Level
Diversion shall be conducted at the law enforcement level when:
(1) After the conduct of diversion proceedings at the Katarungang
Pambarangay level, the child or the child’s parents or guardian do not
consent to a diversion, and the Punong Barangay forwards the case of the
child as provided under rule 47.d herein; or
(2) After the conduct of the initial investigation, the law enforcement officer
determines that the child is above 15 but below 18 years of age, acted
with discernment and allegedly committed an offense, that is not a
victimless crime, with an imposable penalty of not more than six (6) years
of imprisonment, as provided under rule 28 (2)(a) herein.
RULE 49. At the Level of the LSWDO in Cases of Victimless Crimes 2
Rule 49.a. Diversion at the LSWDO level
Diversion shall be handled at the level of the LSWDO, where after
the conduct of initial investigation, the law enforcement officer
determines that the child is above 15 but 5 below 18 years of age,
acted with discernment and allegedly committed a victimless 6 crime
where the imposable penalty is not more than six (6) years of
imprisonment, as provided under RULE 28 (2)(b) herein.
RULE 50. At the Level of the Prosecutor
In cases where no consent or agreement to a diversion was reached at
the level of the law enforcement officer or LSWDO conducting the
diversion proceedings, the prosecutor shall still endeavor to arrive at
an agreement to a diversion program.
RULE 56. Diversion At the Court Level
Where the imposable penalty for the crime committed exceeds six
(6) years imprisonment, diversion measures may be resorted to only
by the court, and will proceed in accordance with the supreme court
rule on juveniles in conflict with the law.
Diversion
System Of Diversion
Children in conflict with the law shall undergo diversion programs
without undergoing court proceedings subject to the conditions
herein provided:
a. Not more than six (6) years imprisonment,
Mediation
Law Enforcement Officer Or Punong Barangay
With assistance of the local social welfare and development officer or other
members of the LCPC
b. not more than six (6) years imprisonment (In victimless crimes)
local social welfare and development officer
coordination with the BCPC
c. exceeds six (6) years imprisonment
court.
PART X. DIVERSION FOR CHILDREN WHO ACTED WITH DISCERNMENT
RULE 44. Who Shall Undergo Diversion
(a) Is above fifteen (15) years but below eighteen (18) years of age;
(b) Acted with discernment; and
(c) Allegedly committed an offense with an imposable penalty of not more
than six (6) years of imprisonment if diversion is conducted at the
barangay, police or prosecutor’s level; and not more than twelve (12)
years of imprisonment, if diversion is resorted to by the court
The child, together with the parents or guardians, shall present
themselves to the competent authorities that imposed the diversion
program, ____________for reporting and evaluation of the
effectiveness of the program.
a. at least once a month
b. at least twice a month
c. Not less than three times
d. As may be determined by court
RULE 54. Compliance with Diversion
Rule 54.a. Reporting Obligations
The child, together with the parents or guardians, shall present
themselves to the competent authorities that imposed the diversion
program, at least once a month for reporting and evaluation of the
effectiveness of the program.
RULE 55. Suspension of Prescriptive Period of the Offense
Rule 55.a. During Diversion Proceedings
The period of prescription of the offense shall be suspended until the
completion of the diversion proceedings, but shall not exceed a period of
forty-five (45) days.
Rule 55.b. During Diversion Program
The period of prescription of the offense shall be suspended during the
effectivity of the diversion program, but shall not exceed a period of two (2)
years.
General rule, the investigation of the crime committed by a child shall
be conducted by the____
a. WCPD
b. general investigation section.
c. CIDG
d. Prosecutor
 CHAPTER 4
RECEIVING CICL CASES IN THE
STATION
Section 4-1 Where a Case is Filed Directly at the Station
If the victim or the complainant directly files a complaint before the police station
against a CICL, the following procedures shall apply:
a. The investigation of the crime committed shall be conducted by the WCPD unless
the case is cognizable by the general investigation section.
b. If the case is not cognizable by the WCPD, the investigator-on-case (IOC) shall notify
the WCPD that a complaint has been filed against a CICL. The WCPD shall
immediately assign the necessary codes according to section 8-2 in order to protect
the identity of the child. The IOC shall make an entry into the police blotter using
the assigned codes.
c. In case the IOC is not familiar with the processes of the juvenile justice and welfare
act, he/she may refer the victim or the complainant to the WCPD in order to explain
to the victim or complainant the processes required by the juvenile justice and
welfare act.
Section 3-11 If the Offense is Light
If the child’s offense is light but the offense is not listed in section 1-1.2,
the responding officer shall either:
a. Give the child a friendly advice or “payo” or a simple warning not to repeat
the act/s she/he has committed.
b. Call the unoffending parents or guardians for their proper intervention in
the treatment of the child.
c. Refer the child directly to the barangay of residence and to the lswdo for
proper disposition and intervention. If the child is a resident of another
municipality or city, the child shall be referred to the LSWDO of the place
where the offense was committed for proper disposition.
In all cases, the responding officer shall take down the facts of the case in
his/her tickler and shall report the incident to the WCPD officer who shall enter
the incident in the pink blotter or mandatory registry.
Section 3-12 If the Offense is Serious or Non-Serious
If the child’s offense is serious or non-serious, with or without victims, the responding
officer shall:
a. Immediately bring the child to a medical professional for physical examination. The
responding officer shall fill up the referral letter form in annex F attaching the feedback
form in annex G;
b. The responding officer who brings the child for medical examination shall maintain a
safe distance from the child and the medical professional while the latter conducts the
examination so as to respect and promote the privacy of the child.
c. After the medical examination, he shall immediately bring the child to the police station;
d. Fill up the initial contact report form in annex B;
e. Prepare an affidavit of apprehension containing the following information:
1) Name and age of the CICL and of the persons who participated in the commission of the crime;
2) Name of the apprehending officer/s;
3) When, where, why and how initial contact was conducted;
4) Whether handcuffs, or other instruments of restraint was used during initial contact;
5) Whether force was used in effecting initial contact; and
6) Whether weapons or any illegal effects were recovered from the child.
If any person contesting the age of the child in conflict with the law, prior to
the filing of the information in any appropriate court, what shall be done?
1. file a case in a summary proceeding which shall be decided by the judge within
twenty-four (24) hours
2. file a motion to determine the age of the child in the same court where the case
is pending.
3. file a motion for temporary suspension of hearing while the contest is pending on
court
4. file a complaint in barangay or police station
a. 1 and 2
b. 1 and 4
c. 2 and 3
d. 3 and 4
Rule 35.d. If the Child’s Age is Contested
As provided in section 7 of the act, any person contesting the age of the
child in conflict with the law, prior to the filing of the information in any
appropriate court, may file a case in a summary proceeding for the
determination of the child’s age before the family court, which shall decide
the case within twenty-four (24) hours from the receipt of the appropriate
pleadings of all interested parties.
If a case has been filed against the child in conflict with the law and is
pending in the appropriate court, a person may file a motion to determine
the age of the child in the same court where the case is pending.
Pending the hearing on the said motion, the proceedings on the main
case shall be suspended. In all proceedings, law enforcement officers,
prosecutors, judges and other government officials concerned, shall exert
all efforts to determine the age of the child in conflict with the law.
 R.A 10630
“Sec. 20-a. Serious crimes committed by children who are exempt from criminal responsibility.”

above twelve (12) years of age up Where the victim/s were killed or
to fifteen (15) years of age raped (KRC-D)
(DRIMP) 1. kidnapping and serious illegal
1. Parricide detention
2. Murder 2. Drug cases (more than 12 yrs
3. Infanticide imp.)
4. destructive arson 3. Robbery with homi beef
5. Rape 4. Carnapping
shall be deemed a neglected child and shall be mandatorily placed in intensive juvenile
intervention and support center (IJISC) in Bahay Pag-asa
 (30%) (50%) (20%)
Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
A. DISPUTE RESOLUTION AND Percentage Number of
Weight Items Recall information Explain, Using the Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
CRISIS/INCIDENT MANAGEMENT
and Interpret, information in critiquing,
and Recognizing, summarize, another familiar Comparing, experimenting, Designing,
Distribution
listing, describing, examine, situation organizing, judging constructing,
The registered criminologist can perform the Distribution paraphrase, deconstructing, planning,
competencies under the following sub-topics: retrieving, Implementing interrogating, producing,
naming, finding classify
20% 100 carrying out, finding inventi
using, executing

2% 10

1. Know and understand the Principles of Negotiation,

Arbitration, Mediation, and Conciliation, and the Court
Annexed Mediation; Judicial Mediation; and Litigation
as Mode of Dispute Resolution. .40% 2 1 - 1 - - -

2. Compare and differentiate Restorative Justice from

Retributive Justice. (Methods, Techniques, and .60% 3 - 1 1 1 - -
Strategies of Negotiation, Arbitration, Mediation, and
Conciliation).
3. Understand and Interpret R.A. 9285 “Alternative
5. Identify
Dispute and demonstrate
Resolution theand
Act of 2004” various
other Types,
applicable .20% 1 - 1 - - - -
Characteristics,
policies Phases,of
and issuances andthe
methods
Court of
or Critical
Agency
concern. .40% 2 - - 1 - 1 -
Incident Management
4. Discuss and apply the principles of Police Critical
Incident Management .20% 1 - - 1 - - -
6. Determine and evaluate the various types of
Crises, Disaster Management and Assessment.
.20% 1 - - 1 - - -
1. Know and understand the Principles of
Negotiation, Arbitration, Mediation, and
Conciliation, and the Court Annexed
Mediation; Judicial Mediation; and
Litigation as Mode of Dispute
Resolution.
This is a power-oriented mode in which you use whatever power
seems appropriate to win your own position—your ability to
argue, your rank, or economic sanctions.
a. Avoiding
b. Competing
c. Accommodating
d. Collaborating
e. Compromising
It means digging into an issue to pinpoint the underlying needs
and wants of the two individuals.
a. Avoiding
b. Competing
c. Accommodating
d. Collaborating
e. Compromising
There is an element of self-sacrifice in this mode.
a. Avoiding
b. Competing
c. Accommodating
d. Collaborating
e. Compromising
CONFLICT RESOLUTION STRATEGY
#1: AVOIDING
• This is unassertive and uncooperative.
• The person neither pursues his own concerns nor those of the
other individual.
• He does not deal with the conflict.
• Avoiding might take the form of diplomatically sidestepping an
issue, postponing an issue until a better time, or simply
withdrawing from a threatening situation.
CONFLICT RESOLUTION STRATEGY
#2: COMPETING
• This is assertive and uncooperative.
• An individual pursues his own concerns at the other person’s expense.
• This is a power-oriented mode in which you use whatever power
seems appropriate to win your own position—your ability to argue, your
rank, or economic sanctions.
• Competing means “standing up for your rights,” defending a position
which you believe is correct, or simply trying to win.
• Competing is used by people who go into a conflict planning to win.
• Competing might work in sports or war, but it’s rarely a good strategy
for group problem solving.
CONFLICT RESOLUTION STRATEGY
#3: ACCOMMODATING
• This is unassertive and cooperative - the complete opposite of
competing.
• When accommodating, the individual neglects his own concerns
to satisfy the concerns of the other person
• There is an element of self-sacrifice in this mode.
• Accommodating might take the form of selfless generosity or
charity,
• Obeying another person’s order when you would prefer not to,
or yielding to another’s point of view.
CONFLICT RESOLUTION STRATEGY
#4: COLLABORATING
• It is both assertive and cooperative—the complete opposite of
avoiding.
• Collaborating involves an attempt to work with others to find
some solution that fully satisfies their concerns.
• It means digging into an issue to pinpoint the underlying needs
and wants of the two individuals.
• Collaborating between two persons might take the form of
exploring a disagreement to learn from each other’s insights or
trying to find a creative solution to an interpersonal problem.
CONFLICT RESOLUTION STRATEGY
#5: COMPROMISING
• It is moderate in both assertiveness and cooperativeness.
• The objective is to find some expedient, mutually acceptable solution
that partially satisfies both parties.
• It falls intermediate between competing and accommodating.
• Compromising gives up more than competing but less than
accommodating.
• Likewise, it addresses an issue more directly than avoiding, but does
not explore it in as much depth as collaborating.
• In some situations, compromising might mean splitting the difference
between the two positions, exchanging concessions, or seeking a
quick middle ground solution.
Is a short-term disagreement that can result in the disputants
reaching some sort of resolution, and it involves issues that are
negotiable.
a. Conflict
b. Dispute
c. Problem
d. Solution
 CONFLICT VS DISPUTE
CONFLICT and DISPUTE are almost interchangeably used.
However, John Burton (1990) said that:
Dispute is a short-term disagreement that can result in the
disputants reaching some sort of resolution; it involves issues that
are negotiable.
Conflict, in contrast, is long-term with deeply rooted issues that are
seen as “non-negotiable”
The following are the tested methods of closing a negotiation, except
_____.
A. Do not offer deadlines and warnings
B. Offer concessions
C. Split the difference
D. Suggest an adjournment
Which statements about mediation are true?
1. A mediator in a negotiation can help both parties reach an agreement but
cannot impose a settlement on or make decisions for them
2. A mediator help parties make concessions when conflicts of interest are
insignificant
3. Mediation is a commonly used intervention option but is not necessarily
the remedy for all disputes
4. A mediator can help the parties reach an agreement, but not necessarily
the best agreement
A. 1,3 and 4
B. 2,3 and 4
C. 1,2,3 and 4
D. 1,2 and 3
Mediator leads the negotiation and helps the parties work out their
differences to mutual satisfaction.
a. True
b. False
c. Tralse
d. Frue
It is often called "assisted negotiation.“
a. Mediation
b. Arbitration
c. Conciliation
d. Litigation
The 3 stages of mediation are:
1. Exchange of information and understanding the conflict
2. Feedback to and from the parties
3. actual bargaining.
4. Rendering an award
a. 123
b. 234
c. 134
d. 1234
Which of the following is not an advantages of negotiation?
a. Parties engage in verbal interaction completely in their own
terms
b. Parties can choose their mediator
c. Outcome is whatever the parties agree to.
d. Decision is made by the parties
ADVANTAGES OF NEGOTIATION
• Parties control the process.
• Parties engage in verbal interaction completely in
their own terms
• Decision is made by the parties
• Outcome is whatever the parties agree to.
Another among the types of mediation, a trained, neutral third party
hears disputants’ evidence and testimony in an arbitration; writes an
award but keeps it from the parties; attempts to mediate the parties’
dispute; and unseals and issues her previously determined binding
award if the parties fail to reach agreement.
a. Med-Arb
b. Arb-Med
c. COURT-ANNEXED MEDIATION
d. COURT-REFERRED MEDIATION
Med-Arb
• In med-arb, a mediation-arbitration hybrid, parties first reach agreement on the terms
of the process itself. Unlike in most mediations, they typically agree in writing that the
outcome of the process will be binding. Next, they attempt to negotiate a resolution to
their dispute with the help of a mediator.
• If the mediation ends in an impasse, or if issues remain unresolved, the process isn’t
over. At this point, parties can move on to arbitration. The mediator can assume the
role of arbitrator (if he or she is qualified to do so) and render a binding decision
quickly based on her judgments, either on the case as a whole or on the unresolved
issues. Alternatively, an arbitrator can take over the case after consulting with the
mediator.
Arb-Med
• In arb-med, another among the types of mediation, a trained, neutral third party hears
disputants’ evidence and testimony in an arbitration; writes an award but keeps it from
the parties; attempts to mediate the parties’ dispute; and unseals and issues her
previously determined binding award if the parties fail to reach agreement, writes
Richard Fullerton in an article in the Dispute Resolution Journal.
• The process removes the concern in med-arb about the misuse of confidential
information, but keeps the pressure on parties to reach an agreement, notes Fullerton.
Notably, however, the arbitrator/mediator cannot change her previous award based on
new insights gained during the mediation.
 COURT ANNEXED
a. Court-Annexed Mediation
Means any mediation process conducted under the
auspices of the court and in accordance with Supreme Court
approved guidelines, after such court has acquired jurisdiction of
the dispute.

b. Court-Referred Mediation
Means mediation ordered by a court to be conducted in
accordance with the agreement of the parties when an action is
prematurely commenced in violation of such agreement.
JDR is a process whereby the judge employs conciliation,
mediation or early neutral evaluation in order to settle a case at
the ___________.
a. Arraignment
b. Pre trial
c. Before trial
d. Trial
JUDICIAL DISPUTE RESOLUTION
(JDR)
• JDR is a process whereby the judge (called
the JDR Judge) employs conciliation,
mediation or early neutral evaluation in order
to settle a case at the pre-trial stage. In the
event the JDR fails, then another judge (called
the trial judge) shall proceed to hear and
decide the case.
The following is the process to be observed
in conducting Judicial Dispute Resolution
before the court:

a. Before trial, the judge may refer the case to the

Mediation Center for conciliation, mediation, or
arbitration;
b. If there is no settlement in the Mediation Center,
the judge will conduct a judicial dispute resolution;
and
c. If the Judicial Dispute Resolution again fails, the
judge will conduct trial to determine the guilt of the
accused and impose the proper penalty in case of
conviction.
 CASES SUBJECT TO JDR
The following cases shall be referred to JDR by
Judges in areas declared as JDR sites:
All cases which were not successfully settled in CAM;
All appealed cases from the exclusive and original
jurisdiction of the First Level Courts:
Over a habeas corpus case decided by the judge of the
first level court, in the absence of all the Regional Trial
Court judges in the province or city, that are brought up
on appeal from the special jurisdiction granted to the first
level courts under Section 35 of the Judiciary
Reorganization Act of 1980.
Here, the neutral third party will be asked by the parties to provide
them with a non-binding settlement proposal.
a. Mediation
b. Conciliation
c. Arbitration
d. Litigation
NEGOTIATION V. MEDIATION
Negotiation
Agreement is based on parties’ own terms

Mediation
Mediator attempts to work out a settlement or
agreement that both parties accept or reject
MEDIATION V. CONCILIATION
Mediation
A mediator, will, in most cases and as a
matter of principle, refrain from making such a
proposal

Conciliation
The conciliator will be asked by the parties to
provide them with a non-binding settlement
proposal
 CAM v. CRM v. JDR
CAM
No pre-existing agreement present, but parties were still directed to
Mediation to declog court dockets

CRME
Expressly stated in an Agreement to resort to Arbitration before
filing a case in Court

JDR
Judge tries to settle the dispute for cases not successfully settled
in CAM
What is the ultimate goal of mediation
a. To help the disputants to come to a consensus of their own.
b. To render a peaceful resolution
c. Both a and b
d. Nota
2. Compare and differentiate Restorative
Justice from Retributive Justice.
(Methods, Techniques, and Strategies of
Negotiation, Arbitration, Mediation, and
Conciliation).
Retributive justice focuses on the past by determining the person
to be blamed for the crime committed, while restorative justice
______
a. Requires that the punishment fit the crime and that like cases
be treated alike.
b. Wrongdoers deserve blame and punishment in direct
proportion to the harm inflicted
c. Focused on determining the following what law was broken.
d. Focuses on the future to determine the matters to be
considered so that the crime will not be repeated.
Restorative justice is an approach focused on determining the
following, except:
a. What is the harm resulted from the crime
b. What law was broken
c. What needs to be done to repair the harm
d. Who is responsible for repairing the harm
The following are the distinctions between
retributive justice and restorative justice:
Retributive justice is an approach focused on determining the
following:
• What law was broken;
• Who broke it; and
• How shall offenders be punished?

Restorative justice, on the other hand, is an approach

focused on determining the following:
• What is the harm resulted from the crime;
• What needs to be done to repair the harm; and
• Who is responsible for repairing the harm?
• Retributive justice considers a crime as an act against
the State, while restorative justice considers a crime as
an act against the victim and the community;
• In retributive justice, the control of crimes lies to the
criminal justice system, while in restorative justice, the
control of crimes lies to the community;
• In retributive justice, the community is represented by
the State, while in restorative justice, the community is
the facilitator in the restorative process;
• Retributive justice focuses on the past by determining
the person to be blamed for the crime committed, while
restorative justice focuses on the future to determine the
matters to be considered so that the crime will not be
repeated;
3. Understand and Interpret R.A. 9285
“Alternative Dispute Resolution Act of
2004” and other applicable policies
and issuances of the Court or Agency
concern.
The Office for Alternative Dispute Resolution (OADR) is as an
agency attached to the Department of Justice. It shall have a
Secretariat and shall be headed by ___________
a. Sec of justice
b. President
c. Secretary
d. Executive director
Shall be charged with the establishment and maintenance of a
central repository of ADR laws, rules and regulations,
jurisprudence, books, articles, and other information about ADR
in the Philippines and elsewhere.
a. Secretariat
b. Public information and Promotion Division
c. Training Division
d. Nota
STATE THE DIVISIONS OF OADR
The OADR shall have the following staff and service divisions, among others:
a. Secretariat – shall provide necessary support and discharge such other functions
and duties as may be directed by the Executive Director.
b. Public information and Promotion Division – shall be charged with the
dissemination of information, the promotion of the importance and public acceptance
of mediation, conciliation, arbitration or any combination thereof and other ADR
forms as a means of achieving speedy and efficient means of resolving all disputes
and to help in the promotion, development and expansion of the use of ADR.
c. Training Division – shall be charged with the formulation of effective standards
for the training of ADR practitioners; conduct of training in accordance with such
standards; issuance of certifications of training to ADR practitioners and ADR service
providers who have undergone the professional training provided by the OADR; and
the coordination of the development, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of
government and private sector ADR programs.
d. Records and Library Division – shall be charged with the establishment and
maintenance of a central repository of ADR laws, rules and regulations,
jurisprudence, books, articles, and other information about ADR in the Philippines
and elsewhere. (Art. 2.4., IRR, RA 9285)
Members of Advisory Council of Office for Alternative Dispute
Resolution of shall be appointed by the _____________
a. President
b. DOJ Secretary
c. Executive Director
d. Secretary
ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION
ACT OF 2004 (R.A. No. 9285)
What is the Office for Alternative Dispute Resolution?
The Office for Alternative Dispute Resolution (OADR) is as
an agency attached to the Department of Justice. It shall have a
Secretariat and shall be headed by an Executive Director, who
shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines, taking into
consideration the recommendation of the Secretary of Justice.
(Article 2.1., IRR, RA 9285)
WHAT IS ADVISORY COUNCIL?
There is also created an Advisory Council composed of a
representative from each of the following:
a. Mediation profession;
b. Arbitration profession;
c. ADR organizations;
d. IBP; and
e. Academe.
The members of the Council, who shall be appointed by the
Secretary of Justice upon the recommendation of the OADR
Executive Director, shall choose a Chairman from among
themselves. (Art. 2.5., IRR, RA 9285)
The following are the powers of OADR, except:
a. To act as appointing authority of mediators and arbitrators
when the parties agree in writing that it shall be empowered to
do so.
b. To certify those who have successfully completed the regular
professional training programs provided by the OADR.
c. To charge for services rendered such as, among others, for
training and certifications of ADR provider.
d. To accept donations, grants and other assistance from local
and foreign sources.
e. Nota
As a Rule, ADR act __________that a mediator shall have
special qualifications by background or profession.
a. Requires
b. Does not require
c. Does not care
d. Really care
 IS IT REQUIRED THAT A MEDIATOR HAS SPECIAL
QUALIFICATIONS BY BACKGROUND OR
PROFESSION?

• As a Rule, ADR act does not require that a mediator shall

have special qualifications by background or profession
unless the special qualifications of a mediator are required
in the mediation agreement or by the mediation parties.
(Sec. 13, RA 9285)
A mediator shall refrain from giving legal or technical advice and
otherwise engaging in counseling or advocacy.
a. IMPARTIALLY
b. CONFIDENTIALITY
c. CONSENT AND SELF-DETERMINATION
d. SEPARATION OF MEDIATION FROM COUNSELING AND LEGAL
ADVICE
A mediator shall make reasonable efforts to ensure that each
party understands the nature and character of the mediation
proceeding.
a. IMPARTIALLY
b. CONFIDENTIALITY
c. CONSENT AND SELF-DETERMINATION
d. SEPARATION OF MEDIATION FROM COUNSELING AND LEGAL
ADVICE
A mediator shall recognize and put in mind that the primary
responsibility of resolving a dispute and the shaping of a
voluntary and uncoerced settlement rests with the parties.
a. IMPARTIALLY
b. CONFIDENTIALITY
c. CONSENT AND SELF-DETERMINATION
d. SEPARATION OF MEDIATION FROM COUNSELING AND LEGAL
ADVICE
 ETHICAL CONDUCT OF A MEDIATOR
COMPETENCE
It is not required that a mediator shall have special qualifications by
background or profession unless the special qualifications of a mediator
shall:
a. maintain the continually upgrade his/her professional competence in
mediation skills;
b. ensure that his/her qualifications, training and experience are known to
and accepted by the parties; and
c. serve only when his/her qualifications, training and experience enable
him/her to meet the reasonable expectations of the parties and shall not
hold himself/herself out or give the impression that he/she does not have.
Upon the request of a mediation party, an individual who is
requested to serve as mediator shall disclose his/her qualifications to
mediate a dispute. (Article 3.5., IRR, RA 9285)
IMPARTIALLY
A mediator shall maintain impartiality.
a. Before accepting a mediation, an individual who is
requested to serve as a mediator shall: make an inquiry that is
reasonable under the circumstances to determine whether there
are known facts that a reasonable individual would consider likely
to affect the impartiality of the mediator, including a financial or
personal interest in the outcome of the mediation and any existing
or past relationship with a party of foreseeable participant in the
mediation; and disclose to the mediation parties any such fact
known or learned as soon as practical before accepting a
mediation.
b. If a mediator learns any fact described in paragraph (a) of
this Article after accepting a mediation, the mediator shall disclose
it as soon as practicable to the mediation parties. (Article 3.7., IRR,
RA 9285)
CONFIDENTIALITY
A mediator shall keep in utmost confidence all
confidential information obtained in the course of the
mediation process.
A mediator shall discuss issues of confidentiality and
the extent of confidentiality provided in any private
sessions or caucuses that the mediator holds with a party.
(Article 3.8., IRR, RA 9285)
CONSENT AND SELF-DETERMINATION
A mediator shall make reasonable efforts to ensure that each party
understands the nature and character of the mediation proceeding including
private caucuses, the issues, the available options, the alternatives to non-
settlement, and that each party is free and able to make whatever choices
he/she desires regarding participation in mediation generally and regarding
specific settlement options.
If a mediator believes that a party, who is not represented by counsel, is
unable to understand, or fully participate, the mediation proceedings for any
reason, a mediator may either:
A. Limit the scope of the mediation proceedings in a manner consistent
with the party's ability to participate, and/or recommend that the party obtain
appropriate assistance in order to continue with the process; or terminate the
mediation proceedings.
B. A mediator shall recognize and put in mind that the primary
responsibility of resolving a dispute and the shaping of a voluntary and
uncoerced settlement rests with the parties. (Article 3.9., IRR, RA 9285)
SEPARATION OF MEDIATION FROM COUNSELING AND LEGAL
ADVICE
a. Except in evaluative mediation or when the parties so request, a
mediator shall: refrain from giving legal or technical advice and otherwise
engaging in counseling or advocacy; and abstain from expressing his/her
personal opinion on the rights and duties of the parties and the merits of
any proposal made.
b. Where appropriate and where either or both parties are not
represented by counsel, a mediator shall; recommend that the parties seek
outside professional advice to help them make informed decision and to
understand the implication of any proposal; and suggest that the parties
seek independent legal and/or technical advice before a settlement
agreement is signed.
c. without the consent of al parties, and for a reasonable time under
the particular circumstance, a mediator who also practices another
profession shall not establish a professional relationship in that other
profession with one of the parties, or any person or entity, in a substantially
and factually related matter. (Article 3.10., IRR, RA 9285)
It is not required that a mediator shall have special qualifications
by background or profession unless the special qualifications of a
mediator shall, except:
a. Maintain the continually upgrade his/her professional
competence in mediation skills.
b. The mediator does not have the qualifications, training and
experience to enable him/her to meet the reasonable
expectations of the parties.
c. Ensure that his/her qualifications, training and experience are
known to and accepted by the parties.
d. Nota
 WHAT ARE THE GROUNDS WHEREIN A MEDIATOR
MAY REFUSE OR WITHDRAW SUCH?

A mediator may refuse from acting as such, withdraw or may be

compelled to withdraw from mediator proceedings under the following
circumstances:
a. If any of the parties so requests the mediator to withdraw;
b. The mediator does not have the qualifications, training and
experience to enable him/her to meet the reasonable expectations of
the parties;
c. Where the mediator's impartially is in question;
d. If continuation of the process would violate any ethical standards;
e. If the safety of any of the parties would be jeopardized;
f. If the mediator is unable to provide effective services;
g. In case of conflict of interest; and
h. In any of the following instances, if the mediator is satisfied that:
1. One or more of the parties is/are not acting in good faith;
2. The parties' agreement would be illegal or involve the commission of
a crime;
3. Continuing the dispute resolution would give rise to an appearance
of impropriety;
4. Continuing with the process would cause significant harm to a non-
participating person or to the public; or
5. Continuing discussion would not be in the best interest of the
parties, their minor children or the dispute resolution process. (Article
3.5., IRR, RA 9285)
ETHICAL CONDUCT OF A MEDIATOR
COMPETENCE
It is not required that a mediator shall have special qualifications by
background or profession unless the special qualifications of a mediator
shall:
a. maintain the continually upgrade his/her professional competence in
mediation skills;
b. ensure that his/her qualifications, training and experience are known
to and accepted by the parties; and
c. serve only when his/her qualifications, training and experience
enable him/her to meet the reasonable expectations of the parties and
shall not hold himself/herself out or give the impression that he/she
does not have.
Upon the request of a mediation party, an individual who is requested
to serve as mediator shall disclose his/her qualifications to mediate a dispute.
(Article 3.5., IRR, RA 9285)
A mediation service provider may determine such mediation fee
as is reasonable taking into consideration the following factors,
among others, except.
a. The social class or standing of both parties
b. The complexity of the case.
c. The number of hours spent in mediation.
d. The training, experience and stature of mediators.
As a general rule, a mediator, after having been engaged and having
acted as mediator of a dispute between the parties, following a failed
mediation ______________
a. Shall not act as arbitrator of the same dispute
b. May also act as arbitrator of the same dispute
c. May also act as arbitrator of the same dispute if the parties
expressly authorized
d. Nota
MEDIATION-ARBITRATION OR MED-ARB is a two-step
dispute resolution process involving mediation and then
followed by arbitration

No person shall, having been engaged and having

acted as mediator of a dispute between the parties,
following a failed mediation, act as arbitrator of the same
dispute, unless the parties, in a written agreement,
expressly authorize the mediator to hear and decide the
case as an arbitrator
A stage wherein the neutral third party focuses on the interest, improve
cooperation, minimizing impact of problems and eliminating adversarial
attitude of both parties.
a. Preventive And Cooperation Stage
b. Dispute De-escalation Control and Real Time Resolution Stage
c. Facilitated Resolution Stage
d. Binding Resolution Stage
4. Discuss and apply the principles of
Police Critical Incident Management
An essential element of crisis management that focuses on
mitigating the adverse effects that may be brought about by an
incident.
a. Incident management
b. Consequence management
c. Risk management
d. A and b
 Essential elements of Crisis Management
There are two primary essential elements in crisis management,
they are:
1.Incident Management - This refers to an act of containing the
situation within a certain level, mostly through law enforcement
interventions (Dr. Castillo, and Gabao, 2021).
2.Consequence Management - This is an act that focuses on
mitigating the adverse effects that may be brought about by an
incident. This is achieved by utilizing non-law enforcement
elements, such as medical and fire services (Dr. Castillo, and
Gabao, 2021).
It pertains to the study of the potential crises that might arise. It
includes an evaluation of a recognized dangerous condition to
determine the risk or treat they present
a. Risk Analysis
b. An Activation Protocol
c. Chain of Command
d. A Command Center Plan
10 essential elements for an effective crisis
management plan":
• Risk Analysis-it pertains to the study of the potential crises that might arise. It includes
an evaluation of a recognized dangerous condition to determine the risk or treat they
present (NSC, 2012).

• An Activation Protocol- This serves as the trigger for the crisis management plan,
with the sense of urgency; this defines the circumstances that activate a particular crisis
response.
• A Chain of Command- this refers to the succession of leadership from superior to a
subordinate through which the command is exercised, this is also known as Command
Channel (NSC, 2012).
• A Command Center Plan = this refers to the location or place that will serve as the
base of operations for the team during a crisis. It also deals with the supplies and utilities
the team will require (Marker, 2020).
 Command Post is a unit's or subunit's headquarters where the commander and the staff
perform their activities. It is the principal facility employed by the commander to control
operations
• Response Action Plans- This refers to the detailed planning on how the
organization will respond to various crises incidents. This planning includes
assigning responsibility for each task (Marker, 2020).
• Internal Communication Programs = this pertains to the systems and
backup methods for members of the crisis management team to communicate
with each other.
• External Communication Programs This refers to the plans for
communicating with the public and key external stakeholders. This includes the
appointment of a spokesperson.
• Resources This pertains to everything the crisis management team might need,
from hardhats to credit cards and a standby public relations advisor.
Information resources - which include stakeholder
agreements, including union contracts, maps of facilities, timelines, flowcharts of
key processes and procedures, supplier contracts, benefits information, and
more (Marker, 2020).
• Training
• A Review
It Is the stage of advance planning, organization and coordination and
control in response to an anticipated future crisis occurrence.
a. PRO-ACTIVE PHASES
b. PREDICTION
c. REACTIVE PHASE
d. POST-ACTION AND ASSESSMENT
PHASES OF CRISIS MANAGEMENT
PRO-ACTIVE PHASES
PREDICTION
PREVENTION
PREPARATION

REACTIVE PHASE
PERFORMANCE
POST-ACTION AND ASSESSMENT
PREDICTION
The first stage of anticipating future crisis
occurrences through the following;
1. Update- Intelligence – involves the collection of
information from variety of sources as basis of actions and
plan; those that are related to crisis management
contingency planning.
2. Events – are those incidents that are already passed
which can facilitate analysis necessary for identification of
probable threat groups, targets and necessary for advance
planning.
It is the first stage of anticipating future crisis occurrences.
a. PREDICTION
b. PREVENTION
c. PREPARATION
d. POST-ACTION AND ASSESSMENT
When a crisis occur despite the pro-active effort, the
organization concerned must be prepare to perform the crisis
management in accordance with their plan.
a. PRO-ACTIVE PHASES
b. PREDICTION
c. REACTIVE PHASE
d. POST-ACTION AND ASSESSMENT
It is the action stage, the implementation of the crisis
management contingency plan.
a. PREDICTION
b. PREVENTION
c. PREPARATION
d. PERFORMANCE
e. THE POST ACTION STAGE
In hostage taking situation, to successfully negotiate, there must be
a. A highly disciplined and secured chain of command
b. A skilled and trained negotiator
c. need to live on the part of the hostage taker
d. A mutual understanding between the offender and the victim
5. Identify and demonstrate the
various Types, Characteristics,
Phases, and methods of Critical
Incident Management
Natural calamities and disasters are the responsibilities of the
________ while PNP shall act as the _________
a. National and Local Peace and Order Council : Support
Personnel
b. National and Local Disaster Risk Reduction and Management
Council : First Responder
c. National and Local Peace and Order Council : First
Responder
d. National and Local Disaster Risk Reduction and Management
Council : Support Personnel
TYPES OF CRITICAL INCIDENTS
(PNP POP)
NATURAL CALAMITY AND DISASTER
Natural calamities and disasters are the
responsibilities of the National and Local Disaster Risk
Reduction and Management Council (NDRRMC)

The PNP shall act as the first responder in the

affected area in order to provide area security and support
in the conduct of search, rescue and retrieval operations to
be spearheaded by the area DRRMCs.
HUMAN INDUCED INCIDENTS
As a matter of policy, human-induced (man-made)
critical incidents are the responsibilities of the National and
Local Peace and Order Council (NPOC)

Response of the PNP:

a) Manage an incident that could be resolved by ordinary
police response without the involvement of the Crisis
Management Committee (CMC);
b) Manage an incident that needs a CMC– directed operation
requiring the implementation of special tasks by one or more
of the urgent services of the Philippine government.
Who is designated as Cabinet - Officer Primarily Responsible (C-OPR)for
threats to peace and order such as civil disturbance, violent labor strikes,
riots, anarchy, disorderly mass demonstrations.
a. President
b. SILG
c. Vice President
d. Secretary of DND
 The Secretary of the Interior and Local Government (SILG) is
designated as the Cabinet - Officer Primarily Responsible (C-OPR)
for threats to peace and order such as civil disturbance, violent
labor strikes, riots, anarchy, disorderly mass demonstrations.

The SILG acts also as the Vice Chairman on Disaster

Preparedness, NDRRMC. All actions of the PNP in addressing the
crisis are in support of the POC - CMCs (Peace And Order Council –
Crisis Management Committee) and DRRMCs with common
objectives of saving lives and properties, resolution of the critical
incidents at the earliest possible time, and restoration of normalcy
in the affected areas .
NDRRMC Membership According to RA 10121
(2010) NDRRMC should consist of the following
•The Secretary of the Department of National Defense (DND) as Chairperson.
•The Secretary of the Department of the Interior and Local Government
(DILG) as Vice Chairperson for Disaster Preparedness
•The Secretary of the Department of Social Welfare and Development
(DSWD) as Vice Chairperson for Disaster Response
•The Secretary of the Department of Science and Technology (DOST) as Vice
Chairperson for Disaster Prevention and Mitigation
•The Director-General of the National Economic and Development Authority
(NEDA) as Vice Chairperson for Disaster Rehabilitation and Recovery
 The Office of Civil Defense (OCD) is the
implementing arm of the National Disaster Risk
Reduction and Management Councils.
They have the primary mission of administering a
comprehensive national civil defense and disaster risk
reduction and management program by providing
leadership in the continuous development of strategic
and systematic approaches as well as measures to
reduce the vulnerabilities and risks to hazards and
manage the consequences of disasters.
In this level of man-made critical incident alert , there is a strong
possibility that manmade Critical Incidents may occur within a short
period of time.
a. Level 1 (Low)
b. Level 2 (Moderate)
c. Level 3 (High)
d. Level 4 (Extreme)
 PNP's Alert Level During Man Made Critical Incidents The Revised
Philippine National Police Operational Procedures (2013) posits Four Alert
Levels during Human-Induced (Man -Made) Critical Incident.
The Appropriate man-made critical incident alert level shall be
disseminated to all concerned offices through the PNP National Operations
Center (NOC) . They are as follows:
Level 1 (Low) There is no information to suggest a specific man-made Critical
Incident may occur.
Level 2 (Moderate) Man-made Critical Incident is possible, but not likely.
Level 3 (High) There is a strong possibility that manmade Critical Incidents
may occur within a short period of time.
Level 4 (Extreme) A man-made Critical Incident has just occurred or has just
been preempted; or incidents are expected.
 PNP's Stages in Disaster Management The Revised Philippine
National Police Operational Procedures (2013), introduced Three
levels/ Stages in Natural Disaster Managemert, They are as follows:

Level I (Green) - Pre- Disaster Stage

Level 2 (Red) - Disaster Report Stage - It is when there is an official
forecast of an incoming natural disaster in the country and when an
unexpected natural disaster suddenly occurs in the country .This is
where the Disaster Incident Management activities are done.
Level 3 (White) - Post-Disaster Stage - It is when the Natural
disaster is officially over, and Support to Recovery and Rehabilitation
Efforts are being done.
In critical task of CMC, this refers to crisis management as a political
communication.
a. Sense making
b. Decision making
c. Meaning making
d. Terminating
e. Learning
 The Five Critical task of CMC
1. Sense making- considered as the classical assessment step in
decision making
2. Decision making- is both the act of coming to a decision as the
implementation of that decision.
3. Meaning making- refers to crisis management as a political
communication
4. Terminating- termination of crisis is only possible if the
committee, through its Chairperson, correctly handles the
accountability question.
5. Learning- refers to the actual learning from a crisis
 Crisis Management Committee
The Crisis Management Committee (CMC) is a governing body
that takes decisive actions to resolve crises or emergencies. Its goa
is the formulation of crisis management policies, integration and
orchestration of government and public efforts towards the control
o crisis or incidents.
Members of the CMC are both elected and appointed public
officials who have a special responsibility to safeguard society from
the adverse consequences of the crisis. It is important to note that
the members of CMC are accountable not only to proper authority
but also to the people.
Incident Command System
The Incident Command system (ICS) is a set of personnel,
policies, procedures, facilities, and equipment, integrated into a
common organizational structure designed to improve emergency
response operations of all types and complexities.
It is founded upon a flexible, scalable response organization
providing a common framework within which people can collaborate
effectively, since these people may be drawn from multiple agencies
that do not routinely work together.
It is designed to give standard response and operation
procedures to reduce the problems and potential for
miscommunication on such incidents.
1. Which refers to a turning point in the course of something decisive or
crucial time, stage or event? It may also mean a time of great danger or
trouble, the outcome of which decides whether possible bad
consequences will follow.
A. Disaster
B. Risk
C. Crisis
D. Incident
Which is not a positive effect of time in hostage crisis negotiation?
A. Abrupt tactical movement
B. Reduced anxiety
C. Allow formation of Stockholm syndrome
D. Increase human needs
Identify the term conducted by the negotiating team prior to turnover
to another set of negotiating team.
A. Operational debrief
B. Psychological debrief
C. Hot debrief
D. Cold debrief
What is the time frame in minutes which is considered the most
dangerous phase in most hostage taking situations?
A. 44319
B. 5 -15
C. 10 – 30
D. 15 - 45
The Crisis Negotiating Team The Crisis
Negotiating Team (CNT),
also called the Crisis Management Team
(CNT), provides verbal and tactical support to the
SWAT Team, and is responsible for controlling a
barricaded suspect or hostage situation.
He/she advises the Incident/On-Scene Commander on the best
negotiating strategies and co-ordinates the process with the swat and
the forward command reseources.
a. The Primary Negotiator
b. The Secondary Negotiator
c. The Intelligence/Recorder Negotiator
d. The Board Negotiator
e. The Negotiation Team Leader/Coordinator
The Primary Negotiator Primary Negotiator
is the principal negotiator. Their task are :
• He/She is actually engaged in conversation with the hostage-taker (s).
He/She negotiates within the parameters set by the Negotiation Team
Leader;
• He/She also gathers intelligence while in the process of negotiation
and relay them to the Negotiation Team Leader;
• He/She takes part in team meetings and has understanding of all
plans; and
• Block of conversation throughout the incident.
The Secondary Negotiator
The Secondary Negotiatorgives direct support to the Primary
Negotiator in interpreting and implementing the Incident/ On-Scene
Commander's overall strategy through negotiating tactics.
Their other tasks are:
• He/She is also responsible for the safety of the principal negotiator
when both are engaged in "face to face" situations; and
• He/She acts as the substitute of the primary negotiator if the latter
becomes weary in the process.
The Board Negotiator
The Board Negotiator is the "board person" who maintains a
visual display of all information relevant to the negotiations, i.e.
deadlines, demands and details of persons known to be in the
stronghold.
He/She has a thorough understanding of all plans; and He/ she is
the substitute of the fourth negotiator.
The Intelligence/Recorder Negotiator
The Intelligence/Recorder Negotiator provides a communication
link between the negotiators and the remainder of the police command
structure. He/She also supports the role of the Secondary Negotiator in
tactical development and at the same time, maintains a detailed log of
events.
Their other tasks are :
• He/She is a trained psychologist and an interpreter;
• He/She studies and provides a psychological profile of the hostage -
taker's as a basis for decision making and subsequent course of action;
It is done to build rapport and get the trust of the hostage-takers and
should likewise be taken as an opportunity to gather intelligence from
the stronghold.
a. Emergency Response Plan
b. Breakout Plan
c. Delivery Plan
d. Surrender Plan
e. Hostage Reception/Release
Decisions and Plans in dealing with
Hostage Taking incident
1. Emergency Response Plan
• Emergency response highly depends on the threat posed by the
hostage takers. Use of chemical agents should not be ruled out;
• Emergency response personnel should be properly identified through
uniforms and visible markings; and
• The Chief of the Service Support Group should ensure that vehicles
are readily available to support any evacuation and other medical
needs
2. Breakout Plan
•The more hostages, the greater possibility of a breakout, which police
elements should be prepared for. In drawing out a breakout plan,
counter action against the reaction of hostage-takers should be given
priority consideration. Possible exits of hostages and possible escape of
hostage takers shall be included in the plan;
• Possibility of breakout shall be considered immediately upon drawing
out of negotiation strategies. This should be considered as one of the
priority contingencies; and
•Breakout plans should not be used as a go signal for assault unless the
escaping hostages are threatened by the hostage-takers
It should not be used as a go signal for assault unless the escaping
hostages are threatened by the hostage-takers.
a. Emergency Response Plan
b. Breakout Plan
c. Delivery Plan
d. Surrender Plan
e. Hostage Reception/Release
3. Delivery Plan
• Delivery can be very dangerous unless carefully planned. All aspects of its
execution must be known and understood by all police elements including all
Support elements. This is to ensure that whatever happens or when the hostage-
takers change plans at the middle of the execution, everybody knows how to react.
Safety for everybody is still the primary concern;
• Delivery plan should be authorized and drawn with the Incident /On-Scene
Commander;
• Actions for all elements should be properly coordinated and if possible, rehearsed
before execution.. The delivery man, the negotiators, and members of the SWAT
should have communication throughout the delivery;
• No action should be executed until the hostage-takers understand every detail of
the delivery. Delivery must be stopped as soon as the hostage takers do something
out of the agreed plan; and
• Delivery is done to build rapport and get the trust of the hostage-takers and should
likewise be taken as an opportunity to gather intelligence from the stronghold.
4. Surrender Plan
• Surrender plan should be drawn in a way that the hostages' lives will not
be jeopardized. This means the procedure should include release of
hostages prior to actual surrender;
• Police elements, especially members of the SWAT, should not rule out the
possibility of "suicide by cop"; and
• Reception party for the surrender should be properly briefed of the
procedures agreed upon between the negotiator and the hostage taker. It
would be convenient if the negotiator is part of the reception party as well.
5. Hostage Reception/Release
• Released hostages should not be taken for granted. Released
hostages are the best source of intelligence. Hostage reception party
should be composed of medical personnel and investigators; and
• For security purposes, released hostages should be contained and
isolated. Investigators should not rule out the possibility of Stockholm
Syndrome among these hostages. Such police action must be explained
to the hostages to avoid legal complications
It can be very dangerous unless carefully planned. All aspects of its
execution must be known and understood by all police elements
including all contingencies. Safety for all police personnel involved is a
priority consideration.
a. Emergency Response Plan
b. Breakout Plan
c. Delivery Plan
d. Surrender Plan
e.
6. Collection Plan
• Collection can be very dangerous unless carefully planned. All aspects of its execution must
be known and understood by all police elements including all contingencies. Safety for all
police personnel involved is a priority consideration;
• No collection should be initiated without the authority from incident /On Scene Commander;
• Actions for all elements should be properly coordinated and if possible, rehearsed before
execution. The Police personnel tasked to make the collection, the negotiators, and members
of the SWAT should have an open line of communication throughout the collection process.
Likewise, the primary negotiator and hostage-takers should have a constant communication in
the duration of the collection;
• No action should be executed until the hostage-takers understand every detail of the
collection. Collection must be aborted as soon as the hostage takers show some actions that
pose danger to the police and the hostages;
• In cases where the collection is done for an illness-stricken hostage, paramedics should
handle the collection and secured by uniformed policemen; and
• Collection should also be taken as an opportunity to gather intelligence from the stronghold.
The main strategy for settling disputes in Katarungang Pambarangay.
a. To provide a venue for the disputing parties to search for a solution
that is mutually acceptable.
b. To assist the parties in discussing the possible amicable settlement
of their disputes.
c. To promote autonomy among parties in settling their disputes.
d. All of these
e. Collection Plan
The primary role of the Katarungang Pambarangay System.
a. To provide a venue for the disputing parties to search for a solution
that is mutually acceptable.
b. To assist the parties in discussing the possible amicable settlement
of their disputes.
c. To promote autonomy among parties in settling their disputes.
d. All of these
How shall the vacancies in the Pangkat be filled up?
a. Shall be chosen by the parties to a dispute
b. shall be chosen by chairman of Lupon
c. shall be chosen by secretary of Lupon
d. shall be chosen by chairman of pangkat
 (30%) (50%) (20%)
Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
A. CRIMINOLOGICAL RESEARCH 1 AND 2 Percentage Weight Number of
Items Recall information, Explain, Interpret, Using the Understanding, hypothesizing, Generating
and and summarize, information in critiquing,
The registered criminologist can perform the Recognizing, examine another familiar Comparing, experimenting Designing,
Distribution Distribution
competencies under the following sub-topics: listing, describing, paraphrase, situation organizing, , judging constructing,
classify deconstructing, planning,
retrieving, naming, Implementing interrogating, producing,
20% 100 finding carrying out, using, finding inventing
executing
4% 20

1. Recall and explicate the use of the

different types, kinds, and classification of 1.0% 5 3 1 1 - - -
research, and its methodologies including the
parts of a Thesis/Research/Scientific Article.

2. Explain or apply the rules adopted in

writing technical papers under the APA -
American Psychological Association, under
the following but not limited to: Basic
Formatting of Thesis/Research Paper; Verb, 1.20% 6 - 1 4 1 - -
Tone, Punctuations, Rules in writing
Numbers, Tables, and Figures; Quotation and
Paraphrasing, Citations and Reference.
3. Recall and apply the DOs and DONTs of the Ethical .40% 2 - - 1 1 - -
issues in research writing.
5. Understand the research design, Research
Framework,
4. Apply the rulesStatement of the
in developing Problem,
a problem, collect and
gathering
Hypothesis,of primary and secondary
application, data sources.
and relevance ofand data .40% 2 - - 1 1 -
collection technique
Literatures and Related studies, Research 1.0% 5 - 1 3 1 -
Designs, Instrument or data gathering tools,
sampling techniques and applicable statistical
tools.
1.Recall and explicate the use of the
different types, kinds, and
classification of research, and its
methodologies including the parts of
a Thesis/Research/Scientific Article.
It is the primary tool for advancing any body of knowledge, including
the field of criminal justice
a. Research
b. Investigation
c. Criminological research
d. Nota
It is a systematic and accumulative study of issues related to the causes
and consequences of crime and it lies at the heart of criminological
theory, influences social policy development, as well as informs criminal
justice practice.
a. Research
b. Investigation
c. Criminological research
d. Nota
 Research
is the primary tool for advancing any body of knowledge, including the
field of criminal justice. Research helps students, scholars, criminal justice
professionals and government policymakers identify what works in the areas
of law enforcement, corrections and crime prevention.
Criminological research
is a systematic and accumulative study of issues related to the causes
and consequences of crime, delinquency, and victimization, as well as the
operation of the criminal justice system, with an emphasis on police, courts,
and corrections.
It lies at the heart of criminological theory, influences social policy
development, as well as informs criminal justice practice. The ability to
collect, analyze and present empirical data is a core skill every student of
criminology must learn.
Parts of Research Paper
The structure of research paper follows the scientific method, it makes
the paper easier to follow by providing those familiar cues that help your
reader efficiently scan your information for:
• Why the topic is important (covered in the introduction);
• What the problem is (also covered in the introduction);
• What you did to try to solve the problem (covered in the methods
section);
• What you found (covered in the results section); and
• What you think your findings mean (covered in the discussion section)
1. Title Page
It is the first page of the paper that includes the name of the
paper. A "running heads", authors, and institutional affiliation of the
authors. The institutional affiliation is usually listed in an Author Note
that is placed towards the bottom of the title page. In some cases, the
Author Note also contains an acknowledgment of any funding support
and of any individuals that assisted with the research project.
2. Abstract
It is a one-paragraph summary of the entire study, typically no
more than 250 words in length (and in many cases it is well shorter
than that), the Abstract provides an overview of the study.
3. Introduction
It is the first major section of text in the paper, the Introduction
commonly describes the topic under investigation, summarizes or discusses
relevant prior research, identifies unresolved issues that the current research
will address, and provides an overview of the research that is to be described
in greater detail in the sections to follow.
4. Methods
It is a section which details how the research was performed. It
typically features a description of the participants/subjects that were involved,
the study design, the materials that were used, and the study procedure. If
there were multiple experiments, then each experiment may require a
separate Methods section. It is important to note that the Methods section
should be sufficiently detailed for another researcher to duplicate your
research.
5. Results
It is a section of the research which describes the data that was collected
and the results of any statistical tests that were performed. It may also be
prefaced by a description of the analysis procedure that was used. If there were
multiple experiments, then each experiment may require a separate Results
section.
6. Discussion
It is the final major section of text in the paper. The Discussion commonly
features a summary of the results that were obtained in the study, describes
how those results address the topic under investigation and/or the issues that
the research was designed to address, and may expand upon the implications
of those findings. Limitations and directions for future research are also
commonly addressed.
7. References
It is an alphabetized list of the sources that are cited in the paper (by the last
name of the first author of each source). Each reference should follow specific APA
guidelines regarding author names, dates, article titles, journal titles, journal volume
numbers, page numbers, book publishers, publisher locations, websites, and so on.
8. Tables and Figures
In APA style, each Table and each Figure is placed on a separate page and all
Tables and Figures are included after the References. Tables are included first,
followed by Figures. However, for some journals and undergraduate research
papers (such as the B.S. Research Paper or Honors Thesis), Tables and Figures may
be embedded in the text (depending on the instructor's or editor's policies)
9. Appendix
This includes supplementary information which is optional. In some cases,
additional information that is not critical to understanding the research paper, such
as a list of experiment stimuli, details of a secondary analysis, or programming code,
is provided. This is often placed in an Appendix.
It is defined as an attribute of an object of study. These are names that
are given to the variance the researcher wishes to explain.
a. Variance
b. Variables
c. Variation
d. Attributes
Elements of Research
1. Variables
2. Sampling
3. Random Selection
4. Random Assignment
5. Blinding
The term "thesis" comes from the Greek meaning __________, and
refers to an intellectual proposition.
a. something put forth
b. discussion
c. to discuss
d. to prove
THESIS"
 Theterm "thesis" comes from the Greek meaning "something put forth", and
refers to an intellectual proposition. "Dissertation" comes from the Latin
"dissertātiō", meaning "discussion".
Aristotle was the first philosopher to define the term thesis.
A thesis, or dissertation - is a document submitted in support of candidature
for an academic degree or professional qualification presenting the author's
research and findings. In some contexts, the word "thesis" or a cognate is
used for part of a bachelor's or master's course, while "dissertation" is
normally applied to a doctorate.
Part of Thesis Paper
1. Introduction
This chapter introduces the topic of the thesis to the reader. The
critical part of writing the Introduction is to establish the statement of
the problem and research questions. Basically, the author is justifying
to the reader why it is necessary to study this topic and what research
question(s) his, her study will answer. Usually, the topic is based around
a particular problem area that the author wants to focus on.
This includes a section on the following:
a. Statement of the Problem- information about the specific problem;
b. Background and Need- the background literature related to the
problem;
c. Purpose of the Study- the focus and goal of the study; and
d. Research Questions- what questions the study proposes to answer.
2. Review of the Literature
The next chapter introduces the reader to the research literature
related to the topic. The critical part of writing Chapter Two is to
identify the most relevant and significant research related to the topic
of the study rather than conduct an exhaustive search.
Basically, the author is informing the reader of the critical studies
that have been conducted related to this topic. This provides the reader
with the background information that he or she needs to understand
the problem(s) related to the topic .
3. Methods
The Third chapter explains the research methods and design that
were used to conduct the study. The critical part of writing Chapter
Three is to describe the actual procedures that were used to conduct
the study.
Basically, the author informs the reader of how the study was
conducted. Thus, he/ she needs to include detailed descriptions about
every aspect of the study.
4. Results
Chapter Four reports the results of the study. The critical part of
writing Chapter Four is to present the findings from the data collection
process in Chapter Three. Basically, the author is informing the reader
of what was discovered.
This chapter integrates a narrative, numerical, and/or tabular
presentation of the outcomes of the study, depending on whether the
author has conducted a qualitative or quantitative study.
In Chapter Four, the author will report the results of the data
analysis for each variable and measurement instrument that was
discussed in Chapter Three.
5. Discussion
The last chapter in the thesis, Chapter Five, discusses the results from Chapter Four
and draws conclusions about the study's findings. The critical part of writing Chapter Five
is to discuss the findings in relation to the statement of the problem and the research
questions that were identified in Chapter One.
The discussion section includes the significant findings and the researcher's
interpretation based on the results. The author may also discuss the relationship of his/
her findings to previous research conducted in the literature. Chapter Five also includes a
section on:
a. Limitations- It discusses the limitations or weaknesses of the study's design or
findings.
b. Recommendations for Future Research- the researcher, makes recommendations for
future areas of research that should be conducted related to your study (e.g., follow-
up. Additional recommendations could include those for actions, policies, or
procedures related to the study's findings.
c. Conclusions- the researcher will identify the critical conclusions about the results and
their implications.
Research is being undertaken within a framework of a set of ______
which means approaches either qualitative, quantitative and the
academic discipline in which you have been trained.
a. Validity
b. Philosophies (approach)
c. Research instrument
d. Research design
It is designed to collect data that may help develop a new theory about
a process or phenomenon. The researcher starts by making
observations or gathering data. Then, take a broad view of his/her data
and search for patterns. Also known as theory-building research.
a. Inductive Research Approach
b. Deductive Research Approach
c. Theory-testing research
d. theory-building research
Two Types of Research Approach
1. Inductive Research Approach
Inductive research, also known as theory-building research, is
designed to collect data that may help develop a new theory about a
process or phenomenon. The researcher starts by making observations
or gathering data. Then, take a broad view of his/her data and search
for patterns. Finally, he/she makes general conclusions that might be
incorporated into theories . Inductive reasoning moves from specific
observations to broad generalizations.
It is commonly used in scientific research, and it's especially associated
with quantitative research.
a. Inductive Research Approach
b. Deductive Research Approach
c. Theory-testing research
d. theory-building research
2. Deductive Research Approach
Deductive, or theory-testing, research is the opposite of
inductive research and moves from the broad to the specific.
Researchers choose a hypothesis and test its accuracy through
experimentation or observation .
It is commonly used in scientific research, and it's especially
associated with quantitative research. Here are the general steps for
deductive research :
a. Select a research problem and create a problem statement.
b. Develop falsifiable hypotheses.
c. Collect your data with appropriate measures.
d. Analyze and test your data. e. Decide whether to reject your null
hypothesis.
Classification of Research
The objective of basic research is to gain more comprehensive
knowledge or understanding of the subject under study, without
specific applications in mind .
a. Basic/ Fundamental Research
b. Applied Research
c. Exploratory Research
d. Descriptive Research
Basic/ Fundamental Research
Basic research is an investigation on basic principles and reasons
for occurrence of a particular event or process or phenomenon. The
objective of basic research is to gain more comprehensive knowledge
or understanding of the subject under study, without specific
applications in mind .
It provides a systematic and deep insight into a problem and
facilitates extraction of scientific and logical explanation and conclusion
on it. It helps build new frontiers of knowledge. The outcomes of basic
research form the basis for many applied research.
It is aimed at gaining knowledge or understanding to determine the
means by which a specific, recognized need may be met. It is meant to
offer knowledge that is applicable and implementable.
a. Basic/ Fundamental Research
b. Applied Research
c. Exploratory Research
d. Descriptive Research
Applied Research
In applied research one solves certain problems employing well
known and accepted theories and principles.
It is aimed at gaining knowledge or understanding to determine
the means by which a specific, recognized need may be met. It is meant
to offer knowledge that is applicable and implementable.
Kardo wanted to understand concepts, opinions, or experiences. If he is
going to gather in depth insights into a problem or generate new ideas
for research. What types of research should he conduct?
a. Qualitative
b. Quantitative
c. Mixed Research
d. Nota
According to data or information collected
Qualitative – (non-numerical data) to understand concepts, opinions, or experiences. It can be
used to gather in depth insights into a problem or generate new ideas for research.
Quantitative – (numerical data) involves measurement and assumes that the phenomena
under study can be measured.
Mixed Research
Mixed methods research combines elements of quantitative research and qualitative
research in order to answer the research question. Mixed methods can help in gaining a more
complete picture than a standalone quantitative or qualitative study, as it integrates benefits of
both methods.
Mixed methods research may be the right choice if the research process suggests that
quantitative or qualitative data alone will not sufficiently answer the research question.
Here are several common reasons for using mixed methods research:
Generalizability
Contextualization
Credibility
• Generalizability
Qualitative research usually has a smaller sample size, and thus is not
generalizable. In mixed methods research, this comparative weakness is
mitigated by the comparative strength of "large N," externally valid
quantitative research.
• Contextualization
Mixing methods allows the researcher to put findings in context and add
richer detail to his/her conclusions. Using qualitative data to illustrate
quantitative findings can help "put meat on the bones" of the analysis.
• Credibility
Using different methods to collect data on the same subject can make the
results more credible. If the qualitative and quantitative data converge, this
strengthens the validity of the research's conclusions. This process is called
triangulation.
Other Types of Research
1. Exploratory Research
Exploratory research is a methodology approach that investigates
research questions that have not previously been studied in depth. It is
often qualitative in nature. However, a study with a large sample
conducted in an exploratory manner can be quantitative as well. It is
also often referred to as interpretive research or a grounded theory
approach due to its flexible and open-ended nature.
2. Descriptive Research
Descriptive research aims to accurately and systematically
describe a population, situation or phenomenon. It can answer what,
where, when and how questions, but not why questions. A descriptive
research design can use a wide variety of research methods to
investigate one or more variables. Descriptive research is an
appropriate choice when the research aim is to identify characteristics,
frequencies, trends, and categories.
3. Explanatory Research
Explanatory research is a research method that explores why
something occurs when limited information is available. It helps in
increasing the understanding of a given topic, ascertain how or why a
particular phenomenon is occurring, and predict future occurrences.
It can also be explained as a "cause and effect" model,
investigating patterns and trends in existing data that haven't been
previously investigated. For this reason, it is often considered a type of
causal research .
4. Correlational Research
A correlational research design investigates relationships
between variables without the researcher controlling or manipulating
any of them. A correlation reflects the strength and/or direction of the
relationship between two (or more) variables. The direction of a
correlation can be either positive or negative.
5. Longitudinal Research
Longitudinal research focuses on how certain measurements
change over time without manipulating any variables. Researchers
repeatedly examine the same individuals to detect any changes that
might occur over a period of time. It is a type of correlational research
in which researchers observe and collect data on a number of variables
without trying to influence those variables.
6. Cross-sectional Research
A cross-sectional study is a type of research design in which the
researcher collects data from many different individuals at a single
point in time. The variables are observed without influencing them.
Researchers in economics, psychology, medicine, epidemiology, and the
other social sciences all make use of cross-sectional studies in their
work.
7. Action Research
Action research refers to the process of examining a person's or
one's actions, assessing their effectiveness in bringing about the
desired outcome and choosing a course of action based on your results.
This is typically used in educational settings for teachers and principals
to perform a type of self-assessment and course correction.
8. Policy-Oriented Research
Policy-oriented research is designed to inform or understand one
or more aspects of the public and social policy process, including
decision making and policy formulation, implementation, and
evaluation.
9. Comparative Research
Comparative research is designed to identify similarities and
differences between two individuals, subjects or groups. It is conducted
mainly to explain and gain a better understanding of the causal
processes involved in the creation of an event, feature or relationship
usually by bringing together variations in the explanatory variable or
variables.
What kind of research describes a condition or a given state of affairs in
terms of specified aspects or factors?
A. Correlation research
B. Research framework
C. Intervention research
D. Descriptive research
A criminologist studies an offender not only to establish the motives
and other extraneous factors that impel him to commit the crime but
also to gain a general understanding of the offender's specific case and
apply this knowledge to a group which is made of similarly situated
individuals. This is a characteristic of qualitative research known as
_____.
A. Specificity to generalization
B. Contextualization
C. Human understanding and interpretation
D. Internal analysis
 Contextualization gives credibility and support to our research project
as a whole. Research contextualizing takes various shapes and forms.
First, we contextualize our research in relation to the established
literature and prior studies. Second, we contextualize our research by linking
it to (a) the specific context in which it was conducted like institution and
workplace (micro-level); and (b) the location or general setting of the study
like geographic territory and location (macro-level). Based on these two
main ways of contextualizing research, a further two-fold wider
contextualization of our research project will be identified too, namely,
linking our research to other disciplines (domains of study) and other
contexts (locations).
 Generalization, which is an act of reasoning that involves drawing
broad inferences from particular observations, is widely-acknowledged
as a quality standard in quantitative research, but is more controversial
in qualitative research. The goal of most qualitative studies is not to
generalize but rather to provide a rich, contextualized understanding of
some aspect of human experience through the intensive study of
particular phenomenon or individual.
What is the part of the research paper that contains the procedures in
data collection, analysis of data as well as the source of data?
A. Title
B. Introduction
C. Abstract
D. Methodology
This is the primary focus of crime research wherein information is
collected without changing the environment, that is, nothing is
manipulated. Sometimes these are referred to as “correlational” or
“observational” studies.
a. Evaluation research
b. Explanatory research
c. Descriptive research
d. Evaluation research
Descriptive research design includes the ff:
Simple descriptive
Comparative descriptive
Correlational
Simple Descriptive
Comparative Descriptive
Correlational
It is one of the classification of research according to the type of analysis in
which the researcher begins with the total situation. Focusing attention on
the system first and then on its internal relationships.
a. Analytical research
b. Holistic research
c. Action research
d. Evaluation research
This will mainly focus on the question " who will benefit from the
study"?
a. Significance of the study
b. Statement of the problem
c. Writing good introduction
d. Conceptual framework
This study was conducted at the University of Manila and limited only
to the currently enrolled students of the College of Business
Administration in their practicum course. The range of study was from
Nov. 2010 to March 2011", this is the best example of :
a. Scope of the study
b. Delimitation of the study
c. Significance of the study
d. Statement of the problem
Scope and delimitation
The SCOPE is mainly the coverage of your study and the
DELIMITATION is the limitation of your study or topic
Example:
" This study was conducted at the University of Manila and
limited only to the currently enrolled students of the College of
Business Administration in their practicum course. The range of
study was from Nov. 2010 to March 2011"

" This study will be limited only to assess the factors that affect
the on-the-job training of the students
It can be used to guide the reader with tips, suggestions or modes of
action that the reader can follow.
a. Interpretation of data
b. Conclusions
c. references
d. Recommendations
An author’s statement recognized his use of the works of other authors
or a declaration or avowal of one’s act of a fact to give it legal validity.
a. Dedication
b. Abstract
c. Introduction
d. Acknowledgment
In some cases, additional information that is not critical to
understanding the research paper, such as a list of experiment stimuli,
details of a secondary analysis, or programming code, is provided. This
is often placed in________.
a. Tables and Figures
b. Appendix
c. References
d. abstract
It suggests that when one variable is increased, the value of another
variable increases. Example of this is as the number of pedestrians
increases, so do ,jaywalking incident.
a. Positive associations
b. Negative associations
c. Associations and Cause and Effect
d. Nota
Associations and Cause and Effect
Association means that two or more things are related or
connected to one another. It can be positive or negative (the positive
and negative associations do not necessarily mean that the association
is 'good' or bad’).
Positive associations suggest that when one variable is increased,
the value of another variable increases (e.g., as the number of
pedestrians increases, so do ,jaywalking incident).
Negative associations mean that when a variable is increased,
the value of another variable decreases (e g., Police visibility is
increased and Petty crimes decreased).
It is a comprehensive research paper often written in consultation with
a faculty adviser. It is a long essay that poses an interesting research
question and persuasively answers it.
a. Thesis
b. Thesis Paper
c. Research
d. Scientific Article.
Parts of a Scientific
Article
1. Abstract - is a short summary (150-200 words or less) of the important points of
the paper. It does not generally include background information nor the
references.
2. Introduction - provides the background information necessary to understand
why the described experiment was conducted.
3. Methods - The technical details on how the experiment was carried out or
designed. The function of this section is to describe all experimental procedures,
including controls.
4. Results - The presentation of the data generated by the experiment. The
function of this section is to summarize general trends in the data without
comment, bias, or interpretation.
5. Discussion - The author's conclusions that are drawn on the data generated
through the experiment. This is the interpretation and evaluation of the results.
6. Conclusions - This is an expansion of the Discussion section that will place the
results into the field's context.
7. References - The documents referenced by the author. This section can be a
good place to look for more sources on a topic.
What is a Thesis Paper
A thesis paper is a comprehensive research paper often written
in consultation with a faculty adviser. It is a long essay that poses an
interesting research question and persuasively answers it.
Along with an introductory paragraph providing background
information on a topic the author is examining, he/she will write a
thesis statement that includes his/her own personal stance on the
topic.
In writing a thesis statement, what kind of paper explains something to
the audience.
a. Analytical paper
b. Expository
c. Argumentative paper
d. Nota
Tips for Writing Thesis Statement According to the Purdue Online Writing
Lab (OWL),
The following are the tips on writing thesis statement (2021):
1. Determine what kind of paper you are writing is it a:
• An analytical paper breaks down an issue or an idea into its component
parts, evaluates the issue or idea, and presents this breakdown and
evaluation to the audience.
• An expository (explanatory) paper explains something to the audience.
• An argumentative paper makes a claim about a topic and justifies this claim
with specific evidence. The claim could to be an opinion, a policy proposal, an
evaluation, a cause-and-effect statement, or an interpretation. The goal of
the argumentative paper is to convince the audience that the claim is true
based on the evidence provided.
It presents research findings written by researchers and scientists. They
are generally considered primary sources and are written for other
researchers.
a. Thesis
b. Thesis Paper
c. Research
d. Scientific Article.
What is a Scientific Article?
A scientific article presents research findings written by researchers and
scientists. They are generally considered primary sources and are written for
other researchers.
The most recent articles will contain the most recent work in the field,
with references to previously published works in the field of study. Journal
articles may include original research, re-analyses of research, reviews of
literature in a specific area, proposals of new but untested theories, or opinion
pieces.
It represents the most vital an means for disseminating research findings
and is usually specialized for different academic disciplines or subdisciplines.
Often, the research challenges common assumptions and/or the research data
presented in the published scientific literature in order to gain a clearer
understanding of the facts and findings.
2. Explain or apply the rules adopted in
writing technical papers under the APA -
American Psychological Association,
under the following but not limited to:
Basic Formatting of Thesis/Research
Paper; Verb, Tone, Punctuations, Rules in
writing Numbers, Tables, and Figures;
Quotation and Paraphrasing, Citations and
Reference.
Headings serve an important purpose in research papers – they
organized your paper and make it simple to locate different pieces of
information. In APA format, there are ________of headings..
a. Three levels
b. Four levels
c. Five levels
d. Six levels
The last paragraph of introduction should state that ________
a. what is known
b. what is unknown
c. why the study was done
d. how the study was done
Writing good introduction
The first paragraph should provide a brief background in present
tense to establish context, relevance, or nature of the problem,
question, or purpose (what is known)
The second paragraph may include the importance of the problem
and unclear issues (what is unknown)
The last paragraph should state the rationale, hypothesis, main
objective, or purposes (why the study was done)
The definition of terms must be arranged ________
a. In order
b. Chronologically
c. Alphabetically
c. From earliest to recent
Itshould provide a brief background in present tense to establish context,
relevance, or nature of the problem, question, or purpose (what is
known).
a. First paragraph of introduction
b. Second paragraph of introduction
c. Last paragraph of introduction
d. Introduction and its rationale
This referencing is used widely for academic writing, particularly in the
humanities.
a. HARVARD
b. Modern Language Association (MLA)
c. American Psychological Association (APA)
d. Nota
This format of thesis writing is most commonly used to cite sources
within the social sciences.
a. HARVARD
b. Modern Language Association (MLA)
c. American Psychological Association (APA)
d. Nota
As per the APA research paper format, the title should be between
_________and should reflect the essence of the paper.
a. 10-30 words
b. 10-20 words
c. 20-30 words
d. Unlimited words
Your abstract should be a single paragraph, double-spaced, and
typically be ____________
a. no more than 250 words.
b. no less than 250 words.
c. no more than 200 words.
d. no less than 200 words.
In this section, you could describe how you analyzed the data and
explain your findings.
a. Introduction
b. Methods
c. Results
d. Discussion
Results are interpreted and understood in this section. It helps
understand the research hypothesis better and places the results in the
broader context of the literature in the area.
a. Introduction
b. Methods
c. Results
d. Discussion
This type of comma is placed before the words AND and OR or in a
series of three items.
a. Webster comma
b. Oxford comma
c. APA comma
d. MLA comma
In presenting a table for your research, this sequence must be
observed.
a. Title, table number, table, and note.
b. Table number, title, table, and note.
c. Note, table, title, and table number
d. Title, note, table number and table.
 Tables
General format of a table
should be:
• Table number
• Title
• Table
• Note
Numbers and title
Include the table number first
and at the top. Table 1 is the first
table discussed in the paper.
Table 2 is the next table
mentioned, and so on.
Add a title under the number:
Create a brief, descriptive title.
Capitalized the first letter for
each important word. Italicize
the title and place it under the
table number.
formatting
Only use horizontal lines.
Limit use of cell shading.
Keep the font at 12-point size and use single or double spacing. If
you use single spacing in one table, make sure all of the others use
single spaces as well. Keep it consistent.
All headings should be centered.
In the first column (called stub), center the heading, left-align the
information underneath it. (indent 0.15 inches if info is more than
one line).
Information in other columns should be centered.
APA
(American psychological association) style
Is most commonly used to cite sources within the social sciences. This resource,
revised according to the 7th edition of the APA manual, offers examples for the
general format of APA research papers, in-text citations, endnotes/footnotes, and
the reference page.
Aside from simplifying the work of editors by having everyone use the same format
for a given publication, using APA style makes it easier for readers to understand a
text by providing a familiar structure they can follow. Abiding by APA’s standards
will allow writers to:
Provide readers with cues they can use to follow the writer’s ideas more efficiently and to
locate information of interest to them.
Allow readers to focus more on your ideas by not distracting them with unfamiliar
formatting
Establish the writers credibility in the field by demonstrating an awareness of his/her
audience and their needs as fellow researchers.
Guidelines for APA style paper
Page Layout and Font
Type the content and keep double-space on standard-sized paper (8.5”
x 11), with 1” margins on all sides.
You should indent the first line of every paragraph 0.5 inches.
Include a page number on every page.
You could use accessible font like Times New Roman 12pt., Arial 11pt.,
or Georgia 11pt.
 Title Page
As per the APA research paper format, the title should be between 10-20 words
and should reflect the essence of the paper.
After writing the title, write your name followed by name of the college or your
institution.
Furthermore, create a page header using the “View Header” function in MS
Word and on the title page include a running head – a short title that appears at
the top of pages of published articles (flush left) and page number on the same
line (flush right). The running head should not exceed 50 characters, including
punctuation and spacing.
Moreover, you could use the toolbox to insert a page number, so that it
automatically numbers each page.
abstract
Beginning with the next line, write a concise summary of the key points of
your research. (DO NOT INDENT). Your abstract should contain at least your
research topic, research questions, participants, methods, results, data
analysis, and conclusions. You may also include possible implications of
your research and future work you see connected with your findings. Your
abstract should be a single paragraph, double-spaced. Your abstract should
typically be no more than 250 words.
You may also want to list keywords from your paper in your abstract. To do
this, indent as you would if you were starting a new paragraph, type
keywords : (italicized), and then list your keywords. Listing your keywords
will help researchers find your work in databases.
Introduction
A good introduction critically evaluates the empirical
knowledge in the relevant area(s) in a way that
defines the knowledge gap and expresses your aim for
your study and why you conducted it. However, the
challenge here is to keep the reader’s interest in
reading your paper.
 Methods
The method section in APA research paper format is straight forward.
However, the protocol and requirements should be mentioned
precisely. The goal of this section is to describe your study and
experiments in detail, so that there is no issue in reproducibility of
results and other researchers could duplicate your methods
effectively.
This section includes materials and/or Apparatus and Experiments /
Procedure / Protocols. Furthermore, keep the procedures brief and
accurate, and make sure to read through so as to not repeat the
steps or avoid redundancy.
 Methods
The method section in APA research paper format is straight forward.
However, the protocol and requirements should be mentioned
precisely. The goal of this section is to describe your study and
experiments in detail, so that there is no issue in reproducibility of
results and other researchers could duplicate your methods
effectively.
This section includes materials and/or Apparatus and Experiments /
Procedure / Protocols. Furthermore, keep the procedures brief and
accurate, and make sure to read through so as to not repeat the
steps or avoid redundancy.
Results
In this section, you could describe how you analyzed the
data and explain your findings. If your data analyses are
complex, then break the section into subsections, ideally a
subsection for each hypothesis and elaborate the
subsections by using statistical analysis and including tables
or figures to represent results visually. Most importantly, do
not share interpretation of the results here. You can
interpret and explain the results in the discussion section.
 Discussion
 Results are interpreted and understood in this section. Discussion section helps understand the research
hypothesis better and places the results in the broader context of the literature in the area. This section is
the reversal of introduction section, wherein you begin with the specifics and explain the general
understanding of the topics.
 In discussion, you start with a brief of your main findings, followed by explaining if your research findings
support your hypothesis. Furthermore, you could explain how your findings enhance or support the
existing literature on the topic. Connect your results with some of the literature mentioned in the
introductions to bring your story back to full circle. You could also mention if there are any interesting or
surprising findings in your results. Discuss other theories which could help you justify your surprising
results.
 Explain the limitation of your study and mention all the additional questions that were generated from
your study. You could also mention what further research should be conducted on the topic and what are
the knowledge gaps in the current body of research. Finally, mention how your results could relate to
the larger issues of human existence and highlight “the big picture” for your readers.
References

Provide an alphabetical listing of the references. Do not

keep extra spaces between references and doubles-pace all
the references. The second line of each reference should be
intended
For verbs in scientific papers, the APA manual
recommends using:
Past tense or present perfect tense for the explanation
of the procedure.
Past tense for the explanation of the results.
Present tense for the explanation of the conclusion and
future implications.
PUNCTUATIONS
 One space after most punctuation marks- The manual recommends using one space after most punctuation
marks, including punctuation at the end of a sentence.
Example: Ken will pass the board examination. That is a prediction!
 Always use an Oxford comma. This type of comma is placed before the words AND and OR or in a series of
three items.

 When writing a possessive singular noun, you should place the apostrophe before the s. For possessive
plural nouns, the apostrophe is placed after the s.
Em dashes (long dashes) are used to bring focus to a particular point or an aside.
There are no spaces after these dashes.
Use en dash (short dash) in compound objectives. Do not place a space
before or after the dash. Here are a few examples:
Number rules
You should use Arabic numerals (1,7) instead of Roman numerals (II, XI), unless
the Roman numerals are part of established terminology in your field.
In numbers greater than 1,000, use commas to separate groups of three digits
except in page numbers, binary code, serial numbers, temperatures, acoustic
frequencies, and degrees and freedom.
Do not add apostrophes when writing a plural of a number (2000s, the 70s)
Use a numeral in these cases:
A number 10 or higher anywhere in the paper;
A number right before a unit of measurement (3 m, 24 g);
A number denoting: mathematical functions, fractions, decimals, percentages, ratios,
percentiles (2:1 ratio, 5%)
A number denoting: time, a date, an age, a point on a scale, an exact amount of
money, or a numeral (the 3 key on your board, 7 years old, a 5 on the test); and
A number indicating a place in a series or a part of a book/table, if the number is after
a noun (i.e, Item 4, but words are used in cases like “the fourth item”).
Spell the number out in words in these cases:
A number from 0-9 anywhere in the paper, except the
specific cases above;
A number that starts a sentence, heading, or title.
A number that is a common fraction (one half, two thirds)
A number that is part of a common phrase (Noble Eightfold
Path)
 IN-TEXT APA CITATION
FORMAT
APA allows for the use of two different forms of in-text
citation, parenthetical and narrative. Both forms of citations
require two elements:
Author’s name
Year of publication
The only difference is the way that this information is presented
to the reader.
Parenthetical Citations are the more commonly seen form of in-text citations
for academic work, in which both required for academic work, in which both
required reference elements are presented at the end of the sentence in
parentheses.
 Example: Harlem had many artists and musicians in the late 1920s (Belafonte, 2008)

Narrative citations allow the author to present one or both of the required of
the reference elements inside of the running sentence, which prevents the
text from being too repetitive or burdensome. When only one of the two
reference elements is included in the sentences, the other is provided
parenthetically.
 Example: according to Belafonte (2008), Harlem had many artists and musicians in
the late 1920s.
If there are two authors listed in the source entry, then the
parenthetical reference must list them both
• (Smith & Belafonte, 2008)

If there are three or more authors listed in the source entry, then
the parenthetical reference can abbreviate with “et al.”, the Latin
abbreviation for “and others”
• (Smith et al., 2008)
The author’s names are structured differently if there is more
than one author.
 Reference list
Your reference list should appear at the end of your paper.
It provides information necessary for a reader to locate and
retrieve any source you cite in the body of paper, each source
you cite in the paper must appear in your reference list; likewise,
each entry in the reference list must be cited in your text.
Your references should begin on a new page separate from
the text of the essay; label this page “References” in bold,
centered at the top of the page. (Do not underline or use
quotation marks for the title). All text should be double-space
just like the rest of your essay.
Referencing in
Harvard, mla and apa format
HARVARD
 uses the ‘author-date’ style of referencing. In-text references (generally) appear in the following format:
(Author’s Surname, Year of Publication, Page Number.

Modern Language Association (MLA)

 is used widely for academic writing, particularly in the humanities. MLA uses an author-page
system of in-text citation.
American Psychological Association (APA)
 The main and simple purpose of the APA reference page is to ensure that the reader can locate and
retrieve the sources cited in the paper. And because sources come in many different shapes and sizes,
APA has guidelines on page structure for different kinds of publications that need to be attributed.
• All lines after the first line of each entry in your
reference list should be indented one-half inch from the
left margin. This is called hanging indentation.
• All author’s name should be inverted (i.e, last names
should be provided first).
• Authors first and middle names should be written as
initials.
Example: the reference entry for a source written by Jane Marie
Smith would begin with “Smith, J. M.”)
• If a middle name isn’t available, just initialize the
author’s first name: “Smith, J.”
• Give the last name and first/middle initials for all authors of a particular work up to and
including 20 authors (this is a new rule, as APA 6 only required the first six authors).
Separate each author’s initials from the next author in the list with a comma. Use an
ampersand (&) before the last author’s name. If there are 21 or more authors, use an
ellipsis (…), but no ampersand after the 19th author, and then add the final author’s
name.
• Reference list entries should be alphabetized by the last name of the first author of each
work.
• For multiple articles by the same author, or authors listed in the
same order, list the entries in chronological order, from earliest
to most recent.
3. Recall and apply the DOs and
DONTs of the Ethical issues in
research writing.
Idol Jesmar conducted his study without posing any danger,
embarrassment, hurt or any risk to his research respondents. What
problem has been solved in the case?
A. A research problem must be ethical
B. A research problem must be feasible
C. A research problem must be clear
D. A research problem must be relevant
Any conclusion drawn based upon hard evidence gathered from
information collected from real-life experiences and observations is
called _____.
A. Empirical
B. Critical
C. Systematic
D. Rigorous
Which research problem is not researchable due to insufficient data or
that data cannot be obtained?
A. A research on the conduct of morning meetings and afternoon
meetings on the crime solution efficiency of police stations
B. A research on the factors which cause the retirement of PNP
personnel upon reaching 20 years in the service
C. A research on the effect of yearly unit performance evaluation
rating on the overall performance of provincial offices
D. A research on the problems encountered by the pioneering
Criminology class of a university who graduated 25 years ago
Jose found out that the scope of his research is too broad which
requires great investments in time, effort and money. In order to
conduct his study within his means, which is his best course of action?
A. He must only utilize descriptive statistics
B. He must simplify his theoretical framework
C. He must change his research problem
D. He must set the delimitation of the scope of his study
Harry is writing his research paper. There are numerous literatures
which deal with his research topic. In order to prevent the commission
of plagiarism, he must observe which of the following guidelines?
A. Check the validity of the research instruments
B. Obtain permission of the respondents
C. Citing the authors of the literature used in the research
D. Cite all ideas and information's that are not the words of the
researcher
Which Philippine law penalizes plagiarism?
A. RA 8293
B. RA 6975
C. RA 8551
D. RA 6713
Which Philippine law penalizes plagiarism?
A. RA 8293 - "Intellectual Property Code of the Philippines."
B. RA 6975
C. RA 8551
D. RA 6713
Which of the following choices is the rationale as to why controversial
issues are discouraged as research topic?
A. It can provide comprehensive information regarding the
respondents of the study
B. It prevents an in-depth analysis of the problem
C. It is hard to adopt an objective attitude toward controversial topics
D. It involves specialized equipment
Which is an advantage of qualitative research design where the
researcher is allowed greater spontaneity and adaptation in interacting
with the research respondents?
A. Flexibility
B. Subjectivity
C. Labor-intensive
D. Unreliability
One of the common problems in designing your study is not concise
and clear, and overly general. Avoid using vague qualifiers, such as,
extremely, very, entirely, completely, etc.
a. Poorly Defined Research Problem
b. Lack of Specificity
c. Poor Sampling
d. Provincialism
 Some common problems
to avoid when designing a
research study
1. Lack of Specificity
Research design is not concise and clear, and overly general. Do not
describe the investigative aspects of the study in overly-broad generalities.
Avoid using vague qualifiers, such as, extremely, very, entirely, completely,
etc. It's important that the researcher design a study that describes the
process of investigation in clear and concise terms. Otherwise, the reader
cannot be certain what the study intends to do.
2. Poorly Defined Research Problem
It is one of the most basic aspects of research design. The problem
statement must be clear, and set the framework for the development of
research questions that address the core problem. The starting point of
most research is to formulate a problem statement and begin the process
of developing questions that address the problem. The paper should
outline and explicitly delimit the problem and state what the researcher
intends to investigate since it will determine what research design he/she
will use
3. Lack of Theoretical Framework
The theoretical framework represents the conceptual foundation of the
study. Therefore, research design should include an explicit set of
logically derived hypotheses, basic postulates, or assumptions that can
be tested in relation to the research problem.
4. Poor Methodological Approach
The design must include a well-developed and transparent plan for
how the researcher intends to collect or generate data and how it will
be analyzed. Ensure that the method used to gather information for
analysis is aligned with the topic of inquiry and the underlying research
questions to be addressed.
This refers to using a sample which is not based upon the purposes of
the study, but rather, is based upon the closeness of a particular group
of subjects. If their selection is based primarily on ease of access and
having a convenient sample base, the research design is weak.
a. Poorly Defined Research Problem
b. Lack of Specificity
c. Poor Sampling
d. Provincialism
5. Poor Sampling
A common flaw in poor research design is proximity sampling; this
refers to using a sample which is not based upon the purposes of the
study, but rather, is based upon the proximity (being close) of a
particular group of subjects. If their selection is based primarily on
ease of access and having a convenient sample base, the research
design is weak.
6. Provincialism
This refers to designing a narrowly applied scope, geographical area,
sampling, or method of analysis that restricts your ability to create
meaningful outcomes and, by extension, obtaining results that are
relevant and possibly transferable to understanding phenomena in
other settings.
This refers to designing a narrowly applied scope, geographical area,
sampling, or method of analysis that restricts your ability to create
meaningful outcomes and, by extension, obtaining results that are
relevant and possibly transferable to understanding phenomena in
other settings.
a. Poorly Defined Research Problem
b. Lack of Specificity
c. Poor Sampling
d. Provincialism
7. Limited or Poor Vocabulary
The research often contains jargon and specialized language that the
reader is presumably familiar with. However, avoid overuse of technical
or pseudo-technical terminology. Problems with vocabulary also can
refer to the use of popular terms, cliches, or culture-specific language
that is inappropriate for academic writing.
8. Limitations of Study
All studies have limitations. The research design should anticipate and
explain the reasons why these limitations exist and clearly describe the
extent of missing data. It is important to include a statement
concerning what impact these limitations may have on the validity of
the results and how the researcher helped ameliorate the significance
of these limitations.
The researcher's design must document how he/ she intends to
minimize risk for participants or respondents during stages of data
gathering while, at the same time, still being able to adequately
address the research problem. Failure to do so can lead the reader to
question the validity and objectivity of the entire study.
a. Poor Sampling
b. Provincialism
c. Ethical Dilemmas
d. Statistical Treatment
9. Ethical Dilemmas
In the methods section of qualitative research studies, the researcher's
design must document how he/ she intends to minimize risk for
participants or respondents (human subject of the research) during stages
of data gathering while, at the same time, still being able to adequately
address the research problem. Failure to do so can lead the reader to
question the validity and objectivity of the entire study.
10. Statistical Treatment
In quantitative studies, the researcher must give a complete description of
how he/she will organize the raw data for analysis. In most cases, this
involves describing the data through the measures of central tendencies
like mean median, and mode that help the researcher explain how the
data are concentrated and, thus, lead to meaningful interpretations of key
trends or patterns found within the data.
 Ethical Considerations in Research
Writing

Ethical considerations in research are a set of principles that guide

research designs and practices. Researchers must always adhere to a certain
code of conduct when collecting data from people.
These considerations work to
1) protect the rights of research participants
2) enhance research validity, and
3) maintain scientific integrity.
According to the COPE, a good research should be well adjusted, well-
planned, appropriately designed, and ethically approved. COPE stands
for ____
a. Cooperative of Publication Ethics
b. Code of Public Ethics
c. Code of Publication ethics
d. Committee on Publication Ethics
Study Design and Ethics Approval
According to the Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE), a
good research should be well adjusted, well-planned, appropriately
designed, and ethically approved.
To conduct research to a lower standard may constitute
misconduct (2004). A research protocol should be developed and
adhered to.
It must be carefully agreed to by all contributors and
collaborators, and the precise roles of each team member should be
spelled out early, including matters of authorship and publications.
Research should seek to answer specific questions, rather than just
collect data .
Before starting any study involving data collection with people, the
researcher submits their research proposal to an/a_______________,
of the respective organizations for studies involving people, medical
records, and anonymized human tissues.
a. Institutional Review Board (IRB)
b. Ethics Committee
c. A and B
d. Nota
 Before starting any study involving data collection with people,
the researcher submits their research proposal to an institutional
review board (IRB) or Ethics Committee, of the respective organizations
for studies involving people, medical records, and anonymized human
tissues.
An IRB is a committee that checks whether the research aims
and research design are ethically acceptable and follow the
institution's code of conduct. They check if the research materials and
procedures are up to code.
Kardo does not want the readers to misinterpret the results of his data
analysis without considering the possibility of the study being underpowered.
What Kardo must do?
1. All sources and methods used to obtain and analyze data should be fully disclosed
2. Fabricate and falsify the data
3. Mention any issues of bias in discussion section of a paper and explain how they
have been dealt with in the design and interpretation of the study.
a. 1 only
b. 1 and 2
c. 2 only
d. 1 and 3
Ethical Considerations in Research
Writing
Data Analysis
Analyzing the data appropriately is the responsibility of the researcher.
Inappropriate analysis may not necessarily amount to misconduct, however
intentional omission of result may cause misinterpretation and mislead the
readers. Fabrication and falsification of data do constitute misconduct .
To ensure appropriate data analysis, all sources and methods used to
obtain and analyze data should be fully disclosed. Failure to do so may lead
the readers to misinterpret the results without considering the possibility of
the study being underpowered. The discussion section of a paper should
mention any issues of bias, and explain how they have been dealt with in the
design and interpretation of the study.
Who among the following do/does not deserve an authorship.
a. Kardo who made substantial contributions to the intellectual
content, including conceptualizing and designing the study.
b. Idol Maltos who take responsibility to certify that the manuscript
represents valid work and take public responsibility for the work
c. Idol Jesmar who is involved in drafting or revising the manuscript, as
well as approving the submitted manuscript
d. Mang Kanor who made the collection of data, editing of grammar
and language, and other routine works by itself
Authorship
It is crucial to decide early on in the planning of a research who
will be credited as authors, as contributors, and who will be
acknowledged.
An author should have made substantial contributions to the
intellectual content, including conceptualizing and designing the
study; acquiring, analyzing and interpreting the data.
The author should also take responsibility to certify that the
manuscript represents valid work and take public responsibility for
the work. Finally, an author is usually involved in drafting or revising
the manuscript, as well as approving the submitted manuscript.
Data collection, editing of grammar and language, and other
routine works by itself, do not deserve an authorship
This happens when researchers have interests that are not fully
apparent and that may influence their judgments on what is published.
a. Redundant Publication
b. Plagiarism
c. Authorship
d. Conflicts of Interest
If there is a conflict of interests in making a research, one should
not_____
1. Discussed these in the early stage of research.
2. Let these influence their judgments on what is published
3. Consult an independent researcher, or Ethics Committee, on this issue if in
doubt.
4. Be declared to editors.
5. Ensure that these do not influence the methodology and outcome of the
research.
a. 1235
b. 1345
c. 1234
d. 2345
Conflicts of Interest
This happens when researchers have interests that are not fully
apparent and that may influence their judgments on what is
published. These conflicts include personal, commercial, political,
academic or financial interest. Such interests, where relevant, should
be discussed in the early stage of research.
The researchers need to take extra effort to ensure that their
conflicts of interest do not influence the methodology and outcome of
the research.
It would be useful to consult an independent researcher, or
Ethics Committee, on this issue if in doubt.
When publishing, these conflicts of interest should be declared
to editors, and readers will judge for themselves whether the research
findings are trustworthy.
It occurs when two or more papers, without full cross reference, share
the same hypothesis, data, discussion points, or Conclusions.
a. Redundant Publication
b. Plagiarism
c. Authorship
d. Conflicts of Interest
Redundant Publication and Plagiarism
Redundant publication occurs when two or more papers, without
full cross reference, share the same hypothesis, data, discussion points, or
Conclusions.
On the other hand, plagiarism ranges from unreferenced use of
others' published and unpublished ideas, including research grant
applications to submission under new authorship of a complete paper,
sometimes in different languages.
It is important to disclose all sources of information, and if a large
amount of other people's written or illustrative materials is to be used,
permission must be sought.
4. Apply the rules in developing a
problem, collect and gathering of
primary and secondary data sources.
and data collection technique
It is the main organizing principle guiding the analysis of the research
paper.
a. Conceptual framework
b. Research problem
c. Theoretical framework
d. Hypothesis
Developing a Problem
A research Problem is a specific issue, difficulty, contradiction, or
gap in knowledge that the researcher will aim to address in his/ her
study .
It is the main organizing principle guiding the analysis of the
research paper.
It represents the core subject matter of scholarly communication,
and the means by which the researcher/reader arrives at other topics
of conversations and the discovery of new knowledge and
understanding .
It is the very first step in writing a research.
a. Identify the problem
b. Define the problem
c. Selecting a research area
d. Identify the questions to be answered
How- to Formulate a Research Problem?

A researcher needs to consider the following in formulating a

Research Problem:
1. Identify a General Area of Interest or Research Area
Selecting a research area is the very first step in writing a
research.
It is important for the researcher to choose a research area that
is interesting to him/her professionally, as well as, personally.
Finding a research area and research problem that is genuinely
interesting is a guarantee that the whole process of writing of research
will be much easier.
In formulating a problem, after identifying your general area of interest,
you have to learn more this by means of the following, except:
a. Looking for background and specifics
b. Assess who or what it might affect and how the research could
address those relationships
c. define and test the environmental variables in the research
d. consider whether other research groups have already tried to solve
the problem in the research and how his/her approach might differ.
Kardo, after collecting enough information about his problem, this next
step will help him to easily estimate the amount of data his/her
research is likely to deliver.
a. Determine Relationships Between Variables
b. Review the Context of the Information
c. Select and Include Important Variables
d. Receive Feedback and Revise
2. Learn More About the Problem
Learn more about the area of interest, such as its background and
specifics. Researcher needs to ask what he/she needs to know about a
particular topic before he/she begin his/her research. Researcher needs to
assess who or what it might affect and how the research could address
those relationships. He/ she needs to consider whether other research
groups have already tried to solve the problem in the research and how
his/her approach might differ.
3. Review the Context of the Information
This involves defining and testing the environmental variables in the
research, which may help the researcher create a clear and focused research
problem. It may also help in taking a note as to which variables are present in
the research and how to account for the impact that they may have on it. By
reviewing the context, the researcher can easily estimate the amount of data
his/her research is likely to deliver .
4. Determine Relationships Between Variables
After identifying the variables involved in the study, the researcher can
learn how they're related to one another and how these relationships may
contribute to his/her research problem.
Researcher needs to consider generating as many potential perspectives
and variable interactions as possible. Identifying the relationships between
variables may be 'useful when deciding the degree to which the researcher can
control them in the research and how they might affect potential solutions to the
problem the researcher is addressing.
5. Select and Include Important Variables
One of the characteristics of a clear and manageable research problem is
the inclusion of variables that are the most relevant to the study.
The researcher summarizes how he/she plans to take these variables into
consideration and how they might influence the results of the study. Selecting the
most important variables can help the reader understand the trajectory of the
research and the potential impact of the solution.
6. Receive Feedback and Revise
The researcher may reach out to mentors, teachers or industry
experts for feedback about the research problem. They may present
him/her with new information to consider or suggest him/her to edit a
particular aspect of the research design.
Revising the research problem can be a valuable step in creating
impactful and precise research. It is important to note that before asking for
feedback, the researcher needs to consider these aspects of his/her study:
• Does your research problem allow for several solutions and outcomes?
Did you create a study that has a testable hypothesis or theory? Did you
define all the terms correctly?
• Is your research objective comprehensive? and
• Are all parts of your project understandable?
A researcher can consider these various aspects when choosing an area
of interest:
• Contradictions between two or more theoretical perspectives;
• Situations or natural relationships that are not well investigated;
• Processes in an institution or organization that you and your research
team could improve; and
• Areas of concern by individuals who work or are experts in a
particular industry.
It is a formulation of an issue which is usually a 'gap' within the field
and allows the reader to quickly understand the purpose and intent of
the research.
a. Problem Statement
b. A research gap
c. Problem
d. Research problem
The main goal of a statement of the problem is _______
a. Describes the issue that is in need of study.
b. Outlines the problem addressed by a study.
c. Understand the purpose and intent of the research.
d. Transform a generalized problem into a targeted, well-defined
problem
Problem Statement
All research projects should start with a clear problem statement. A problem
statement is a formulation of an issue which is usually a 'gap' within the field.
A research gap is an unanswered question, an issue, controversy, or untested
hypothesis that has not yet been addressed .
A problem statement is an explanation in research that describes the issue that is
in need of study.
What problem is the research attempting to address? Having a Problem
Statement allows the reader to quickly understand the purpose and intent of the
research.
A statement of the problem is used in research as a claim that outlines the
problem addressed by a study.
The statement of problem briefly addresses the question: What is the problem
that the research will address?
The main goal of a statement of the problem is to transform a generalized
problem into a targeted, well-defined problem; one that can be resolved through
focused research and careful decision-making.
A component of problem statements that intended to establish a
baseline of accepted facts.
a. Interacting Proposition
b. Principal Proposition
c. Speculative Proposition
d. Explicative Statement
Four Major Components of Problem
Statements
1. Principal Proposition
These are the collection of statements that can be considered as
being true or generally accepted factual.
It represents a discussion that establishes for the reader what
information is generally considered beyond question. They are
intended to establish a baseline of accepted facts.
It is the most important port of the problem statement because it
provides a contrast to the principal proposition and is especially
sensitive to being supported by the scholarly literature or in
combination with a credible professional source.
a. Interacting Proposition
b. Principal Proposition
c. Speculative Proposition
d. Explicative Statement
2. Interacting Proposition
It is the most important port of the problem statement. The
interacting proposition and the discussion that supports it, serves to
contradict, show exception to, or cast some degree of doubt on the
Principal Proposition. The form of interacting proposition statement
aways starts with a connecting adverb, such as, however, although,
or but.
Interacting Proposition provides a contrast to the principal
proposition. Thus, the interacting proposition is especially sensitive to
being supported by the scholarly literature or in combination with a
credible professional source. One cannot simply report that a
contradiction exists to the principal proposition on the basis of
researcher's personal opinion or other lesser credible sources.
It is the statement of the purpose of the research study. It serves to
complete the cycle of logic that the researcher has generated.
a. Interacting Proposition
b. Principal Proposition
c. Speculative Proposition
d. Explicative Statement
It juxtaposes the previous two sets of information, which are offered as
being true, and suggest why it might be important, to resolve the
contradiction that they have seemingly caused.
a. Interacting Proposition
b. Principal Proposition
c. Speculative Proposition
d. Explicative Statement
3. Speculative Proposition
The speculative proposition juxtaposes the previous two sets of
information, which are offered as being true, and suggest why it might
be important, to resolve the contradiction that they have seemingly
caused.
The research problem is formed by the gap of knowledge that
exists between two factual statements, that is, how the researcher
intends to resolve the two contradictory independent statements.
4. Explicative Statement
It is a culminating statement that states how the gap will be
resolved in the form of the actions that the researchers intend to
undertake.
Explicative statement is the statement of the purpose of the
research study. It serves to complete the cycle of logic that the
researcher has generated
The type of research problem depends on ______
a. Topic of interest and the type of study the researcher wants to do.
b. The series of questions that wants the researchers to answer.
c. A phenomenon or context that has not been closely studied.
d. A situation or relationship that is not well understood
This type of problem focuses on expanding knowledge and
understanding rather than directly contributing to change.
a. Action Research Problem
b. Theoretical Research Problem
c. Applied Research Problem
d. Nota
Types of Research Problems
The type of research problem depends on the topic of interest and the
type of study the researcher wants to do.
There are three types of research problem. They are:
1. Theoretical Research Problem
It focuses on expanding knowledge and understanding rather than directly
contributing to change . It relates to predicting, explaining, and understanding
various phenomena. It also expands and challenges existing information and
knowledge. Identification of a research problem in theoretical research is
achieved by analyzing theories and fresh research literature relating to a broad
area of research. This practice helps to find gaps in the research done by others.
Theoretical research problem includes but not limited to:
• A phenomenon or context that has not been closely studied,
• A contradiction between two or more perspectives,
• A situation or relationship that is not well understood, and
• A troubling question that has yet to be resolved
It is a non-systematic problem, involving the practical use of theoretical
knowledge.
a. Action Research Problem
b. Theoretical Research Problem
c. Applied Research Problem
d. Nota
2. Applied Research Problem
It is a non-systematic problem, involving the practical use of
theoretical knowledge .
They are typically identified by analyzing reports, previous
research studies, and interactions with the experienced personnel of
pertinent disciplines.
Applied research problem includes but not limited to:
• Issues with performance or efficiency in an organization,
• Processes that could be improved in an institution,
• Areas of concern among practitioners in a field, and
• Difficulties faced by specific groups of people in society.
It aims to provide solutions for problems that are time-sensitive and
immediate.
a. Action Research Problem
b. Theoretical Research Problem
c. Applied Research Problem
d. Nota
3. Action Research Problem
It aims to provide solutions for problems that are time-sensitive
and immediate. It is apart of a larger reflective ongoing process that
combines research, analysis and action .
Researchers develop and implement a research strategy to
create innovative solutions and discoveries as soon as possible.
Among the following variables which of the following is usually the
problem itself?
A. Intervening variables
B. Antecedent variables
C. Dependent variables
D. Independent variables
When to start reviewing related literature?

a. When research problem is still being conceptualized

b. when research problem is still on data analysis
c. when research problem is being defined
d. when research problem is partially over
A research problem can only be investigated if resources like time,
money, and personnel are available.
a. A research problem must be feasible
b. A research problem must be clear
c. A research problem must be ethical
d. A research problem must be appropriate
The sources that the chief purpose is to list, summarize or simply
repackage ideas or other information and usually not credited to a
particular author.
a. Primary Sources
b. Secondary Sources
c. Tertiary Sources
d. All of the above
These sources are records of events or evidence as it they are first
described or actually happened without any interpretation or
commentary.
a. Primary Sources
b. Secondary Sources
c. Tertiary Sources
d. All of the above
1. Primary Sources
These sources are records of events or evidence as it they are first
described or actually happened without any interpretation or commentary.
It is information that is shown for the first time or original materials on
which other research is based.
Primary sources display original thinking, report on new discoveries,
or share fresh information.
Examples:
Theses, dissertations, scholarly journal articles (research based), some
government reports, symposia and conference proceedings, original
artwork, poems, photographs, speeches, letters, memos, personal
narratives, diaries, interviews, autobiographies, and correspondence,
2. Secondary Sources
These sources offer an analysis or restatement of primary
sources. They often try to describe or explain primary sources.
They tend to be works which summarize, interpret, reorganize, or
otherwise provide an added value a primary source.
Examples:
Textbooks, edited works, books and articles that interpret or review
research works, histories biographies, literary criticism and
interpretation, reviews of law and legislation, political analyses and
commentaries.
3. Tertiary Sources
These are sources that index, abstract, organize, compile, or
digest other sources. Some reference materials and textbooks are
considered tertiary sources when their chief purpose is to list,
summarize or simply repackage ideas or other information. Tertiary
sources are usually not credited to a particular author.
Examples: Almanacs, fact books, Wikipedia, directories, guidebooks,
manuals, handbooks, indexing and abstracting sources.
5. Understand the research design,
Research Framework, Statement of the
Problem, Hypothesis, application, and
relevance of Literatures and Related
studies, Research Designs, Instrument
or data gathering tools, sampling
techniques and applicable statistical
tools
.
It is a strategy for answering the research question using empirical data.
It constitutes the blueprint for the collection, measurement, and
analysis of data.
a. Research method
b. Research design
c. Research framework
d. Statement of the Problem
Research design is a plan to answer research question while research
method _________.
a. Ensuring the effective address of the research problem
b. Determines the type of design that needs to be used
c. A strategy used to implement the plan of research design.
d. Ensures that the data obtained will help to answer the research
question more effectively
What at is a Research Design?
A research design is a strategy for answering the research
question using empirical data. It refers to the overall strategy that the
researcher chooses to integrate the different components of the study
in a coherent and logical way, thereby ensuring the effective address of
the research problem; it constitutes the blueprint for the collection,
measurement, and analysis of data.
It is important to note that the research problem determines the
type of design that needs to be used, not the other way around (De
Vaus, 2001). Research design is a plan to answer research question
while research method is a strategy used to implement that plan.
Research design and methods are different but closely related,
good research design ensures that the data obtained will help to
answer the research question more effectively
The following are some of the purpose of a research design except.
a. Identify the research problem clearly and justify its selection
b. Review and synthesize previously published literature
c. Clearly and explicitly specify hypotheses central to the problem
d. All of the above
Purpose of a Research Design
The function of a research design is to ensure that the evidence obtained
effectively addresses the research problem logically and as unambiguously as possible.
It provides a plan of study that permits accurate assessment of cause and effect
relationships between independent and dependent variables .
The following are some of the purpose of a research design
• Identify the research problem clearly and justify its selection, particularly in relation
to any valid alternative designs that could have been used;
• Review and synthesize previously published literature associated with the research
problem;
• Clearly and explicitly specify hypotheses central to the problem;
• Effectively describe the information and/or data which will be necessary for an
adequate testing of the hypotheses and explain how such information and/or data will
be obtained; and
• Describe the methods of analysis to be applied to the data in determining whether
or not the hypotheses are true or false.
When practitioners use this research design, it has the potential to
increase the amount they learn consciously from their experience. It
can regarded as a learning cycle.
a. Action research studies
b. Case study Design
c. Meta Analysis Design
d. Mixed Method Design
Types of Research Design
Action research studies
Action research studies often have direct and obvious relevance to
improving practice and advocating for change. When practitioners use action
research, it has the potential to increase the amount they learn consciously
from their experience.' the action research cycle can be regarded as a learning
cycle . It follows a characteristic cycle whereby initially an exploratory stance is
adopted, where an understanding of a problem is developed and plans are
made for some form of interventionary strategy or "action".
Then the intervention is carried out during which time, pertinent
observations are collected in various forms. The new interventional strategies
are carried out, and this cyclic process repeats, continuing until a sufficient
understanding of or a valid implementation solution for the problem is
achieved.
The process is iterative or cyclical in nature and is intended to foster
deeper understanding of a given situation, starting with conceptualizing and
particularizing the problem and moving through several interventions and
It is an in-depth study of a particular research problem rather than a
sweeping statistical survey or comprehensive comparative inquiry.
a. Action research studies
b. Case study Design
c. Meta Analysis Design
d. Mixed Method Design
Case Study Design
A case study is a research approach that is used to generate an
in-depth, multi-faceted understanding of a complex issue in its real-
life context.
It is an established research design that is used extensively in a
wide variety of disciplines, particularly in the social sciences .
It is an in-depth study of a particular research problem rather
than a sweeping statistical survey or comprehensive comparative
inquiry.
The main objectives this study include analyzing differences in the
results among studies and increasing the precision by which effects are
estimated.
a. Action research studies
b. Case study Design
c. Meta Analysis Design
d. Mixed Method Design
Meta Analysis Design
Meta-analysis is an analytical methodology designed to
systematically evaluate and summarize the results from a number of
individual studies, thereby, increasing the overall sample size and the
ability of the researcher to study effects of interest. It is a subset of
systematic reviews: a method for systematically combining pertinent
qualitative and quantitative study data from several selected studies
to develop a single conclusion that has greater statistical power.
 Its goal is not to simply summarize existing knowledge, but to
develop a new understanding of a research problem using synoptic
reasoning.
The main objectives of meta-analysis include analyzing
differences in the results among studies and increasing the precision
by which effects are estimated.
Meta-analysis would be used for the following purposes:
• To establish statistical significance with studies that have conflicting results;
• To develop a more correct estimate of effect magnitude; and benefits; and
• To provide a more complex analysis of harms, safety data, and benefits;
and
• To examine subgroups with individual numbers that are not statistically
significant.
It is a procedure for collecting, analyzing, and "mixing" both
quantitative and qualitative research and methods in a single study to
understand a research problem .
a. Action research studies
b. Case study Design
c. Meta Analysis Design
d. Mixed Method Design
Mixed Methods Design
A mixed methods research design is a procedure for collecting,
analyzing, and "mixing" both quantitative and qualitative research and
methods in a single study to understand a research problem .
Mixed method focuses on research problems that require:
• An examination of real-life contextual understandings, multi-level
perspectives, and cultural influences;
• An intentional application of rigorous quantitative research assessing
magnitude and frequency of constructs and rigorous qualitative research
exploring the meaning and understanding of the constructs; and,
• An objective of drawing on the strengths of quantitative and qualitative
data gathering techniques to formulate a holistic interpretive framework
for generating possible solutions or new understandings of the problem.
This rationale for conducting Mixed Methods Design shows that results
from one method are used to enhance, elaborate or clarify results from
another method.
a. Triangulation
b. Complementarity
c. Initiation
d. Development
e. Expansion
 Steps in Mixed Methods Design
The steps in conducting a mixed methods design are as follows:
Step 1: Determine if a mixed method is feasible (capable of being done)
Step 2: Identify a rationale for a mixed methods study.
Five main rationales for conducting mixed methods research
 Triangulation - the confirmation of results by different methods.
 Complementarity - results from one method are used to enhance, elaborate or clarify results from
another method
 Initiation - where new insights are obtained which will stimulate new research questions.
 Development - results from one method shape another method
 Expansion - expanding the breadth and the range of the research by using different methods for
different lines of enquiry.
Step 3: Identify the data collection strategy and type of design.
Step 4: Develop quantitative, qualitative, and mixed questions.
Step 5: Collect quantitative and qualitative data.
Step 6: Analyze data separately or concurrently.
Step 7: Write the report as a one or two phase study.
This research entails that the researcher concurrently conducts the
quantitative and qualitative elements in the same phase of the research
process, weighs the methods equally, analyzes the two components
independently, and interprets the results together
a. Explanatory Sequential Design
b. Convergent Parallel Design
c. Embedded Design
d. Exploratory Sequential Design
The following are the Four major mixed
methods design
Convergent Parallel Design
Entails that the researcher concurrently conducts the
quantitative and qualitative elements in the same phase of the
research process, weighs the methods equally, analyzes the two
components independently, and interprets the results together .
Its purpose are:
• Obtain a more complete understanding from two databases,
• Corroborate results from different methods, and
• Compare multiple levels within a system.
The purpose of this is to use qualitative data to help explain
quantitative results that need further exploration, and to use
quantitative results to purposefully select best participants for
qualitative study.
a. Explanatory Sequential Design
b. Convergent Parallel Design
c. Embedded Design
d. Exploratory Sequential Design
Explanatory Sequential Design
The explanatory-sequential approach is a sequential approach
and is used when the researcher is interested in following up the
quantitative results with qualitative data. Thus, the qualitative data is
used in the subsequent interpretation and clarification of the results
from the quantitative data analysis.
Its goals are:
• To use qualitative data to help explain quantitative results that need
further exploration, and
• To use quantitative results to purposefully select best participants for
qualitative study.
This is a mixed methods study design, where the quantitative phase of
data collection and analysis follows the qualitative phase of data
collection and analysis .
a. Explanatory Sequential Design
b. Convergent Parallel Design
c. Embedded Design
d. Exploratory Sequential Design
Exploratory Sequential Design
An exploratory sequential design is a mixed methods study
design, where the quantitative phase of data collection and analysis
follows the qualitative phase of data collection and analysis .
Its goals are :
• To first explore “because variables”, theories, hypotheses not known,
• To develop an instrument or typology that is not available, and
• To assess whether qualitative themes generalize to a population
The premises of this design are that a single data set is not sufficient,
that different questions need to be answered, and that each type of
question requires different types of data.
a. Convergent Parallel Design
b. Explanatory Sequential Design
c. Exploratory Sequential Design
d. Embedded Design
Embedded Design (fixed firmly and deeply; implanted)
The Embedded Design is a mixed methods design in which one
data set provides a supportive, secondary role in a study based
primarily on the other data type .
The premises of this design are that a single data set is not
sufficient, that different questions need to be answered, and that each
type of question requires different types of data.
Its goals are :
• To address different questions that call for different methods
• To enhance an experiment such as/by:
-improving recruitment procedures-examining the intervention process
-explaining reactions to participation
It is a foundational review of existing theories that serves as a roadmap
for developing the arguments you will use in your own work and
support research by describing and/or drawing from relevant
theoretical aspects obtained in previous work .
a. Theoretical Framework
b. Conceptual Framework
c. Research Design
d. Research problem
Two Types of Research Frameworks
1.Theoretical Framework
It introduces and describes the theory/theories underpinning
the research problem. It is a foundational review of existing theories
that serves as a roadmap for developing the arguments you will use in
your own work . Thus, theoretical frameworks support research by
describing and/or drawing from relevant theoretical aspects obtained
in previous work .
It is like a roadmap for the study, helping the researcher visualize
his/her research project and put it into action. It defines the relevant
variables for the study and maps out how they might relate to each
other.
a. Theoretical Framework
b. Conceptual Framework
c. Research Design
d. Research problem
2. Conceptual Framework
It is like a roadmap for the study, helping the researcher visualize
his/her research project and put it into action. It defines the relevant
variables for the study and maps out how they might relate to each other.
It is a written or visual representation that explains the study
variables and their relationships with each other . The starting point is a
literature review of existing studies and theories about the research
topic.
Conceptual frameworks have different uses in different types of
studies .
• In quantitative studies, a conceptual framework might be used to
determine survey questions or data points, or to generate a hypothesis
for explanations and predictions.
• In qualitative studies, a conceptual framework might be used to provide
a working hypothesis or a set of research questions, or to identify or
explore categories in descriptive research.
Kardo make sure that while reviewing for board exam, he maintains his
body healthy by not staying too late at night and exhausted so that it
will not affect his performance on exam. The “health” here is
considered ____
a. Independent variables
b. Dependent variables
c. Moderating variables
d. Mediating variables
e. Control variables
When developing a conceptual framework, the researcher will need to identify
the following:
• Independent variables- It is the variable the researcher manipulate or vary in
an experimental study to explore its effects. It's called "independent" because
it's not influenced by any other variables in the study.
• Dependent variables- It is the variable that changes as a result of the
independent variable manipulation.
• Moderating variables- It changes the relationship between independent and
dependent variables when its value increases or decreases. (cannot be
controlled)
• Mediating variables- It links independent and dependent variables to better
explain the relationship between them.
• Control variables/constant variable(scientific constant)- It could potentially
impact the cause-and-effect relationship but is kept constant throughout the
study so that its effects on the findings/outcomes can be ruled out. The
A mediating variable (or mediator) explains the process through which
two variables are related, while a moderating variable (or moderator)
affects the strength and direction of that relationship.

Including mediators and moderators in your research helps you go

beyond studying a simple relationship between two variables for a
fuller picture of the real world. These variables are important to
consider when studying complex correlational or causal relationships
between variables.
Kardo always give a “tip” to a gasoline boy for his extra effort and
warmth service. The “tip” can be considered as an independent
variable while the “effort” is the dependent variable. But giving a “tip”
to the gasoline boy cause a positive morale to exert extra effort in doing
his job. What can you conclude in relation to the “positive morale”?
a. It is a mediating variable that without it, the tip will not affect the
service of gasoline boy.
b. It is a moderating variable that leads a direction between
independent and dependent variable
c. It is a control variable that must be keep constant to control the
dependent variable
d. It is also an independent variable that affects the dependent
variable.
Mediator Variable Examples
A mediator variable may be something as simple as a psychological
response to given events. For example, suppose buying pizza for a work
party leads to positive morale and to the work being done in half the
time.
Pizza is the independent variable,
Work speed is the dependent variable,
The mediator, the middle man without which there would be no connection,
is positive morale.
Although we may observe a definite effect on work speed when and if
pizza is bought, the pizza itself does not have the power to affect work
rates: only by affecting morale of the workers can it make an actual
difference.
Idol Maltos read his notes for almost 20 hours before BET while
Jaymark Pogi slept early after reading his review materials for almost 12
hours. The latter got higher grades than the former. The “studying” is
the independent variable while the “getting higher or lower grades” is
the dependent variable, where “lack or enough sleep” could be _____
a. Independent variables
b. Dependent variables
c. Moderating variables
d. Mediating variables
e. Control variables
Examples of Moderating variables
For example, suppose we want to fit a regression model in
which we use the independent variable hours spent
exercising each week to predict the dependent
variable resting heart rate.

• We suspect that more hours spent exercising is associated

with a lower resting heart rate. However, this relationship
could be affected by a moderating variable such as gender.
• It’s possible that each extra hour of exercise causes resting
heart rate to drop more for men compared to women.
Another example of a moderating variable could be age. It’s
likely that each extra hour of exercise causes resting heart
rate to drop more for younger people compared to older
people.
Onset of putrefaction of cadaver varies among countries. The cadaver will
decompose approximately 24-48 hours in tropical countries while 36-28
hours in other countries. If your going to conduct an experiment to which
cadaver shall decompose faster as to the size of the body, the climate
shall be _______
a. Independent variables
b. Dependent variables
c. Moderating variables
d. Mediating variables
e. Control variables
 Examples Of Controlled Variables
For example, Smith is a student who has got 80 percent in a science exam. As earlier Smith
was poor in science subjects, after listening to the score of Smith, his friend felt shocked. When
Smith’s friend asked him about the reason he stated that it is the extra time which he has spent
on studying science subject helped him in achieving a high score.
Presently there are two variable these are “studying “and the other is “score”, now let’s
add control variable that could be “healthy “. Now there can be a debate that after studying for
long hour Smith gets prone to specific diseases which can be considered to be the biggest reason
because of which Smith has achieved low scores. In this situation, health is a control variable that
has highly influenced dependent variable that is exam.

Note: If you are conducting research on human behavior, then it can be quite complicated to
study it by using two variables. You will want to at least consider 3 controlled variables.

Another example of a control variable

The temperature is a control variable. But for making the “temperature” control variable
you require ensuring that it remains constant throughout the experiment.
In research, such as a questionnaire or a measuring device, like a
weighing scale or a thermometer is changed during the study period
between the pretest and the post test, the change could result in an
effect that is independent of the intervention and yet, may be
attributed to it.
A. History
B. Selection
C. Instrumentation
D. Testing
What do you call to the brief description of the entire population of the
study and the sampling type technique in the study?
A. Search instrument
B. Population and sampling scene
C. Specific objectives
D. Description of the study
Psgt. Daniel, a graduate school student, wanted to determine the
acceptability of the 50/50 work scheme among uniformed personnel of
Maliksi Police Station. This work scheme entails that only half of the
personnel will report to work in any given day. Which is the most
appropriate research method that he will use?
A. Correlational
B. Explanatory
C. Descriptive
D. Exploratory
Which data gathering method will be used by a researcher if he or she
verbally communicates with the respondents about the study?
A. Observation
B. Interview
C. Information dissemination
D. Survey questionnaire
A person was considered to be a serial killer for having been proved
beyond reasonable doubt of killing 9 persons. He came from a
respected family and was well- educated. A criminologist would like to
conduct a study to determine the reason behind the killings committed
by the convict. To achieve this objective, which is the most appopriate
research method to use?
A. Phenomenology
B. Ethnography
C. Biography
D. Case study
The following are approaches to quantitative research, except ______.
A. Survey research
B. Grounded theory
C. Experimental research
D. Casual-comparative research
This method of data collection used in exploratory research has the
idea to produce a sense of synergy among the participants, which
should in theory, result in a richer and more fruitful discussion.
a. Focus group interviews
b. Depth interviews
c. Either a or b
d. Neither a nor b
It is a complete analysis of scholarly sources on a selected topic of
study. It is crafted to give an overview of the current knowledge, to help
the researcher know the methods, theories, and gaps that exist in
research.
a. Research studies
b. Literature review
c. Research
d. Research review
qWhat is literature review ?
Ø A systematic method for identifying, evaluating and
interpreting the work produced by researchers, scholars
and practitioners
Ø A thesis literature review is a complete analysis of scholarly
sources on a selected topic of study. It is crafted to give an
overview of the current knowledge, to help the researcher
know the methods, theories, and gaps that exist in research.
Ø An interpretation and synthesis of published work
It is a systematic method of collecting and measuring data gathered
from different sources of information in order to provide answers to
relevant questions.
a. Literature review
b. Data gathering
c. Data analysis
d. Interpretation of data
Data Gathering
Data gathering or collection is a systematic method of collecting
and measuring data gathered from different sources of information in
order to provide answers to relevant questions.
An accurate evaluation of collected data can help researchers
predict future phenomenon and trends . Data collection is a crucial
aspect in any level research work. If the data are inaccurately collected,
it will surely impact the findings of the study, thereby leading to false
or invaluable outcome.
It refers to the gathering of second-hand data collected by an individual
who is not the original user.
a. Primary Data
b. Secondary Data
c. Tertiary data
d. Raw data
Types Of Data
The two broad categories of data are:
1. Primary Data- It is the gathering of raw data collected at the
primary source. it is a process of collecting the original data
collected by a researcher for a specific research purpose.
2. Secondary Data- It refers to the gathering of second-hand data
collected by an individual who is not the original user. It is the
process of collecting data that is already existing, be it already
published books, journals, and/or online portals.
It is also suitable in examining sensitive topics, as the rapport building
provides a comfortable atmosphere for participant's disclosure.
a. Qualitative method of research
b. Quantitative method of research
c. Research
d. All of the above
When to Use Qualitative Research?
Qualitative methods are typically used for providing an in-depth
understanding of the research issues that embrace the perspectives of
the study population and the context in which they live.
It is most suitable for addressing the "why" questions to explain
and understand issues or "how" questions that describe the processes
or behaviors .
It is also suitable in examining sensitive topics, as the rapport
building provides a comfortable atmosphere for participant's
disclosure.
Moreover, this method is useful for exploring new topics and
explaining complex issues such as people's beliefs and behavior; and
for identifying the social or cultural norms of a group or society.
The researcher is interested in understanding how participants make
meaning of a situation or phenomenon, this meaning is mediated
through the researcher as instrument, the strategy is inductive, and the
outcome is descriptive.
a. Basic Interpretive Qualitative Study
b. Phenomenological Research
c. Phenomenological Research
d. Nota
1. Basic Interpretive Qualitative Study
It is the basic interpretive and descriptive study Which exemplifies
all the characteristics of qualitative research. The researcher is interested
in understanding how participants make meaning of a situation or
phenomenon, this meaning is mediated through the researcher as
instrument, the strategy is inductive, and the outcome is descriptive.
It seeks to discover and understand a phenomena, a process, the
perspective and worldviews of the people involved, or a combination of
these. Data are collected through interviews, observations, or document
analysis.
These data are inductively analyzed to identify the recurring
patterns or common themes that cut across the data. Then a descriptive
account of findings is presented and discussed, using the references to
the literature that framed the study in the first place .
Attempts to understand problems, ideas, and situations from the
perspective of common understanding and experience rather than
differences.
a. Basic Interpretive Qualitative Study
b. Grounded Theory Methodology
c. Phenomenological Research
d. Nota
2. Phenomenological Research
attempts to understand problems, ideas, and situations from the
perspective of common understanding and experience rather than
differences.
It investigates a phenomenon or event by describing and
interpreting participants' lived experiences .
Phenomenology is about understanding how human beings
experience their world. It gives researchers a powerful tool with which
to understand subjective experience.
It helps researchers to explore those experiences, thoughts, and
feelings and helps to elicit the meaning underlying how people behave.
It is a research method that will enable a researcher to develop a
theory which offers an explanation about the main concern of the
population of your substantive area and how that concern is resolved
or processed. This methodology is appropriate when little is known
about a phenomenon
a. Basic Interpretive Qualitative Study
b. Grounded Theory Methodology
c. Phenomenological Research
d. Nota
3. Grounded Theory Methodology
is an inductive, comparative methodology that provides
systematic guidelines for gathering, synthesizing, analyzing, and
conceptualizing qualitative data for the purpose of theory construction.
It is a research method that will enable a researcher to develop a
theory which offers an explanation about the main concern of the
population of your substantive area and how that concern is resolved
or processed .
It was originally introduced by sociologists Barney Glaser and
Anselm Strauss on their book The Discovery of Grounded Theory:
Strategies for Qualitative Research (1967). This seminal work explained
how theory could be generated from data inductively. This process
challenged the traditional method of testing or refining theory through
deductive testing.
 This methodology is appropriate when little is known about a
phenomenon; the aim being to produce or construct an explanatory theory that
uncovers a process inherent to the substantive area of inquiry. One of the defining
characteristics of Grounded Theory is that it aims to generate theory that is
grounded in the data .
The researcher begins with a broad query in a particular topic area and
then collects relevant information about the topic. As the action processes of
data collection continue, each piece of information is reviewed, compared, and
contrasted with other information.
From this constant comparison process, commonalities and dissimilarities
among categories of information become clear, and ultimately a theory that
explains observations is inductively developed.
Thus, queries that will be answered through grounded theory do not relate
to specific domains but rather to the structure of how the researcher wants to
organize the findings. Grounded theory can also be used to modify existing theory
or to expand on or uncover differences from what is already known.
The primary goal of this qualitative interview is to hear what
respondents think is important about the topic at hand and to hear it in
their own words.
a. Qualitative interviews
b. In-depth interviews
c. Focus Groups
d. Nota
Qualitative interviews allow respondents to
share information in their own words and are
useful for gathering detailed information and
understanding social processes. Common
qualitative interviews are:
In-depth interviews and Focus Groups interviews
In-depth interviews
are semi-structured interviews where the researcher has topics
and questions in mind to ask, but questions are open-ended and flow
according to how the participant responds to each. The primary goal of
an in-depth interview is to hear what respondents think is important
about the topic at hand and to hear it in their own words.
In this qualitative interview, the researcher's aim is to get participants
talking to each other and to observe interactions among participants,
and act as the moderator.
a. Qualitative interviews
b. In-depth interviews
c. Focus Groups
d. Nota
Focus Groups
It is the method of asking questions and generating discussion
among a group of people. It is an unstructured interviews with multiple
participants, which allow participants and a facilitator to interact freely
with one another and to build on ideas and conversation.
This method allows for the collection of group-generated data.
The researcher's aim is to get participants talking to each other and
to observe interactions among participants, and act as the moderator.
The moderator's job is not to ask questions to each person
individually, but to stimulate conversation between participants. It is
important to set ground rules for focus groups at the outset of the
discussion.
Is a procedure used in experiments to create study groups with similar
characteristics so that the groups are equivalent at the beginning of the
study.
a. Random sampling
b. Random assignment
c. Blinding
d. Sampling
Random Assignment
is a procedure used in experiments to create study groups with
similar characteristics so that the groups are equivalent at the
beginning of the study.
Blinding
is a technique used to decrease bias on the part of the researcher or
the participant where the participant, or both the researcher and the
participant are not told to which group they have been assigned. In
some studies, the participant is not told to which group they have been
assigned.
It provides credibility to the study as it shows the researcher has done
his/her "homework" in reading the research for this topic, and his/her
study is "grounded" in the research.
a. Introduction
b. Review of the Literature
c. Methods
d. Results
e. Discussion
 The literature review also provides the justification for the study
as the researcher/author indicates the gaps and weaknesses in the
existing research.
Chapter Two provides credibility to the study as it shows the
researcher has done his/her "homework" in reading the research for
this topic, and his/her study is "grounded" in the research.
In other words, the thesis did not simply appear from thin air;
instead, it was developed because there was a need to conduct the
study, and it will contribute to the body of research related to this
problem.
In methodology, it is the statistical or qualitative techniques that were
used to analyze the data.
a. Setting
b. Participants
c. Procedures
d. Data Analysis
Chapter Three will include the following components:
a. Setting- where the study took place;
b. Participants- the individuals who participated in the study and how they
were selected),
c. Instructional or Intervention Materials- any materials or instructional
strategies that were used to conduct the study;
d. Measurement Instruments- the tools you used to collect data:
e. Procedures- how the data was collected and/or implemented the study;
and
f. Data Analysis- the statistical or qualitative techniques that were used to
analyze the data. It is important to remember that there should be
enough detail included so that another researcher could replicate the
study.
This is the specific aggregation of the elements, also known as universe.
a. Sample
b. Population
c. Variable
d. Constant
 What are the types of sampling?
Probability sampling/Scientific Sampling
is a sampling design that gives equal probability or chance to each item
or individual in the population of being selected in the study.
is ideal when the researcher wishes to generalize his findings to a population of
interest. Often, it is used for quantitative surveys.
Population = specific aggregation of the elements, also known as universe
Sample = representative portion of a whole. subset of a population
Non-probability sampling
is a sampling design that gives unequal chance to each item or individual
in the population of being selected in the study.
is ideal when the researcher wishes to study in- depth a particular phenomenon.
Ease of using non-probability sampling.
Selecting the individuals out of N such that individuals have equal
chances of being selected. Techniques suitable for homogeneous
population.
a. Systematic random sampling
b. Random sampling
c. Stratified sampling
d. Simple cluster sampling
 General types of sampling
Probability sampling

1. Random sampling
Selecting the individuals out of N such that individuals have equal chances of
being selected.
Techniques suitable for homogeneous population.
2. Systematic random sampling
Sample is selected through simple random process.
Succeeding samples are chosen in a pre-established
intervals
3. Stratified sampling
Divide samples in homogeneous groups
called strata.
Draw sample from simple random sampling.
4. Simple cluster sampling
A one stage sampling technique where the
population is grouped by cluster elements.
This sampling is ideal when the researcher wishes to study in- depth a
particular phenomenon.
a. Probability sampling/Scientific Sampling
b. Non-probability sampling
c. Judgment sampling
d. Accidental sampling
e. Snowball Sampling
Non-probability sampling
Judgment sampling
Selecting representative sample according to your subjective
judgment.
Appropriate to make when you have made a judgment about an
individual’s potential as source of information
• Quota sampling
• A variation of judgment sampling
• A defined quota must be filled, predetermined by certain
extent of characteristics of the population so that the
quota sample will be representative of the population.
Accidental sampling
Simple technique whoever happens to be there at the
time of data collection.
Done on spot surveys.
Authoritative Sampling – Determines the target population or
those to be involved in the study. (Only those who met the
qualification needed).

Snowball Sampling - Researchers use this sampling method if

the sample for the study is very rare or is limited to a very small
subgroup of the population. This type of sampling technique
works like chain referral. After observing the initial subject, the
researcher asks for assistance from the subject to help identify
people with a similar trait of interest.
 Research
Hypothesis
HYPOTHESIS (Wise Guess)

is, simply put, a prediction of the possible outcomes of a study.”

In other words, a hypothesis is the tentative answer to a research
question in an explanatory research.
It states the expected relationship between two variables (Dantzker &
Hunter, 2006), for example delinquent peers and delinquent acts.
For instance, if your research question is:
 Do children who have more delinquent peers commit more delinquent acts than children who
have fewer or no delinquent peers?
 Your research hypothesis might be:
 “Children who have more delinquent peers tend to commit more delinquent acts than children
who have no or fewer delinquent peers.”
Hypothesis
Types Of Hypothesis
1. Descriptive Hypothesis = use to answer descriptive questions
 Ex. Sub-problem: What is the profile of the polygraph examiners of law enforcement agencies in terms of:
1.1. age;
1.2. marital status;
1.3. educational attainment; and
1.4. Length of Service
 Ex. Hypothesis : “Majority of the respondents belong to the age bracket of 30 to 40, male, college graduate and
about 20 years in service.”
2. Statistical Hypothesis = use to answer questions on the relationship or differences of data obtained in
descriptive questions.
 Forms of Statistical Hypothesis
a. Research Hypothesis / Alternative Hypothesis - is the tentative answer to the research question stating the
relationship between two variables.
b. Null hypothesis - states that there is no relationship between two variables. This hypothesis is important in
statistical inference. Although usually researchers state the research hypothesis instead of the null hypothesis in
journal articles, it is the null hypothesis that researchers try to disprove using empirical data.
c. Rival Hypothesis is arrived when the data reject both the research hypothesis and the null hypothesis and provides
an alternative answer to the research question.
Three forms of alternative hypothesis:
Three forms of alternative hypothesis:
1. Non-directional Hypothesis
2. Positive Directional Hypothesis
3. Negative Directive Hypothesis

Nondirectional Hypothesis – indicates that the researcher is not interested on whether

onevariable is greater or lesser than the other, but only in the difference.
Ex. Drug A and Drug B have significant effects on the cure of fever. Ha: A = B
Positive Directional Hypothesis
Ex. Drug A is more effective than Drug B on the treatment of fever. Ha: A >B
Negative Directional Hypothesis
Ex. Drug B is more effective that Drug A on the treatment of fever. Ha: A < B
Assumption
self-evident truth which is based upon known fact or phenomenon. it
is not
usually answered or proven because it is assumed true or correct which
are beyond the control
of the researcher.
is something that you assume to be the case, even without proof.
Assumptions put limitations on conclusions. Assumptions are
unavoidable to solve complex problems. It should be reasonable to
accept. Thanks so much for all your wonderful contributions.
Research Instrument
1. Researcher Instrument = the researcher obtains information or data himself
with little or no direct involvement of the other people
2. Subject Instrument = the information is collected directly from the respondents
3. Informant Instrument = the information or data is collected from those
knowledgeable of the subject matter
Commonly Used Instruments
4. Questionnaire - written or printed form containing the questions to be asked on
the respondents.
5. Interview- involves face to face contact between the interviewee and the
interviewer
6. Observation - may be defined as perceiving data through the sense: sight,
hearing, taste touch and smell.
 sense of sight is the most important and most used most direct way and most widely used in studying
behavior
Research Instrument
Types of Interview
1. Structured Interview - there is a set of carefully prepared questions
and their expected answers are provided
2. Unstructured Interview - respondents are free to express their
opinions
also termed as non-directive or informal
Research Instrument
1. Formal Observation = researcher makes a guide on what to observe.
Possible responses may also be outlined
2. Informal Observation = needs critical evaluation of the observation
made to avoid biased results
 recommended for qualitative research
Qualities of Good Research Instrument
1. Validity = degree to which a measuring instrument measures what it intends
to measure
2. Reliability = extent to which the instrument is dependable, self-consistent
and stable
consistency of responses from moment to moment
even a person takes the same test twice, the test yields the same results
reliable test may not always be valid
3. Usability = otherwise known as Practicability
degree to which the research instrument can be satisfactorily used. It may be
determined thru:
a. ease of administration
b. ease of scoring
c. ease of interpretation
d. low cost
e. proper mechanical make up
Threats to validity
Internal validity is the extent to which a piece of evidence supports a claim
about cause and effect, within the context of a particular study. It is one of
the most important properties of scientific studies and is an important
concept in reasoning about evidence more generally.
Internal validity is determined by how well a study can rule out alternative
explanations for its findings (usually, sources of systematic error or 'bias’).
It contrasts with external validity, the extent to which results can justify
conclusions about other contexts (that is, the extent to which results can be
generalized)
Example threats
Ambiguous temporal precedence
When it is not known which variable changed first, it can be difficult to
determine which variable is the cause and which is the effect.
Confounding
A major threat to the validity of causal inferences is confounding: Changes
in the dependent variable may rather be attributed to variations in a third
variable which is related to the manipulated variable. Where spurious
relationships cannot be ruled out, rival hypotheses to the original causal
inference may be developed.
Selection bias
Selection bias refers to the problem that, at pre-test, differences between groups
exist that may interact with the independent variable and thus be 'responsible'
for the observed outcome. Researchers and participants bring to the experiment
a myriad of characteristics, some learned and others inherent. For example, sex,
weight, hair, eye, and skin color, personality, mental capabilities, and physical
abilities, but also attitudes like motivation or willingness to participate.
History
Events outside of the study/experiment or between repeated measures of the
dependent variable may affect participants' responses to experimental
procedures. Often, these are large-scale events (natural disaster, political change,
etc.) that affect participants' attitudes and behaviors such that it becomes
impossible to determine whether any change on the dependent measures is due
to the independent variable, or the historical event.
Maturation
Subjects change during the course of the experiment or even between
measurements. For example, young children might mature and their ability to
concentrate may change as they grow up. Both permanent changes, such as
physical growth and temporary ones like fatigue, provide "natural" alternative
explanations; thus, they may change the way a subject would react to the
independent variable. So upon completion of the study, the researcher may not
be able to determine if the cause of the discrepancy is due to time or the
independent variable.
Repeated testing (also referred to as testing effects
Repeatedly measuring the participants may lead to bias. Participants may
remember the correct answers or may be conditioned to know that they are
being tested. Repeatedly taking (the same or similar) intelligence tests usually
leads to score gains, but instead of concluding that the underlying skills have
changed for good, this threat to Internal Validity provides a good rival hypothesis.
Instrument change (instrumentality)
The instrument used during the testing process can change the experiment.
This also refers to observers being more concentrated or primed, or having
unconsciously changed the criteria they use to make judgments. This can
also be an issue with self-report measures given at different times. In this
case, the impact may be mitigated through the use of retrospective
pretesting. If any instrumentation changes occur, the internal validity of the
main conclusion is affected, as alternative explanations are readily
available.
Mortality/differential attrition
Main article: Survivorship bias
This error occurs if inferences are made on the basis of only those
participants that have participated from the start to the end. However,
participants may have dropped out of the study before completion, and
maybe even due to the study or programme or experiment itself. For
example, the percentage of group members having quit smoking at post-
test was found much higher in a group having received a quit-smoking
training program than in the control group. However, in the experimental
group only 60% have completed the program. If this attrition is
systematically related to any feature of the study, the administration of the
independent variable, the instrumentation, or if dropping out leads to
relevant bias between groups, a whole class of alternative explanations is
possible that account for the observed differences.
 What Are Variables?
Nominal variables - comprise variables whose attributes differ but have no
rank order, e.g.
Gender.
Male and female persons differ but have no rank (no one is quantitatively higher
than the other in terms of gender).
Ordinal variables - comprise variables whose attributes differ, have ranks but
have no distance, e.g. college year level (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th year).
In terms of college year level, a 1st year student is different from a 4th year student,
the 4th year student has higher year level compared with the 1st year student;
however, we cannot really say how many more subjects this 4th year student has
taken compared with the 1st year student by just basing on the year level data.
 What Are Variables?
Interval variables comprise variables whose attributes differ, have ranks and
distance, but have no absolute zero point. Examples of these are IQ (20, 40,
65, 90, 100, 125),
In terms of IQ, a person with 50 IQ differs from a person with 100 IQ, 100 IQ is
higher than 50 IQ, 100 IQ is 50 more than 50 IQ, but we cannot say that 100 IQ is
twice as large as 50 IQ because there is no absolute zero.
Ratio variables comprise variables whose attributes differ, have ranks,
distance, and absolute zero point. Examples are age (0, 1, 5, 10, 30 years old).
These variables possess all the qualities of the three preceding variables plus an
absolute zero point. In terms of age, a 1 year old child is different from a 5 year old
child, the 5 year old child is older than the 1 year old, the 5 year old child is 4nyears
older than the 1 year old. Thus, they have a ratio: the 1 year old child is 5 years as
young as the 5 year old child (Ratio = 1:5).
 Index or Scale
An index is a composite measure of a variable that simply assigns one point to
each item in the index and sum these points afterwards. If there are five items in
an index, and the respondent chooses the 4 items, the score of this respondent is
4. a scale is a composite measure of a variable that places different weights on
the responses depending on their relative importance in measuring a variable.
A scale is a composite measure of a variable that places different weights on the
responses depending on their relative importance in measuring a variable. For
example, if there are five items in a scale, and the respondent chooses the 2
items/responses that weigh 3 points each, the score of this respondent is 6
points.
 None of these measures, however, is superior to the other; deciding which is more
appropriate depends on the characteristics of the variable and its indicators.
 How will I measure
Intangible Variables in
Criminology?
Self-control attitudinal scale

Measuring self-control using a scale

The most commonly used scale to
measure self-control in criminological
studies is the scale created by
Grasmick et al. (1993). They used 24
items to measure self-control
following Gottfredson and Hirschi’s
(1990) definition. These items were
subdivided into 6 dimensions, and
each dimension was measured by
four items (see Table 7). Their scale is
an example of a Likert scale (one of
the most popular scaling techniques
in criminology). There are, however,
other useful scaling techniques for
the social sciences.
An example of self-control behavioral index.
Measuring self-control using
an index
Let us now illustrate the use
of an index to measure a
variable. The data Donner
and Jennings (2014) used in
their study did not allow
them to use the Grasmick
self-control scale to
measure self-control of
police officers. Instead, they
used an alternative: self-
control behavioral index.
 Statistics

science which deals with the systematic process of collecting, organizing,

classifying, presenting, interpreting and analyzing data.
the practice or science of collecting and analyzing numerical data in large
quantities, especially for the purpose of inferring proportions in a whole
from those in a representative sample.
Statistics is the science concerned with developing and studying methods
for collecting, analyzing, interpreting and presenting empirical data.
Types of Statistics
Descriptive Statistics = it is used to determine the nature of variables without
any attempt to critically compare the extent of relationships or differences
with other variables
Tools of Descriptive Statistics
1. Frequency Counting/Distribution
 is a table that displays the frequency of various outcomes in a sample
2. Percentage -
3. Ranking
4. Measures of Centralities
a. Mean
b. Median
c. Mode
 Types of Statistics
Correlational Statistics = used to determine the degree or magnitude of
association between two variables.
Treats bivariate and multivariate problems
Inferential Statistics = used when in making inferences on the magnitude
of differences of the samples from a large universe.
used in testing hypothesis like differences bet. two or more variables
treats bivariate and multivariate problems
 THESIS
FORMAT
Preliminary Pages
Title Page
Approval Sheet
Acknowledgment
Dedication
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Figures
h. Abstract
 CHAPTER 1
THE PROBLEM AND ITS SETTNG
Introduction Assumption or Hypothesis
 Presents the problem. What the problem is all about  Self-evident truth based upon known fact or
 Rational or reasons for conducting the study phenomenon (Assumption)
 Tentative conclusion or answer to specific questions
Setting of the Study
(Hypothesis)
 Locality of the study. Place where the study is to be
conducted Significance of the Study
Theoretical / Conceptual Framework  Contribution of the result of the study to individuals,
institutions, administrators, society, etc…
 Theoretical / conceptual foundation of the study
Scope and Limitation of the Study
Statement of the Problem
 Boundaries in terms of time, sample, location (Scope)
 General and specific statement of the problem
determined in the study  Weakness of the study beyond the control of the
researcher (Limitation)
Assumption or Hypothesis
 Self-evident truth based upon known fact or
Definition of Terms
phenomenon (Assumption)  It can be lexical or operational definition or a
 Tentative conclusion or answer to specific questions combination thereof of different terms used in the
(Hypothesis) study which are arranged alphabetically
 CHAPTER 2
REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE AND
STUDIES
Foreign Literature
Published articles from foreign countries
Local Literature
Locally published articles
Foreign Studies
Foreign unpublished articles
Local Studies
 Locally unpublished articles
Synthesis
Relevance of literature and studies to the present research
 CHAPTER 3
RESEARCH METHODS AND
PROCEDURES
Research Method Validation of Instrument
 Brief description and justification of the  States brief discussion on how the
research method used in the study instrument was validated
Population and Sampling Scheme  Instrument is tested on individuals who
 Brief presentation of the entire population of are knowledgeable of the subject matter
the study and the type of sampling but are not part of the respondents of the
techniques used in selecting sample study
respondents Procedures in Gathering Data
Description of the Respondents  Contains the step by step procedures used
 Contains detailed description of the by the researcher in reaching the
respondents as to age, sex, marital status, respondents in order to gather data
nature of employment, etc…
Statistical Treatment
Research Instrument
 Contains discussion on the statistics used
 Explanation on how the instrument used in
gathering data was develop as well as its in consonance with the specific problem
detailed description. and hypothesis to be tested
 CHAPTER 4
PRESENTATION, ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA

Contains the answers to all the sub-problems of the study

Answers to the problems are stated one by one according to the
arrangement of sub-problems for clarity and understanding
Answers are presented in textual and tabular forms. Textual explanations
come after the
tables
 CHAPTER 5
SUMMARY OF FINDINGS, Conclusions
CONCLUSIONS AND  Written in present tense
RECOMMENDATIONS  Should be based on the findings of the study
 Logical and valid outgrowth of the findings
Summary of Findings  Should not contain any numerals from the findings
 Contains the specific findings/results of the  Organized and categorized according to the sub-
study
problems
 Presented as they were organized and
categorized in the sub-problems of the Recommendations
study  An appeal to people or institutions concerned to
 Written in past tense
solve the problems discovered in
the study
 No recommendations that will be made for
problems that were not discovered in
the study
 Practical and attainable